Home

PT - Australia Telescope National Facility

1. x x xlo 2 x xx x x x gt lt gt lt gt lt x x gt lt 5 x x xlo xlo E NN x x x lt x gt lt gt lt gt lt gt lt gt lt xx L f age xx x x gt lt gt lt xx gt lt gt lt gt lt gt lt gt lt gt lt gt lt So xo x o x x x o x o xo va xx x gt lt gt lt gt lt xx gt lt gt lt gt lt gt lt gt lt gt lt gt lt c Gg xo x x xo xo x x xo x x xlo xlo xo x x SO xx x gt lt gt lt gt lt xx x gt lt gt lt gt lt gt lt gt x gt lt gt lt gt lt gt lt x gt x x x x xo x x x o xo x x xo x x xlo xlo xo x x 9 ol xx x x gt lt gt lt gt lt xx x gt lt gt lt gt lt gt lt gt lt x x gt lt gt lt gt lt gt lt x gt x gt lt gt lt x HS D o x x xo x x xo x x xo xo x x xo x x x x xlo x xo x x xo g x x gt lt xx x gt lt gt lt gt lt gt lt gt lt gt lt gt lt gt lt gt lt gt lt gt lt gt lt gt lt x x gt lt
2. SIGNAL NAME PIN ODD EVEN yo DESCRIPTION TRACKS TRACKS 1 GND GND Ground 2 GND GND Ground 3 TRACK 1 TRACK 2 MK Format NRZM data output ECL 4 TRACK 1 TRACK 2 MK Format NRZM data output ECL 5 TRACK 3 TRACK 4 MK Format NRZM data output ECL 6 TRACK 3 TRACK 4 MK Format NRZM data output ECL 7 TRACK 5 TRACK 6 MK Format NRZM data output ECL 8 TRACK 5 TRACK 6 MK Format NRZM data output ECL 9 TRACK 7 TRACK 8 MK Format NRZM data output ECL 10 TRACK 7 TRACK 8 MK Format NRZM data output ECL 11 TRACK 9 TRACK 10 MK Format NRZM data output ECL 12 TRACK 9 TRACK 10 MK Format NRZM data output ECL 13 TRACK 11 TRACK 12 MK Format NRZM data output ECL 14 TRACK 11 TRACK 12 MK Format NRZM data output ECL 15 TRACK 13 TRACK 14 MK Format NRZM data output ECL 16 TRACK 13 TRACK 14 MK Format NRZM data output ECL 17 Clock Out Clock Out MK III Tape clock ECL 18 Clock Out Clock Out MK Ill Tape clock ECL 19 TRACK 15 TRACK 16 MK Format NRZM data output ECL 20 TRACK 15 TRACK 16 MK Format NRZM data output ECL 21 TRACK 17 TRACK 18 MK Format NRZM data output ECL 22 TRACK 17 TRACK 18 MK Format NRZM data output ECL 23 TRACK 19 TRACK 20 M
3. DATA 18 Mb s S CLK PB 18 MHz E x 7 ou Yd 1 j DATA 9 Mb s i S CLK 9 Y Y DATA 4 5 Mh s 211 S CLK PB 4 5 MHz E Y NOTE The 2 may deliver either phase of the clock to accommodate Correlator input clocking on either positive ar negative clock edges Figure B 6 C2 Output Timing Interface MkIII format S2 INPUT 3600 10K ECL Driver PF S2 OUTPUT MC10125 1002 Rt oO 5 2 Vdc Data Source 1002 Rt 10K ECL Receiver Data destination 10K ECL Receiver 5 2 Vdc 3600 R1 52 MC10124 3600 R1 10 ECL Driver 5 2 Vdc 52 Figure B 7 C1 amp C2 Electrical Specifications 52 User s Manual APPENDIX C APPENDIX C SAMPLE ROS DEFAULTS FILE THHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHBHE S2 Recorder Operating System startup defaults file v2 3 THHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHBHE Console terminal type e g vt100 term vt100 Console baud rate normally 9600 max 38400 baud 9600 Default recorder mode dfltmode 16x8 1 Default barrel roll setting on or off normally on Should be off to record data that can be usefully played back on an S2 RT barrelroll 2 on Default record
4. en mmc 7 11 lt lt 2 gt gt 1 REC u help J time 1 mode 1 tapeid 1 user 1 record 1 play E ETE 4 Figure 2 7 ROS Normal Display on Bootup PT 2 8 Post installation Checkout Tests Following transportation of the S2 built in test facilities may be used to verify the functionality of the system prior to connection with any external hardware other than a console terminal 2 8 1 System Setup Before testing the system should be set up according to the installation instructions earlier in this chapter No cables are to be connected to the C1 or C2 signal ports The console terminal should be configured for 9600 baud 8 data bits one stop bit no parity 2 8 2 System Signal and Electrical Test Power up the system A self test executes as part of the bootup and should take about one minute to complete you may first be asked to enter your console terminal type and baud rate Verify that the console display following the self test is as shown in Figure 2 7 there may be minor differences such as tape in the Transport window Verify that the time in the upper right corner of the screen is incrementing and that there are no detected faults displayed in the status window middle right Failure of the power on self test causes the test to terminate and print a descriptive message to the console interaction window The status window will indicate Diagnostic test failed wit
5. 181 Response RESP_STATUS_DETAIL generic Msg Code 181 Data bytel Summary byte bit0 1 one or more error conditions in report always set if bit 1 is set 0 no error conditions in report bitl 1 one or more fatal error conditions in report recommend abort current operation 0 no fatal error conditions in report bit2 1 one or more clear on read conditions in report 0 no clear on read conditions in report bit3 7 reserved byte2 Number of status entries max 32 byte3 List of status entries For each entry there are 2 bytes followed by a variable length string as follows bytel Status code number from 1 to 127 STATCODE MAX byte2 Status type 010 1 error condition in table 0 non error condition always set if bit 1 is set 1 fatal error condition F in table 0 non fatal condition bit2 1 clear on read condition in table 0 non clear on read bit3 7 reserved byte3 Status message in the form of an ASCII string terminated by a NULL 0 character maximum 399 chars not incl NULL may contain n to indicate line breaks or maximum 34 chars with short option total data bytes variable max 2000 Description Returns a detailed status description This is like RESP_STATUS but in cludes a text message for each status entry Unlike RESP_STATUS_DE CODE this message may include information specific to this particular
6. Mark Window upper middle Figure 4 8 4 29 Console Command Descriptions RCL Operation Ethernet Usage 4 4 1 Configuring Network Parameters 4 4 2 Console access via rlogin telnet a 4 4 3 RCL access via Internet sockets ee 4 5 Status Codes and Interpretations 4 6 Power on Self Test TAPE 51 Choice of Tape and Tape Speed 52 Tape Shipping and Storage 6 1 62 6 3 6 4 7 1 Troubleshooting Hints Software Reloads Upgrades DSCM Electronics Replacement and Servicing TAM Servicing 6 4 1 Transport Replacement And Servicing 64 2 Syst m Service Callen 24 Yon dak t CRECEN A we ee a ew oe 6 4 3 Transport Setup For Off Line 6 4 4 Transport Write Current Optimization 6 4 5 Transport Temperature Calibration 6 4 6 Transport Tape Guide Adjustment Packaging 7 2 Shipping Environment Overview AA General Packet Format 6 1 6 1 6 1 MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING 6 5 6 5 6 8 6 9 6 9 6 10 6 12 SHIPPING 7 1 7 1 7 2 8 1 52 SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY 52 RCL SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS PROTOCOL A 1 A 1 A 1 52 User s Manual Command Response Summary A 3 Command Response Formats A 5 B S2 SIGNAL AND CONTROL INTERFA
7. DATA or VALIDITY 8 Mb s DATA or VALIDITY 4 Mb s S CLK 32 MHz i i f i S 1Hz PB cw C 1Hz asynchronous 2 2 TIMING SPECIFICATIONS PARAMETER VALUE ts Data S 1Hz to S CLK setup time e 05 6 5 ns tw CLK pulse width high 6 15 6 4 5 ns t S CLK to data S 1Hz hold time 15 6 5 ns t Minimum C 1Hz pulse width 31 3 ns Figure B 4 C2 Output Timing Interface 32 MHz clk DATA or VALIDITY 32 Mb s S CLK PB 32 MHz 4 4 f f f S 1Hz_PB DATA or VALIDITY 16 Mb s 5 1 PB 16 Miz 4 f L S 1Hz_PB DATA or VALIDITY 8 Mb s S CLK PB 8 MHz S 1Hz PB DATA or VALIDITY 4 Mb s id 4 CLK PB 4 MHz 5 182 PB NE 4 C 1Hz 1 NOTE All active positive clock edges to occur at data and 1Hz 14 11 5 ns NOTE C CLK and C 1Hz are optional Correlator reference signals to an 2 Playback Terminal a C CLK shown as 32 MHz may be 32 16 8 or 4 MHz b C 1Hz may be any pulse width exceeding 1 32 us or 31 3 ns Figure B 5 C2 Output Timing Interface clk data rate B 12 S2 PT User s Manual APPENDIX B
8. Figure 4 6 Sample ROS Screen Bad Status 4 2 8 2 Status Window middle right Figure 4 6 Body of window Contains one line status messages summarizing the health of the system Error and fatal error messages are highlighted but informational messages not Transient status entries known as clear on read conditions stay on the display until you type status reset Refer to the list of status codes in Section 4 5 for the meaning and possible causes of each status message If there are more than 3 status conditions the status window can be paged down and back up using status pagedn and status pageup To show all current status conditions at once with slightly more verbose descriptions use status display fullscreen This in particular includes the status code numbers not shown in the status window which are useful to quickly find the right entry in the list of status codes in Section 4 5 You can also dump the current status information to the 52 internal log file by typing status display tolog This provides an easy way to save a status snapshot for later examination Bottom boundary line The current status page number is shown on the left side of the bottom window boundary and the word is displayed on the right side if there is another page below this one If any fatal status errors exist the word FAIL appears highlighted in the middle Fatal errors indicate that the current operation is probabl
9. dle tape time half way between the two Self alignment is the type of alignment normally performed automatically each time playback starts How ever the user may explicitly initiate self alignment to force tape alignment following certain status conditions such as STAT ALIGNFAIL a fatal error in the previous alignment attempt see below To prevent the automatic self alignment at the start of playback issue a relative ALIGN command with a zero offset i e hours minutes seconds nsec all 0 immediately after play back starts This will result in a STAT ALIGNFAIL message with error code ERR NOALIGN which can be ignored but no tape slewing will take place While alignment is in progress the current tape time is undefined and playback data including auxiliary data is invalid The STATUS command should be used to monitor the progress of the alignment procedure STAT ALIGNIP indicates that tape alignment is in progress and STAT ALIGNDONE will appear momentarily when alignment successfully completes STAT ALIGNFAIL indicates that the alignment operation aborted due to a fatal error and will persist until another alignment operation is ex plicitly started or playback is terminated STAT ERRALIGN appears momen tarily to indicate non fatal errors which cause the alignment operation to be automatically restarted Finally STAT NOALIGN appears whenever tapes are not aligned and playback data should be considered invalid It will disappear f
10. 1 RESP ERR ERR NONE 0 5 sec scpll mode refclklIhzlerrmeslxtallmanual Sets the System Clock Phase Lock Loop mode The SC PLL located on the UI board drives all of the S2 system timing Its mode determines what the PLL uses as its lock reference The SC PLL is normally locked to an exter nal high rate reference clock during record refclk or to a 1 Hz or software reference for playback rate control at a correlator 1hz or errmes The PLL can also run independently based on an internal crystal oscillator xtal or be controlled manually for testing manual The initial SC PLL mode is deter mined by the scpllmode option of the system defaults file SCPLL MODE READ 43 none RESP SCPLL MODE 0 5 sec scpll mode also displayed on console userio screen Reads the current System Clock Phase Lock Loop mode which determines what is being used as the system timing reference TAPETYPE SET 44 bytel ASCII tape type string terminated by a NULL 0 character maximum 6 characters not incl NULL Note that all normal tape type codes are one character long 0 9 A Z but unlisted tape types are six digits long of the form NNNMMM where NNN is the write current for LP and MMM is the write current for SLP total data bytes length of string 1 max 7 RESP ERR ERR NONE 0 5 sec tapetype STR Sets the tape type This indicates what type of tape is loaded in the S2 us ing the type codes 0 9 and A Z as listed in
11. 2 str sent by shifted home key 3 str sent by shifted input key 4 str sent by shifted left arrow key 950 str sent by redo key 961 str sent by help key 962 str sent by mark key 963 str sent by message key 964 str sent by move key 965 str sent by next object key 966 str sent by open key 967 str sent by options key 968 str sent by previous object key 269 str sent by print or copy key 52 User s Manual a b str str bool str str str str str str str str str str str str str str str str bool bool str str str NP NP NP NP NP 0 0 NP APPENDIX D sent by shifted message key sent by shifted move key sent by shifted next object key sent by shifted options key sent by shifted previous object key sent by shifted print or copy key sent by shifted redo key sent by shifted replace key sent by shifted right arrow key sent by shifted resume key sent by shifted cancel key sent by ref erence key sent by refresh key sent by replace key sent by restart key sent by resume key sent by save key sent by suspend key sent by undo key sent by shifted beg inning key sent by shifted find key sent by shifted cmd command key sent by shifted copy key sent by shifted create key sent by shifted delete char key sent by shifted delete line key sent by select key sent by shifted end key sent by shifted clear line key sent by shifted exit key printer will not echo on scree
12. Interpretation A system diagnostic test such as the power on self test self1 is currently running Upon completion either STAT DIAGDONE or STAT DIAGFAIL will appear 2 Mnemonic STAT DIAGDONE Type Informational clear on read Console Msg Diagnostic test completed Interpretation A system diagnostic test such as the power on self test has completed successfully Requires verbose level 3 to appear on the console 52 User s Manual OPERATION 3 Mnemonic STAT DIAGFAIL Type Fatal error clear on read Console Msg Diagnostic test failed code nnn Interpretation A system diagnostic test such as the power on self test has detected a problem Due to space limitations the console status window shows only a numeric di agnostic code This can be expanded using status display or status dis play fullscreen It is also possible to perform a direct translation of the status code using status decode but occurrence specific message fields such as chan nel and transport numbers will be filled with instead of real information To confirm the results of the power on self test the test can be re run using diag selfl verbose 4 Mnemonic STAT VMEPOWFAIL Type Fatal error Console Msg VME xxx power supply bad Interpretation One or more VME power supplies are outside the acceptable range 5 of nomi nal as measured by an A D converter on the Formatter board The exact measured voltages can be d
13. alljautoselect NUM lt addr gt NUM lt addr gt NUM lt addrs status version serial state position time volt rec sig pgshift wrlev log stop play position INUM lt hours gt NN lt mins gt NN lt secs gt preset NUM lt hours gt NN lt mins gt NN lt secs gt unknown reestablish tracking NUM lt amount gt center recalibrate phase2only auto manual phase1 phase2 wrlev NUM optimize program alternate STR lt file gt long caltemp NUM degC pgshift recval playval NUM us wrlevoffset NUM options takeupsense enable disable wrlevoff set enable disable default service lastserv las theadledithist dumpmem tofile loadmem NUM lt oldserial gt cleartimes display time day year position esterr dv ag clevel chanid temp servtime headtime ontime tracking serial seri alpb state assignaddr NUM lt serial gt NUM lt addr gt Description Sets displays low level transport control options and switches Most of these are for diagnostic and system configuration use Many functions provided here are low level versions of regular operational commands and should never be used for regular operation The command transport play for example is not the same as play and should never be used in its place The following descriptions include only the most commonly used command options The display option selects what to display in the Transport window Pos sibilities include individua
14. rations with long to include file sizes and dates Use delete to erase con figurations The configuration save area includes files containing transport service infor mation that were dumped using the transport service dumpmem tofile command or automatically by the system see Section 4 Command cue Syntax cue Description Puts the currently selected transports into a forward movement state that is about 9 times faster than playback but slower than fast forward This command serves no significant purpose in normal operation and should be avoided Use the po sition command instead to perform tape positioning The S2 must currently be in playback otherwise cue is not allowed Also must not currently be aligning or positioning Use uncue to stop cueing and return to normal play Command def Syntax def auxsnap statsnap accumulate syncerrlocate histogram NUM lt startblk gt NUM lt endblk gt NUM time s m cumulative NUM lt decay gt log10 enable disablelerrtrigger NUM lt errs1sec gt off xbar SSSSSSSS drand dhook dprec usrdv onloff reset Description Sets displays low level deformatter control options and switches Strictly for di agnostic use only The auxsnap statsnap and accumulate options display raw auxiliary data and deformatter status in various formats for the current di agnostic DRD The syncerrlocate option is a data gathering and graphing facility which shows how errors are distributed acros
15. 52 User s Manual OPERATION S2 Recorder User Parms playback rec24 1998 217 20 19 06 Operating System Tape ID CA 3 0028813 Recorder mode 32x4 2 br Station delay no 1 Hz inl Transports Station USUDA64 Diag dec 6 in channel 6 play 0 03 06 41 00 Source 3C273 Diag dec time 211 03 06 41 00 2 03 06 41 001 3 03 06 41 001 User data valid yes 4403 06 41 001 Tape speed slp 5 03 06 41 001 Tape position 2 40 24 4 02 s 6 03 06 41 00 Est err rate 4 9e 5 8 ch data valid 99 99 128 Mb s Decoder 01234567 1 03 06 41 00 Scan Start 211 03 00 00 Diag dec sync 100 track cal 7 03 06 41 001 lt lt EM gt gt 11 I REC SoSH as stop position 2 40 00 gt play gt i Chelp 1 time 1 mode 1 Ctapeid 1 user 1 record 1 play 1 C ETC Figure 4 2 Sample ROS Screen User playback 4 2 4 Basic Procedures Although there are many possible commands only a few of them are actually needed for everyday S2 operation This section outlines the commands and procedures that will typically be used during regular operation of an S2 Playback Terminal to play back and or record tapes It is written from the point of view of the console but can easily be applied to the RCL as well When first leaming to use the S2 we recommen
16. If any transport fails to respond within 30 seconds of being programmed the entire operation will abort with an error message In this case some transports may not yet have been reprogrammed and one transport may be dead or only partially programmed If you have a transport that is apparently dead does not beep and set its front panel address display a few seconds after power on it is sometimes possible to recover using a special emergency recovery feature Hold the eject button on the front panel while applying power to the transport This will force it into program mode after which you can try to re program it using transport N program all ag25x0 where ag25x0 is the type of transport This method works only for problems related to a partially corrupted EEPROM use it only when all other possibilities such as a bad cable have been thoroughly checked For more information on programming transports see the transport command on page 4 51 6 3 DSCM Electronics Replacement and Servicing The DSCM electronics have no manual adjustments and should require servicing only to replace long life lithium batteries located on the SRAM and RCC boards see below Removing DSCM PC boards should otherwise only be required in the event of a fault in the electronics which requires substitution of a board DSCM PC boards are to be positioned as shown in Figure 6 1 1 The RCC MVMEI33XT must be positioned in slot 1 2 The ETHERNET board if p
17. The Centre for Research in Earth and Space Technology A Centre of Excellence funded by a grant from the Ontario Technology Fund and other private industrial federal and international sources S2 PT User s Manual Version 3 2 133 October 1998 CRESTech SGL TR98 044 Centre for Research Earth and Space Technology Space Geodynamics Laboratory 4850 Keele Street North York Ontario Canada M3J 3K1 TEL 416 665 5470 FAX 416 665 1815 Email s2support sgl crestech ca Web http www sgl crestech ca 52 User s Manual Table of Contents INTRODUCTION 11 S2 PT User Documentation 1 2 S2 Physical Description 1 2 4 Transport Array Module TAM 122 Data Signal and Control Module DSCM INSTALLATION 2 1 2 2 2 3 24 2 5 2 6 2 7 2 8 Introduction Identifying Cable Ports 2 24 JDSCNE zs Vnlg cnc Mee WEN ah 22 2 TAM BOE 255 e 1t Reto M fr e Sl ede tient Ait eee ur le de a Go le Cables 2 34 S2 User Cables ure ue ee ads At Cate yx AE S 2 3 2 52 System Cables Power Requirements Power cables 120 Volt Operation Power cables 240 Volt Operation External Transformer Post installation Checkout Tests 2 81 System Set p is 4 GG Se PEM 2 82 System Signal and Electrical Test 2 83 Record Playback Performan
18. Two types of pseudo random test vectors can be produced by the S2 to record test tapes the Formatter test vector and the UI test vector Facilities for using the Formatter vector are slightly more versatile so it is usually preferred The Formatter test vector is enabled by typing form diag on before making a recording Then use form berc during playback to take bit error rate measurements For an average across all active playback channels use form berc rotate See Page 4 37 for more information on these commands 52 User s Manual OPERATION The UI test vector is different from the one produced by the Formatter It is used for the C1 and C2 cable test modes as well as the UI diag modes To make a recording with the UI test vector attach an appropriate external test data generator to the C1 cable or switch to one of the UI diag modes e g mode diag8 Then use uic berc during playback to take bit error rate measurements See Page 4 54 for more information Starting the Recording Once all of the above parameters have been set starting the recording is easy just type record During record the S2 automatically scans the transports and monitors the data being recorded including tests for proper signal level recovery of sync and correct extraction of auxiliary data Although the transports are not capable of read after write the loopback signals being monitored are tapped off as close to the record heads as possible Any unusual conditions
19. UI verifier shows failure condition indicates distributor de distributor failure If any fatal non clear on read status conditions are found the self test terminates The status window will indicate Diagnostic test failed with diagnostic code DIAG_ONLINEFAIL 3 Signal Path Checks This series of tests verifies the integrity of S2 internal data paths Checks transport AGC levels are between 100 and 254 in bypass Checks all N bypass channels have correct syne amp auxiliary data and show acceptable FORM BERC error rates using MLSD decoding N is determined by the diagnumtran defaults file parameter usually 8 Checks all N bypass channels show acceptable FORM BERC error rates using bit by bit decoding reduced signal margin test produces warning message only does not fail self test Checks C4 cable 8 way splitter C4p wiring corresponds to DRD addresses User can also visually check left to right sequencing of DRD lights during bootup to ensure addresses are assigned in the proper order Checks transport addresses correspond to C3 C4 cable channel numbers 52 User s Manual OPERATION Using mode diag8 or diag4 if fewer than 8 transports are present to inject the UI diagnostic sequence checks that all 16 user data channels show acceptable UI BERC error rates bypass path Checks all permutations of the DRD distributed c
20. to show the contents of the log in time order Entries are coded using upper case letters and these type codes can be used for filtering the display e g use og display 5 to show only messages derived from system status or log display ST to show everything except status and timing related messages Enter log display typecodes for a list of the different log type codes The tail option is useful to show just the most recent part of the log or you can enter a line number at which to start displaying the log With the fullscreen option the log display occupies the entire console screen instead of just the interaction window This can be used to capture the log to a file if your terminal emulator has that capability e g in ROSCO press shift F9 followed by F2 to begin capturing incoming char acters to a file It is also possible to transfer log files over the network see the tofile option below Use the stop and start options to temporarily halt and continue logging The 109 command by itself shows whether logging is active and gives the current size of the log file The maximum log file size is 350K or roughly 6000 average size log entries If this limit is exceeded the oldest log 52 User s Manual OPERATION entries will be overwritten in a circular fashion The log file is kept in battery backed up SRAM so it will survive crashes and power failures Note that log clear automatically restarts logging if it is sto
21. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 WARNING PC boards should only be removed or inserted when DSCM power is off Be careful not to snag components on either side of the board against adjacent boards or panels Where there is a blank panel to the left of the board being removed the blank panel should be removed first The VME boards RCC Ethernet and SRAM must not be positioned in slot 4 or higher for any reason The S2 custom boards FORM DRD and UI must not be positioned in slots 1 3 for any reason Failure to follow this directive will result in damage to the system Figure 6 1 DSCM PC Board Configuration DSCM FORM and DRD Replacement When replacing DRDp boards the address jumpers on the boards should be set from 0 to 7 corresponding to the slot position the boards occupy and must match the labels on the ends of the C4p 8 way splitter cable The jumpers are located near the back of the DRDp board to the right of the silkscreen label ADDRESS The three jumper contacts are labeled 0 1 and 2 corresponding to the binary address of the board least significant bit 0 Connecting these pins corresponds to setting the address bit to 0 and disconnected pins correspond to setting the address bit to 1 For example setting the DRDp to address 6 means only the jumper at position 0 should be installed After setting the jumpers replace the label plate located in the board extractor on the bottom front of the board so that it correctly identi
22. 258 thick 4h 01m 6h 02m recommended 4 Fuji H471S ST 120 246 thick 3h 50m 5h 45m 4 Fuji H471S SE 180 258 thick 4h 01m 6h 02m Table 5 1 S2 Approved Tape Types 5 2 Tape Shipping and Storage Tapes must be shipped and stored in closed containers Canadian Space Agency CSA tapes use a low cost cardboard sleeve designed to hold a set of 8 tapes and a padded cardboard shipping container that holds 4 tape sets or 32 tapes total Whenever tapes are not in the transports they should always be placed in their containers If no CSA or equivalent tape containers are available standard VHS dust jackets may be used For maximum data integrity tapes should be stored vertically in the fully rewound position Tapes should be fully rewound when shipped Tape Shipping Environment The ideal shipping environment for tape is 19 22 degrees Celsius at a relative humidity of 45 to 55 Envi ronmental limits are to be determined S2 PT User s Manual MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING 6 MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING This chapter provides information and procedures for servicing and maintaining the S2 PT For additional or updated service procedures please see the following directory on our web site ftp ftp sgl crestech ca pub s2 doc service 6 1 Troubleshooting Hints The following are explanations for some commonly encountered problems 1 Q When issuing a record command one or more tapes are ejected model AG2510 transports or the tr
23. 4 25 head use time 4 25 in service time 4 25 on time 4 25 playback TCP serial number 4 25 state tape time 4 24 tape position 4 25 transport state 4 25 transport temp 4 25 transport tracking 4 25 Window User I O 4 25 data in 4 26 C2 data out 4 26 C2 DV out 4 26 data rate 4 25 Ref clk in rate 4 27 Ref clk out rate 4 27 Ref clk 1 Hz in 4 27 SC PLL lock mode 4 27 Window User Parms 4 5 4 23 tape ID 4 23 tape position 4 23 tape speed 4 23 user data valid 4 23 user info 4 23 Write Current 4 53 optimization 6 9 writeprotect 4 43 wrlevoffoption 4 53 Index 5
24. All tapes have been 52 STAT RPMONILSTATE EFC unexpected transport state change during automatic 53 STAT_TRANLKFAIL EF Transport xxx head drum servo failed to lock 54 STAT_TRANLKLOSS E C Transport xxx servo lost lock or glitched momentarily 55 8 TRANTRK1FAIL EF Transport xxx stuck in phase 1 tracking calibration 56 STAT_ILSETUP E Bad setup xxx 57 STAT_INSTATE EF Tape motion state is inconsistent or illegal 58 STAT_BADTRANSEL EF Transport selection is incorrect for current mode amp group 59 STAT_CHIDDUP EF deos pes ed bd the same channel ID xxx Tapes 60 STAT ALIGNFAIL EF Unable to align tapes fatal error xxx 61 STAT ERRALIGN E C Error aligning tapes code xxx xxxM Trying alignment again 62 STAT_CHIDMISS EF Tape with channel ID xxx is missing 63 STAT BADGROUP EF is not part of current group 64 STAT CHIDMISMATCH channel ID does not match current setup 65 STAT NOPBAUX Can t decode xxx from transport 66 STAT BADPBTRANSEL EF Un to required playback mode xxx wrong of transports 67 STAT INTAPEID Transports xxx and have different tape IDs 68 STAT BADPBESTERR Transport xxx estimated error rate greater than xxx 69 STAT RECBADSYNC EF Transport xxx record data has bad sync 70 STAT RECBADAUX EF Transport xxx record data has bad auxiliary data 71 STAT RECBADCHID EF Transport xxx record data has wrong channel ID 72 STAT BAD
25. Any individual position value that is unknown will be returned as 0x80000000 the minimum 32 bit signed integer value Transports which are not selected for use under the current recorder mode and group settings will return their positions as 0x7FFFFFFF Although normally positive position readings can take on small negative values due to anomalies around BOT See the description of the response RESP_POSITION for more in formation ERRMES 37 bytel byte4 32 bit signed 2 s complement integer indicating the FIFO er ror in samples at the current user channel data rate total data bytes 4 RESP_ERR ERR_NONE 0 5 sec none 52 User s Manual Description 38 Command Msg Code Data Expected Resp Timer Duration Eq Console Cmd Description APPENDIX A Used to synchronize the S2 recorder s playback rate when the System Clock PLL is in errmes mode The parameter indicates the difference between the actual playback tape position and the desired position as a number of bits data samples at the current user channel data rate In practice this is the relative distance between the center of the correlator s internal data FIFO and the read pointer If the sign is positive then the FIFO read pointer is be tween center and overflow If the sign is negative then the pointer is be tween center and underflow When using errmes mode an ERRMES command should be sent by the external control computer about onc
26. C1HZ on C2a cable by sending it immediately following a particular tick The data field should contain the time of the tick that just passed This proto col is necessary because it is not possible to communicate exact times using the RCL alone With the SC PLL in refclk mode the station delay must be set to 0 during time set ng and the external S 1 C 1 Hz input signal must be present otherwise an error is returned In other SC PLL modes no errors are returned since only refclk mode can be used for recording and for any thing else the system time only needs to be approximate Note Unlike most other commands TIME SET is not subject to automatic communications retries within the RCL interface library otherwise the wrong time might be set The rcl time set function call should be re is sued with an updated time if a communications timeout occurs TIME READ 13 none RESP TIME 1 25 sec time also displayed on console screen Reads the current S2 system time this is not the playback tape time see next command If the external S 1 Hz or C 1 Hz input is being used 52 User s Manual 14 Command Msg Code Data Expected Resp Timer Duration Eq Console Cmd Description APPENDIX A SIHZ REC on C1 cable or CIHZ on C2a cable is connected and System Clock PLL mode is refclk or 1hz then the response RESP TIME is sent immediately following the next S 1 C 1 Hz input tick and gives the time of the tick that just pa
27. C3 C4 cable channel the transport is connected to depends on its position in the TAM racks The transport s TCP serial number must be known to assign its ad dress For example transport assignaddr 2053 3 assigns the address 3 to the transport with serial number tcp2053 The serial number is printed on a label attached to the back of the transport See Section 6 4 for more information on how to assign addresses 52 User s Manual OPERATION The program option is used to re load the software which runs on the 8051 processor inside the transports This software is stored in electrically erasable mem ory EEPROM and may need to be re loaded following a system software update Section 6 2 The normal command to re load the software of all transports is transport all program This will first display the version number and date of the software currently loaded in the transports followed by the version number and date of the new transport software about to be loaded and prompt for confirmation If the response is yes the transports will be re loaded one after the other Each is first placed in a special programming mode where it recognizes nothing but program data then the data is transferred After the last data record is sent the transport reboots itself If any transport fails to respond within 30 seconds of being programmed the entire op eration will abort with an error message In this case some transports may not yet have b
28. Command scpll Syntax scpll mode refclk 1hz errmes xtal Imanual type phase pure phase freq dac NUM cv div NUM lt freq gt Description Sets displays parameters associated with the System Clock Phase Lock Loop SC PLL This phase lock loop is located on the UI board and drives all S2 system timing based one of several possible types of user lock reference signals Only the mode option of the scp11 command should be used in regular operation the others are for testing and diagnostics The System Clock PLL mode controls the PLL s lock reference which can be one of refclk 1hz errmes xtal or manual The SC PLL is normally locked to an external high rate reference clock during record refclk or to a 1 Hz or software reference for playback rate control at a correlator Ihz or errmes The PLL also run independently based on internal crystal oscillator xtal or be controlled manually for testing manual The SC PLL mode should be set as needed with the system defaults file scpllmode parameter and thereafter should not normally need to be changed Although it is not an option of this command auto can be used in the defaults file to automatically select refclk mode if an external high rate reference clock is present at bootup and xtal otherwise See also userio clkin which selects the source of the high rate and 1 Hz input reference clocks C1 or C2 cable and sets the expected frequency of the high rate clock 4 8
29. DRD2 cin i TO DATA B DRD3 Em CL_JPOWER OUT 129 vac SOURCE 4 mo POWER IN 50 60 Hz ui A DRDS any PH DATA 5 DESTINATION E uc 0806 23 0807 can 1 E ts TO DATA SSS 028 cap VALDITY 26 C3 4 7 2 DESTINATION s C2c hH a C4 4 7 ES VME CASE c 2 TRANSPORTS 4 7 AC JUMPER CORD 240VAC OUTLETS DSCM POWER IN BELDEN 17254 120 or 249 VAC 50 60 Hz _JPOWER OUT vac DSCM POWER 77 01 POWER IN 50 60 Hz TAN PONER tane mne gt 240 vac YFORMER 120 TH Cl User data clock and 1 Hz in 500 VA MAX C2 User data clock and 1 Hz and data validity out neue C3 Formatted data and record clock C4 Playback signal C5 Transport Control Link TCL C6 Recorder Control Link RCL C7 2 terminal serial cable Figure 2 2 S2 PT Configuration 240VAC Operation 3 Connect the cables as shown in Figure 2 1 for 120 VAC operation and Figure 2 2 for 240 VAC operation Note that the DSCM power input port accepts either 120 VAC or 240 VAC but the TAM power inputs accept 120VAC only Operation of the TAMs from 240 VAC power source therefore requires 240 VAC to 120 VAC voltage conversion shown in Figure 2 2 as a separate transformer 4 Connect a console terminal such as DEC VT100 to the console port C7 The terminal should be configured for 9600 baud 8 data bits one stop bit no parity An IBM PC or compatible computer can be used as a consol
30. Disable the ability to record tapes on or off normally off to allow 52 User s Manual APPENDIX C recording Useful in a PT to ensure that no data is accidentally destroyed writeprotect off Station number from 0 to 255 only 1 6 displayed by transports 0 means undefined don t display on console station 0 System nickname what it s commonly known as up to 8 characters nickname System serial number from 1 to 65535 must match s n label on DSCM card cage serialnum Userid s and encrypted password s for rlogin telnet access to console If either of these are blank or omitted no userid or password prompt will appear The password entered here must be encrypted using the console encrypt command The default password is security encrypted RdebRSdzRc Multiple userid password pairs can be defined by adding more lines in the same format each new userid line must be followed by a passwd line loginuserid vxworks loginpasswd RdebRSdzRc Default status verbose level 1 3 normally 1 Higher values show some additional non essential status messages verbose 1 Default expert mode setting on or off Suppresses some non essential console commands if off otherwise all commands available expert on Select whether the VME cage front panel LED and formatter LED should act as an overall system OK FAIL light ok or show
31. Figure 2 3 Figure 2 4 Figure 2 5 Figure 2 6 Figure 2 7 Figure 4 1 Figure 4 2 Figure 4 3 Figure 4 4 Figure 4 5 Figure 4 6 Figure 4 7 Figure 4 8 Figure 6 1 Figure 6 2 Figure 6 3 Figure 6 4 Figure 6 5 Figure 6 6 Figure 6 7 Figure 6 8 Figure 6 9 List of Figures Transport Array Module TAM Data Signal and Control Module DSCM S2 PT Configuration 120VAC Operation S2 PT Configuration 240VAC Operation DSCM Ports TAM Rack Connector Placement DSCM Shipping Box with Cable Assemblies 240V to 120V Transformer Circuit ROS Normal Display on Bootup PT Sample ROS Screen User stopped Sample ROS Screen User playback Sample ROS Screen User record Transport Selection based on Mode amp Group S2 Diagnostic Loopback Paths Sample ROS Screen Bad Status Sample ROS Screen User I O Sample ROS Screen Mark III DSCM PC Board Configuration Transport Tape Diagnostics LP Location of Guide Posts Proper tape guide adjustment End of frame distortion examplel End of frame distortion example2 Beginning of frame distortion example Proper tape guide adjustment no scope End of frame distortion examplel no scope Figure 6 10 End of frame distortion example2 no scope Figure 6 11 Beginning of frame dist example no scope Figure 7 1 Figure 7 2 TAM Shipping Box DSCM Shipping Box with Cable Assemblies Figure B 1 1 2 Test Vector Generator Logical Circuit Figure B 2 C1 Input Timing Inte
32. and can usually be ignored STAT DELAYFIX Informational clear on read Station delay auto resets nnn Gives a count of how many times the station delay has been automatically corrected after becoming incorrect glitching in SC PLL refclk mode This correction can only happen if the scpllrefclkfix defaults file parameter is set to 1 See also the explanation of the STAT BADSTNDELAY status code 52 User s Manual OPERATION 81 Mnemonic STAT NOALIGN Type Error Console Msg Tapes playing but not aligned Interpretation This message appears during playback when the individual tapes are not aligned to each other In particular it always appears when playback starts and then goes away once the automatic self alignment procedure has aligned the tapes While this status condition exists playback data should be treated as invalid Since there is no single coherent tape time no overall tape time can be defined the RCL TIME READ PB command will return an error and relative tape alignment is not allowed If for some reason alignment is lost during playback STAT NOALIGN will reappear and the S2 will attempt to re align to the current running aligned tape time Certain errors such as ERR ALCRSBOUND alignment crossed recording boundary will result in the fatal status code STAT ALIGNFAIL which means that no further attempts will be made to realign Other less severe errors produce STAT ERRALIGN which means that alignme
33. and fatal error Each status code may additionally be designated clear on read which means it is a transient indication that persists only long enough to be read On the RCL clear on read conditions are cleared following each status read request but on the console there is no way to tell when the operator has read the message so status must be cleared manually using status reset Status information is gathered continuously and is not the result of any specific diagnostic test or procedure it is sometimes called online status to emphasize this fact Each status code is associated with an explanatory text message and there is both a short and a long version of the message The short messages are limited to 34 characters and are typically used on the console The long messages are limited to 399 characters but are usually much shorter and are typically used with the RCL In the list of status codes below only the short console messages are shown for a list of the long RCL messages see the table starting on page A 40 Many status messages have occurrence specific fields where information such as transport or channel numbers may appear Places where such information gets inserted are marked by or Status can be summarized by checking if any error or fatal error conditions exist On the console display the presence of any highlighted messages in the Status window indicates an error and the word FAIL indicates a fa
34. and is indicated by a plus or minus sign The current position does not need to be known for relative positioning to proceed Positive position values move forward and negative values 7 7 move backward Relative positioning may not work for small values 5 seconds or less and repeated relative offsets may introduce cumulative errors and thus not add up exactly to the expected total The position reestablish option allows an unknown position to be de termined without moving the tapes to a specific absolute location The tapes are rewound and then automatically returned to their original position as computed The position preset feature will also make the position known The preset function is not available with this command see transport position 52 User s Manual OPERATION from the distance covered during rewind and the position is again considered known This may be useful following a power failure when the S2 has lost track of the current tape position or when non rewound tapes are inserted It can also be used to accurately re determine the current position if cumulative errors have built up in the position measurement after a long period of repetitive tape activity Command powermon Syntax powermon Description Displays measurements of the VME DC power supply voltages nominally 5 V 52 V 12 V and 12 V The measurements are made using an A D converter on the Formatter board If any of these vol
35. as the mode used to record the tape otherwise the mode will not be changed and MODE READ will continue to read the old mode The fatal status message STAT BADPBTRANSEL will appear To correct this situation stop playback set a mode with the correct total data rate using MODE SET then restart playback you will probably have to reposition You can determine what mode the tapes were recorded in either by parsing the mode string from the detailed STAT BADPBTRANSEL status message or by using the TAPEINFO READ PB command TAPEID SET 17 bytel ASCII Tape ID string terminated by a NULL 0 character maximum 20 characters not incl NULL Avoid using unprintable characters total data bytes length of string 1 max 21 RESP ERR ERR NONE 0 5 sec tapeid STRIblank Sets the Tape ID This information is recorded continuously as part of the S2 auxiliary data which is the same for all individual tapes in the tape set At playback the Tape ID can be recovered at any position on the tape It should be chosen so that it uniquely identifies the set of tapes being re corded It may include an experiment number site code tape set index num ber or other useful information The format is totally up to the user as long as the overall length does not exceed 20 characters The Tape ID should be set prior to the start of recording and thereafter should not be changed for the remainder of the tape Following this rule will make it easy to
36. bytel4 32 bit unsigned active head use time in minutes since the last head replacement A value of zero indicates unknown bytel5 byte18 32 bit unsigned active head use time in minutes since the last service operation A value of zero indicates unknown total data bytes 145 Response from TRANSPORT TIMES command RESP STATION INFO 160 bytel Station number 0 to 255 byte2 byte3 System serial number 0 to 65535 byte2 MSB byte4 ASCII nickname string terminated by a NULL 0 character maxi mum 8 characters not incl NULL total data bytes length of string 4 max 12 Provides information which identifies the S2 system RESP POSTIME 171 bytel byte2 Absolute year number bytel MSB byte3 byte4 Day number 1 to 365 366 byte3 MSB byte5 Hours 0 to 23 byte6 Minutes 0 to 59 byte7 Seconds 0 to 59 byte8 Frame number 0 to 63 byte9 bytel2 absolute tape position as a 32 bit signed integer number of seconds since BOT MSB first range 99 43199 0x80000000 if unknown total data bytes 12 Response from POSTIME READ command Includes playback tape time and tape position of a particular transport RESP STATUS generic 180 52 User s Manual Data Description APPENDIX A bytel Summary byte bit0 1 one or more error conditions in report always set if bit 1 is set 0 no error conditions in report bitl 1 one or more fatal error conditions in repo
37. gt lt gt lt gt lt gt lt gt lt gt lt gt lt x gt lt gt lt gt lt x x gt lt x x x gt lt J x o xx x o x x x o xo xx x o x x x o x x xo x x x x x x x x xo x x xo lt x x x x x x x x x x gt lt gt lt x x gt lt gt lt gt lt x gt lt gt lt x gt lt gt lt gt lt gt lt x gt lt x gt lt gt lt gt lt gt lt gt lt gt lt x gt lt gt lt x gt lt x x gt lt x x gt lt x x x x x gt lt x gt lt gt lt gt lt gt lt gt lt gt lt gt lt gt lt gt lt 31 15131 131311 15 22 81 T T 1 1 5 25220444454825255225538253311 3382 55233133 c pi ies gt ea eo ee e dese as er ees epe So Table B 5 S2 Modes with active C1 C2 signal channels Continued on next page S2 PT User s Manual Active User Data and Validity Channels S2 Mode D C1 C2a DV C2b C2c 01112131415 617 8 9110111112113114 15 x x x x x x x 4i8 1 DV x x x x x x x x D xx
38. it is further possible to specify which group of transports will be used For example in mode 16x2 1 which requires 2 transports transports 0 1 are group 0 1 The quantization setting currently only affects the data validity signals during playback on a PT and has no effect in any other situation 52 User s Manual OPERATION Mode 16x8 1 128 Mb s Mode 8x8 2 64 Mb s tran 0 tran 0 1 tran 1 tran 1 Group 0 tran 2 tran 2 tran 3 tran 3 Group 0 x h tran 4 tran 4 tran 5 tran 5 Group 1 tran 6 tran 6 tran 7 tran 7 Mode 16x2 1 32 Mb s Mode 4x4 2 16 Mb s tran 0 1 tran 0 1 Group 0 Group 0 tran 1 tran 1 Group 1 tran 2 tran 2 1 Group 2 Group 1 tran 3 tran 3 Group 3 tran 4 1 tran 4 Group 4 Group 2 F tran 5 tran 5 Group 5 tran 6 tran 6 Group 6 Group 3 P tran 7 tran 7 Group 7 home s2 doc userman working dwa qroup xpic Figure 4 4 Transport Selection based on Mode amp Group transports 2 3 are group 1 and so on Figure 4 4 The console group command or RCL GROUP_SET command is used to set the group number Together the mode and group settings determine exactly which transports will be us
39. occurrence of the status condition such as a list of affected transports or an error code If the short option was used in the command all messages are shortened to a single line of max 34 characters not incl NULL See RESP_STATUS response and STATUS_DETAIL command for more informa tion 182 Response RESP_STATUS_DECODE generic Msg Code 182 52 User s Manual Data Description 183 Description 191 Description 192 Description 197 Description Response Msg Code Data Response Msg Code Data Response Msg Code Data Response Msg Code Data APPENDIX A bytel Status message in the form of an ASCII string terminated by a NULL 0 character maximum 399 characters not incl NULL or max 34 characters for short option Occurrence specific string substitution information is marked by May contain to indicate line breaks long version only total data bytes length of string 1 max 400 35 with short option Returns a message describing a status code For currently active status codes STATUS DETAIL should be used instead since it gives more specific infor mation RESP ERROR DECODE generic 183 bytel Error message in the form of an ASCII string terminated by a NULL 0 character maximum 100 characters not incl NULL total data bytes length of string 1 max 101 Returns a message describing an error code RESP
40. refer to the listings of batch files at the end of this section and type it in It takes about 45 seconds to complete batch agc noscope 4 Bring up the error distribution histogram with the following command def syncerrlocate histogram 0 249 cumulative 2 Here exponential averaging is used with decay time 2 5 Adjustthe P3 post You should turn the post very slowly in small steps waiting a few seconds between steps for the histogram to settle Also keep an eye on the estimated error rate value Est err rate in the Crucial Parms window Do not press down with the tool while observing the histogram Turn the post clockwise until the end of frame portion of the histogram display shows significant errors see Figures 6 9 and 6 10 The estimated error rate should be around 2e 4 or higher for LP or around 2e 3 for SLP Note the position of the P3 post Then turn the post counter clockwise until the histogram first improves and then shows errors to a similar degree Note the position of the P3 post and turn the post clockwise again to the midpoint of the previous two adjustment positions At the midpoint position the end of frame portion of the histogram should have relatively few errors with no significant bumps or peaks something like Figure 6 8 6 Adjust the P2 post using the same procedure as for P3 Figure 6 11 shows the beginning of frame errors you might see at the extreme adjustment positions After adjusting to the midpoi
41. sent by scroll forward down key sent by home down key sent by insert char or enter insert mode key sent by delete line key sent by insert key while in insert mode sent by next page key sent by previous page key sent by scroll backward up key sent by clear to end of screen key sent by set tab key sent by clear all tabs key sent by backspace key sent by down arrow key out of keypad transmit mode sent by home key sent by left arrow key has a meta key shift sets parity bit number of function k0 k9 keys default 0 termcap entries for other non function keys 52 User s Manual kr ks kt ku 10 19 str str str str str str str num num str num num str str str str str bool str str str str str str bool str bool str str bool str bool bool str num str str str str str str str bool str str str str str str str str str str str str P 0 0 0 0 0 0 N NP o P P NP NP P APPENDIX D sent by right arrow key put terminal in keypad transmit mode sent by clear tab key sent by up arrow key labels on function keys 0 9 if not f0 f9 label on function key 10 if not f10 move cursor left one position number of rows in each label number of lines on screen or page last line first column lines of memory if gt li 0 means varies number of columns in each label arrow key map used by vi version 2 only turn on blinking
42. setremote STR lt host nameaddrs gt Description Sets and displays the 52 system time The system time is used to time tag data recorded on tape and is normally set precisely to UTC before recording For play back the time need not be set precisely however setting the time is still recom mended since it is used by the sleep command and the ROS internal log facility Without parameters time displays the current system time as well as the total elapsed time since the S2 was booted the uptime If tapes are currently playing and aligned the complete playback tape time is shown also this provides a quick way to check the year of the recording which is not normally shown on the display By specifying parameters the time can be set to a specific value e g time 159 11 47 00 Here 159 is the day number where day 1 is Jan 1 11 is the hours 47 is the minutes and 00 is the seconds When setting absolute times in this way the com mand should be issued immediately after the S 1 C 1 Hz input tick SIHZ REC on Cl cable or CIHZ on C2a cable For the above example you would press return just after the reference clock s seconds digits flipped to 00 The year must be set separately as follows but this should rarely be necessary time 1996 Each time field can also be adjusted in absolute or relative terms e g time m 23 sets the minutes field to 23 or time stl increments the time by one second While the S2 power is off time i
43. since that s where the defaults file is stored or if you perform a complete SRAM reload from external media After such an operation always check that the serial number matches the number labeled on the VME card cage and if not edit the defaults file accordingly Command setup Syntax setup play record bypass ahook dhook NUM chan transport Description Configures the flow of data through the S2 recorder During normal operation the setup is controlled automatically as part of commands such as play record and stop so there is no need to use this command setup controls internal data channels not user data channels It is for diagnostic and manual operation only There are 6 diagnostic data paths in the S2 recorder Figure 4 5 5 of which can be manually selected using setup the remaining one is selected with uic feedthru In each path there are 8 channels numbered 0 to 7 However during record data channels can map onto several transports and during playback each transport can potentially map onto any data channel Therefore the setup incor porates separate concepts of transport number and channel number The channel number is the internal data channel on which the data belongs from which there is a direct mapping onto one or more user channels The transport number is the transport which the data happens to be going to or coming from The channel and transport chosen in the current setup are referred
44. so that data incorrectly marked invalid at record time can still be processed This second byte is only relevant during playback and is not used during re cord pass 0 01 if just setting the user DV USER DV READ 24 none RESP USER DV 0 5 sec user dv playback user DV also displayed on console screen 52 User s Manual Description 25 Timer Duration Eq Console Cmd Description 26 Expected Resp Timer Duration Eq Console Cmd Description 27 Timer Duration Eq Console Cmd Description 28 Command Msg Code Data Expected Resp Command Msg Code Data Command Msg Code Data Expected Resp Command Msg Code APPENDIX A Reads the current setting of the record user data valid DV flag and playback DV enable flag as set using USER DV SET USER DV READ PB 25 none RESP USER DV 0 5 sec user dv playback user DV also displayed on console screen Reads the playback user data valid DV flag as set by the user at record time Like USER DV READ the reply contains 2 bytes but the second byte is always 0 The S2 must currently be playing back properly recorded tapes and all of them must indicate the same user DV value this should automat ically be true if the tapes are aligned and may or may not be true if they are not Since the user DV value can be changed at any time during record the value retumed by USER DV READ PB reflects its instantaneous v
45. sor the cm capability is given using two parameters the row and column to move to Rows and columns are numbered from zero and refer to the physical screen visible to the user not to any unseen memory If the terminal has memory relative cursor addressing that can be indicated by an analogous CM capability The 46 escapes have the following meanings 9696 produce the character 90 964 output value as in printf d 962 output value as in printf 9024 963 output value as in printf 9034 90 output value as in printf c APPENDIX D 52 User s Manual APPENDIX D x add x to value then do gt xy if value gt x then add y no output dor reverse order of two parameters no output 901 increment by one no output n exclusive or all parameters with 0140 Datamedia 2500 B BCD 16 value 10 value 10 no output D Reverse coding value 2 value 16 no output Delta Data Consider the Hewlett Packard 2645 which to get to row 3 and column 12 needs to be sent amp 12 03 padded for 6 milliseconds Note the order of the row and column coordi nates is reversed here and that the row and column are sent as two digit integers Thus its cm _ capability is scm O E amp r 2c 2Y Terminals that use need to be able to backspace the cursor le and to move the cursor up one line on the screen up This is necessary because it is not always safe to transmit D and Vr as the system
46. your S2 system Rewind the tapes or position them to a point at least half an hour away from the end 4 Set the tape type which corresponds to the tapes you are using and select speed SLP tapetype N Speed slp 5 Enter the following command to begin the optimization procedure transport wrlev optimize This will iteratively record and play back tape and may take several hours to complete more than 5 hours when doing all eight transports so you may wish to let the procedure run overnight Here is an example of the output you will see in the interaction window Now performing write current optimization transports 0 7 speed slp min of iter 10 step size 10 6 tape type 3 Sit back This will take about 5 hours and 15 minutes possibly a bit longer Press Cntl C at any time to quit and display results up to that point Iteration 1 Record phase Write currents 0 70 ps0 2 9 4 70 52 40 6 70 qu Transport temp 0 37 1 38 2 3 33 4 38 Si 37 6 36 TE 38 Write currents 0 55 15255 2255 3555 4 55 5 55 55 55 Write currents 0 65 dese 765 2 65 3 65 4 65 55 765 6 65 TEGS Write currents 0 75 12 7975 2 75 3a cub 4 75 5 TD 6 75 7 75 52 User s Manual Note that if you have AG2550 transports you should try to perform write current optimization under the same temperature conditions as your normal record operations since AG2550 write currents are somewhat temperature dependent
47. 1 6 3 6 7 number of 4 15 4 80 programming 4 52 6 2 replacement 6 7 service history 6 6 service info 4 54 6 7 servicing 6 5 servicing kit 6 9 tape guide adjustment 6 12 TCP board 6 7 temperature cal 4 53 6 10 tracking 4 25 4 52 write current 4 53 write current optimization 6 9 Transport Array Module See TAM Transport Array Module TAM rack 1 1 Transport option switch takeupsense 4 53 wrlevoffset 4 53 Transport Servicing Kit 6 5 Troubleshooting Hints 6 1 UI User Interface 1 2 6 3 uic 4 54 uncue 4 55 unpause 4 55 unreview 4 55 Upgrades See Software Uptime 4 50 user 4 55 User info 4 12 4 23 4 55 User Interface See UI userid 4 60 userio 4 55 Validity extract 4 54 verbose 4 56 version 4 56 vi editor 4 7 4 17 4 31 4 36 Voltage supply 120VAC 2 2 240VAC 2 2 VxWorks shell 4 15 4 17 4 36 4 46 4 59 4 60 Index 4 wait 4 57 Xbar Window Activity Indicator 4 5 See Crossbar Window Crucial Parms 4 4 4 18 decoder Xbar 4 21 diag dec in 4 19 diag dec sync 4 20 diag dec time 4 20 est error rate 4 20 percent data valid 4 21 recorder mode 4 18 station delay 4 18 Window Interaction 4 4 Window Mark 4 27 bad CRCs 4 28 form aux 4 27 form CRC 4 28 form output 4 28 form time 4 27 frame rate 4 28 sync detect 4 28 test channel 4 28 Window State 4 5 4 24 Window Status 4 4 4 22 Window Transport 4 5 AGC level
48. 16 32 MHz or followdata Note the high rate reference is used only in SC PLL refclk mode For detailed information on 52 timing and playback rate control facilities please refer to the document ISTS SGL TR94 030 Timing and Synchronization in 52 Record and Playback Ter minals available at ftp ftp sgl crestech ca pub s2 doc timing timing ps Z The type option controls the behaviour of the SC PLL when in 1hz mode only Normally the type is phase which indicates phase locking with phase offsetting enabled Phase offsetting is simply a sudden jump in the PLL phase implemented via a station delay setting sequence when the difference between the current and desired phase is large greater than about 3 x 10 s This improves initial locking times dramatically but causes a timing glitch and possible loss of data around the phase jump Setting the SC PLL type to purephase disables phase offsetting turning the PLL into a conventional phase lock loop freq turns the SC PLL into a frequency lock loop FLL which locks very quickly but can drift and have arbitrary phase errors Frequency locking is employed automatically as a preliminary stage in the phase offsetting sequence described above and should not be used for regular operation The dac option of the scp11 command allows manual setting of the PLL VCO control voltage when in manual mode It can also be used to read the current control voltage setting in 1hz and errmes modes but not
49. 2 8 ch 4 11 Tape speed X data valid 0 005 128 Mb s CI Tape position 0 00 01 01 s Decoder 01234567 11 11 lt lt gt gt 11 REC P te ii CRUCE ep FRE u Chelp 1 time 1 mode 1 Ctapeid 1 user 1 record 1 play 1 ETC 1 Figure 4 1 Sample ROS Screen User stopped 4 2 Console Operation The following sections describe operation of the 52 Recorder using the console General information and procedures are given first and should be read carefully when first leaming about the 52 Detailed descriptions of screen displays and console commands follow in Sections 4 2 8 and 4 2 9 4 2 4 Connecting the Console The S2 console port is wired as a DCE Data Communication Equipment device and should be connected to a DTE Data Terminal Equipment device Any cursor addressable terminal or terminal emulator such as DEC VT100 can be used For information on setting the terminal type and baud rate when first getting started see Section 4 2 6 On S2 systems that have an Ethernet board it is possible to connect to the console over the network using rlogin or telnet although a regular terminal is still required for initial configuration the first time you turn on the S2 see Section 4 4 2 4 2 2 Display Organization The console display is n
50. 34 STAT SYNCERR1HZ E C 1 Hz sync error has occurred 35 6 NESTFRINT E C Nested frame interrupt has occurred 36 STAT LATEFRINT E C Late frame interrupt has occurred 37 STAT SCPLLBADMODE PLL is set to the wrong mode currently should be 38 STAT SCPLLUNLOCK EF System clock PLL is unlocked 39 STAT SCPLLSLIP E C System clock PLL sync error has occurred 40 STAT DRDMISSIG E C DRDxxx one or more missed extra signatures detected 41 STAT FORMDFIFOTERR E C Formatter data FIFO timing error has occurred continued on next page 52 User s Manual APPENDIX A Status Response Codes continued E indicates error indicates fatal error indicates clear on read 42 STAT MK3PLLSLIP E C PLL sync error has occurred 43 STAT MK3MISSYNC E C sync detect miss has occurred 44 STAT MK3DFIFOTERR E C data FIFO timing error has occurred 45 STAT TRANSYNCERR32 E C Transport s xxx have had 32 Hz sync errors 46 STAT_REFCLKOUTLOW EF C2 output ref clock rate is too low for current mode 47 STAT ERRRCL EFC RCL error xxx xxx 48 STAT ERRRPMON EFC Record Playback monitor error xxx xxx 49 STAT ERRMK3SW EFC formatter software error xxx 51 STAT RPMONBOTEOT EFC sei d xxx during automatic xxx transport xxx
51. BERDCB 191 bytel byte4 Number of incorrect bits during the measurement interval in the case of FORM BER and UI BER or number of 1 bits in the case of UI DC bias This is a 32 bit unsigned integer value MSB first byte5 byte8 Total number of bits measured in the time interval as a 32 bit unsigned integer MSB first total data bytes 8 Gives the results of a measurement performed by the BERDCB command To cal culate the bit error rate or the DC bias ratio divide the first 32 bit integer by the second 32 bit integer RESP DATA EXTRACT 192 bytel byte3 Extracted data or validity bytes byte4 Parity information for data extract only where bit value 0 means NO parity error a parity error occurred bit 0 panty bit for bytel bit 1 parity bit for byte2 bit 2 panty bit for byte3 For 52 data validity extract byte4 is always 0 total data bytes 4 Returns three bytes of extracted data or validity from a DATA EXTRACT READ command A fourth byte gives the parity bit for each of the three data bytes in its lowest three bits Mark III data extract only The time ordering of the extracted data or validity bits is from the most significant bit of bytel bit 7 to the least significant bit of bytel bit 0 followed by the most significant bit of byte2 bit 7 to the least significant bit of byte2 bit 0 followed by the most significant bit of byte3 bit 7 to the least significant bit of byte3 bi
52. Blocks 0 249 129 m Scale 22 Flatness 0 1095 52 Recorder Operating User Parms playback RT 407 1997 127 21 47 37 1 System Tape ID Recorder mode 16x8 1 br NL ERE dE 1 Station delay no 1 Hz inl Transports Decoder input channel 1 play 0 no tape l Decoded time 1 14 30 54 621 Decoder sync 96 cal hold 2 no tape 1 1 3 no tape User data valid Est err rate 5 4e 3 4 no tape Tape speed lp X data valid 95 454 5 no tape position 0 13 26 00 s 01234567 6 no tape 1 7 no tape 1 1 Errors in Blocks 0 249 1300 Scale 400 Flatness 6 299 Figure 6 10 End of frame distortion example2 no scope transport N rewind play manual align selfalign Figure 6 11 Beginning of frame dist example no scope 3 Wait for data recovery and tracking calibration to complete about 45 seconds wait drcal 4 Measure bit error rate setup transport N form berc 0 30 s Write down the average bit error rate obtained 5 Measure the flatness profile def syncerrlocate enable def syncerrlocate histogram 0 249 30 s cumulative Write down the flatness and scale values obtained Compare these values as well as the bit error rate to the values obtained in part A In all cases lower numbers are better 6 Stop and eject the tape stop eject To verify overall system performance we recommend you repeat the post instal
53. C1 cable carries input data and clock signals as listed in Table B 1 Table B 5 shows which of the 16 available input data channels IN 0 through IN 15 are active in each S2 mode 52 User s Manual APPENDIX B The output signal interface consists of three multiconductor twisted pair equal length cables C2a C2b and C2c jointly designated as cable C2 terminating in connectors P2a P2b and P2c at the data destination The C2 cable carries signals listed in Tables B 2 and B 3 Cable C2a Table B 2 carries the output clock and 1Hz and reproduced data while cables C2b and C2c Table B 3 carry output data validity DV signals In the S2 s Mark compatible mode the C2a cable delivers NRZM encoded signals compatible with Mark equipment Table B 4 Use the mk3 form enable command to switch the C2a cable into Mark compatible mode Table B 5 shows which of the 16 available output data DV channels OUT 0 through OUT 15 and DV OUT 0 through DV OUT 15 are active in each S2 mode In Mark compatible operation the same C2a data output pins are active but channels 14 and 15 are not available B 2 1 1 Signal Characteristics The timing of signals on cable C1 as measured at the signal destination S2 input with appropriate termination is shown in Figures B 2 and B 3 for fixed 32 MHz clock and data rate clock cases respectively Timing of signals on cable C2 as measured at the signal destination Correlator input with appropria
54. Chapter 5 The tape type con trols how much write current should be used when recording As new tape types are approved software upgrades will be provided to allow recognition of the new type codes For unlisted tape types it is also possible to specify a 6 digit numeric string which indicates the LP and SLP write current levels 52 User s Manual 45 Timer Duration Eq Console Cmd Description 50 Expected Resp Timer Duration Eq Console Cmd Description 51 Timer Duration Eq Console Cmd Description 55 Timer Duration Eq Console Cmd Description 60 Command Msg Code Data Expected Resp Command Msg Code Data Command Msg Code Data Expected Resp Command Msg Code Data Expected Resp Command Msg Code APPENDIX A explicitly For example 100070 sets LP write current to 100 and SLP write current to 70 The required 6 digit tape type strings will be supplied by CRESTech SGL when new tape types are approved Note that the tape type reverts to the default value given in the defaults file when the S2 reboots The TAPETYPE SET command is not allowed during record TAPETYPE READ 45 none RESP TAPETYPE 0 5 sec tapetype Reads the current tape type setting See the description of RESP TAPETYPE for more information MK3 FORM SET 50 bytel Boolean value 0x00 Disable Mark III formatter 0x01 Enable Mark III formatter total data bytes 1 RE
55. Interpretation One or more transport head drum servos remain unlocked after 13 seconds in auto matic record or playback This usually indicates a transport failure or marginal transport PLL performance or problems with the 32 Hz servo sync reference signal on the C3 cable This status code will not appear during manual record play 54 Mnemonic STAT TRANLKLOSS Type Error clear on read Console Msg Tran nnn servo lock loss glitch Interpretation One or more transport head drum servos momentarily became unlocked in auto matic record or playback and have probably regained lock If the servo is unable to regain lock after 13 seconds STAT TRANLKFAIL will appear When more than one transport loses lock around the same time some of them may not be listed in this status message STAT TRANLKLOSS appears only during automatic record play i e not during manual record play but the event will always be re corded in the ROS internal log Servo lock glitches can be caused by damaged tapes or system timing glitches such as STAT 2 or by irregu larities in the movement of tape past the heads For example in the erase gap between two different recordings the transport may momentarily switch speeds which can cause loss of lock Transports with repeated unexplained loss of lock problems on different tapes should be serviced and checked for hardware faults 55 Mnemonic STAT TRANTRKIFAIL Type Error clear on read
56. Kit or Tape Guide Adjustment Kit 6 4 4 Transport Write Current Optimization Write current optimization is the process where the best write current level for recording is determined individually for each transport Any differences from the nominal write current setting are entered as an offset wrlevoffset stored in the transport EEPROM significant improvement in bit error rates up to a factor of two or more on average can be obtained as compared to operating with a single global write current setting all offsets Zero As of ROS version 3 2 a new fully automatic procedure is provided to optimize write currents and set the per transport offsets Users should run the procedure each time the rotary heads are replaced 1000 hour service interval We also recommend running it at the 500 hour service interval due to possible effects of head wear It s a good idea to run the post installation record playback test Section 2 8 before and after optimizing write currents to ensure that there is no unexpected degradation in system performance bit error rates should improve or stay roughly the same The steps required to perform write current optimization are as follows 1 Using the S2 console select which transports you want to optimize by typing transport N M To optimize write currents on all transports type transport all 2 Insert writable tapes in the selected transports You should use the type of tapes you use most often in
57. RCL Interface Library functions in rcl cmd c do not usually need to retry commands The typical response time when calling RCL Interface Library functions will be less than the timer duration value but the maximum response time is 3 times the timer duration value since up to 2 retries are automatically performed for most commands The following commands are special and will not be automatically retried so their maximum response time is the timer duration value rcl rcl time set rcl time read rcl time read pb rcl align abs User software should perform retries for these commands as needed commands only The equivalent console command used to manually implement the same function The purpose and function of the command or response STOP 00 none RESP ERR ERR NONE 1 5 sec stop Stops the transports and or associated system operation This includes stopping play back recording rewinding fast forwarding as well as alignment and positioning PLAY 01 none RESP ERR ERR NONE 1 5 sec play Starts playback Automatically initiates a tape alignment operation self align to align the individual transports to each other and to obtain a single coher ent tape time After reading this tape time the user may issue an RCL ALIGN command to further align the recorder to a desired epoch The S2 must be currently stopped rewinding or fast forwarding otherwise the PLAY command is not allowed Also must
58. READ PB 14 none RESP TIME 1 25 sec none tape time displayed on console screen Reads the playback tape time The S2 must currently be playing back prop erly recorded tapes and the tapes must be aligned The response RESP TIME is sent immediately following the next S 1 Hz output tick SIHZ PB on C2a cable and gives the time of the tick that just passed The external control computer may require special hardware to measure the S 1 Hz output tick against its own reference This is necessary because it is not possible to communicate exact times using the RCL alone If the tapes are playing but not yet aligned response RESP_ERR with error code ERR_NOALIGN will be returned should it be necessary you can use the TAPEINFO_READ_PB command to read the different individual tape times The TIME READ PB response includes a time validated indicator which shows the state of the time validated flag at the time the tapes were recorded It will be TRUE if the time was set before making the recording Note Unlike most other commands TIME_READ_PB is not subject to automatic communications retries within the RCL interface library otherwise the time returned would be uncertain The rcl_time_read_pb function call should be re issued if a communications timeout occurs 1 Precise playback tape time reading is a requirement in a PT but not in an RT when playback capability is used for diagnostic purposes only 52 User s Manual 15 Co
59. RESP TIME System UTC time or playback tape time 116 RESP MODE Recorder mode record or playback 118 RESP TAPEID Tape ID record or playback 121 RESP USER INFO User defined auxiliary data fields record or playback 124 RESP USER DV User data valid flag record or playback 127 RESP GROUP current transport group number record or playback 128 RESP TAPEINFO P NE is for all 8 individual transports 130 RESP DELAY Station delay setting or measurement 133 RESP BARRELROLL Barrel roll setting 136 RESP POSITION Tape position 138 RESP_ESTERR Estimated error rate from all transports 139 RESP PDV Percent data valid from all transports 143 RESP SCPLL MODE Current System Clock PLL mode 145 RESP TAPETYPE Current tape type setting 151 RESP MK3 FORM Current Mark formatter enable disable state 155 RESP TRANSPORT TIMES Head use and in service times from all transports 160 RESP STATION INFO Station number system serial number nickname 171 RESP POSTIME E tape time and tape position For SGL internal use 180 RESP STATUS System status summary This is a generic response 181 RESP STATUS DETAIL Detailed system status This is a generic response 182 RESP STATUS DECODE Translated text status message This is a generic response 183 RESP ERR DECODE Translated text error message This is a generic response 191 RESP BERDCB Bit error rate or DC bias measurement result 192 RESP DATA EXTRACT 3 byte data extract or validity extract result
60. ROS track cal message appears in Diag dec sync display Each phase can be individually enabled and disabled for particular trans ports using transport tracking auto and transport tracking man ual There is also a special phase 1b algorithm which performs large tracking jumps of 20 units or more that may be triggered by ROS when the system 18 52 User s Manual OPERATION having difficulty with a particular tape Phase 1b can be globally disabled using transport tracking phaselb disable Note The tracking center option will not actually center the tracking but rather acts as a low level trigger for the phase 1 tracking algorithm It is equivalent to pressing the two tracking buttons simultaneously and should not normally be used The caltemp option is used to calibrate the temperature sensors inside the transports This is normally done only once during manufacture but in some cir cumstances might need to be done again in the field The current correct transport internal temperature in degrees Celsius must be specified the measured ambient temperature can be used immediately after turning on the S2 system before the transports have had a chance to warm up for the complete temperature calibration procedure see Section 6 4 5 The value 0 has a special meaning it clears the tem perature calibration factor so that the raw uncalibrated temperature reading is shown Type transport display temp to display the transport temperatures The
61. Record Play Time at 128 Mbits s Total Data Capacity User Data Density Data Shipping Weight Timebase Deviation Tolerance Configuration Dimensions in cm Weights Power Consumption Averaged across eight transports Non data replacement 16 to 128 Mbits s 16 Mbits s per transport 1 x 10 maximum 1 10 typical 1 x 10 maximum 2 x 10 typical SVHS Cobalt Iron Oxide approved types only 3 hrs 50 min ST 120 tape LP 4 hrs 1 min ST 126 SE 180 tape LP 6 hrs 2 min ST 126 SE 180 tape SLP 5 hrs 47 min ST 182 SE 260 tape LP 8 hrs 41 min ST 182 SE 260 tape SLP 1 85 Tbits ST 126 tape LP 3 94 Tbits ST 182 tape SLP 675 Tbits m ST 126 tape LP 1440 Tbits m ST 182 tape SLP 1 1 Kg Tbit ST 126 tape LP 0 6 Kg Tbit ST 182 tape SLP Max delay rate of external reference clock 1 0 s s corresponds to input frequency deviation of 40 196 Max delay acceleration of external ref clock 1 07 s s Max delay step at 0 delay rate 1 07 s 1 or 2 Transport Array Modules TAMs 1 Data Signal and Control Module DSCM 19 rack mount or table top operation TAM 40Hx 44 W x 46D 10 U DSCM 33 Hx 44 W x 33 D 7 U 1 TAM 36 Kg DSCM 17 Kg 1 TAM 140 W DSCM 230 W S2 PT User s Manual S2 SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY 8 S2 SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY Operation Physical Format User data rates LP Bit error rate SLP Bit error ratet Tape Record Play Time
62. ST 126 SE 180 do not work in AG2510 transports but are fine in AG2520 and later model transports The type of tape being used in the S2 must be indicated using the capet ype console command or TAPETYPE SET RCL command A default setting to use at bootup can be defined using the tapetype parameter in the system defaults file the defaults file is described in Section 4 2 7 The tape type is a one digit code indicating one of several approved varieties of tape as listed above and in Table 5 1 The tape type code is used by the S2 to determine transport write current levels so technically it does not need to be set for playback but setting the correct tape type is still recommended For unlisted tape types it is possible to enter digits NNNMMM where NNN is the write current for LP and MMM is the write current for SLP These numbers must be determined empirically and will typically be supplied by CRESTech SGL when a new tape type is approved for use in the interim until the next offical software release which will recognize the new type S2 PT User s Manual TAPE Description endi Tim LP Time SLP Time Notes 1 3M Scotch ST 120 246 thick 3h 50m 5h 45m discontinued 1 3M Scotch SE 180 258 thick 4h 6h 02m discontinued 2 Maxell ST 182 SE 260 371 thin 5h 47m 8h 41m not for AG2510s 2 Maxell ST 180 367 thin 5h 43m 8h 35m not for AG2510s 3 Ampex 289 ST 120 ST 126 SE 180
63. STATCODE MAX byte2 Boolean short option 0x00 Return regular long form message one or more lines up to 399 characters 0x01 Return shortened message like console max 34 chars total data bytes 2 RESP STATUS DECODE 0 5 sec status decode Translates a numeric status code to its corresponding mnemonic text message This is useful for building a run time table of status codes and mnemonics so that the mnemonics and not the changeable codes themselves can be used easily in soft ware condition tests For error reporting or logging purposes use STATUS DETAIL instead since that includes occurrence specific information such as channel numbers in the returned messages while STATUS DECODE fills in such variable infor mation with ERROR DECODE generic 83 bytel 8 bit signed 2 s complement error code total data bytes 1 RESP ERROR DECODE 0 5 sec error decode Translates a negative numeric error code ERR to the corresponding text mes sage includes mnemonic See also RESP ERR and the list of S2 error codes on Page A 32 DIAG generic 90 bytel Diagnostic type 0x01 Perform self test 1 total data bytes 1 RESP ERR ERR NONE 0 5 sec diag selfl Initiates S2 internal diagnostic sequences Currently the only diagnostic sequence which can be run here is self test 1 the power on self test While self test 1 is running most RCL commands which affect tape motion or system switch settings a
64. Tape Transport 919 99 99 919 45 1 Pressure Roller U a 4 4 5 Loading Base 14 1 Supply Reel Table U 9 9 60 60 4 1 Cam Gear Section v 71 1 Takup Reel Tabe U 94 64 9 5 132 2 Timing Belt Supply Reel Shaft 25 1 Supply Soft Brake 1 U Takeup Reel Shaft 13 1 Tension Band U t t 133 2 Capstan Rotor U 70 1 Main Brake Spring Capstan Shaft 96 94141 904 04 040 1 Cleaner Roller U Note Symbol Maintenance Requirement Remark Wipe dirt from the parts using soft cloth impregnated with Ethyl Alcohol Cleaning Ethyl alcohol or Cleaning Liquid Note When cleaning rubber parts avoid using excessive alcohol since purchased locally it may accelerate deterioration of these parts After cleaning with alcohol wipe the alcohol quickly and thoroughly Replacement Lubrication el Supply one or two drops of oil v Greasing Molytone Grease MOR265 Wipe the old grease and apply new grease Transport Service History Table 6 1 Maintenance Chart for AG2520 Transports Each transport stores a text file within its EEPROM memory which lists details of service steps performed on that transport in the past This file is useful for record keeping by service personnel and should be updated each time a transport is serviced cleaned repaired etc Type the following command to bring up the service history file i
65. Write currents 0 85 1 85 2 85 3 85 4 85 5 85 6 85 7 85 Iteration 1 Record phase complete now repositioning amp playing back Triggering phase 1 tracking calibration will also do phase 2 Raw Bit Error Rates For Iteration 1 tran 0 wrlev 55 354 655 721 155 528 85 825 wrlev 65 tran 1 wrlev 55 2999 65 3409 75 3893 85 4430 new wrlev 55 tran 7 wrlev 55 555 65 705 75 766 85 1057 new wrlev 55 Iteration 2 Record phase Write currents 0 65 15 88 215 26155 3 4 D5 4 65 65 GATS TE 555 The procedure will continue for ten iterations possibly more if the write current hasn t converged yet for some transports When done it will display the final write current from the last iteration and the best write current for each transport The best write current is an average of the results from iterations following convergence the number of iterations included in the average is shown on the second last line after the slash Write current optimization ended final amp best average write currents tran 0 60 1 72 2 48 3 38 4 78 5 72 6 70 7 54 iter 10 3 10 6 10 3 10 3 10 6 10 5 10 4 10 5 best 0 61 1 71 2 49 3 40 4 81 5 73 6 72 7 54 Hit return to continue At this point you should press return After confirming the tape type the new optimum per transport write current offsets are calculated and then you will be asked to confirm before the new offsets are actually written into the transpor
66. all head use and service time counters including the totals This should only be done if an older TCP is installed in a brand new transport or the counter values have become corrupted for some reason Command uic Syntax uic dcbias NUM lt uchan gt NUM time s m h NUM frms levelledge berc NUM uchan NUM lt time gt s m h NUM frms unde tected log dataextract validityextract NUM lt offset gt NUM lt uchans feedthru onloff quant 1 2 Description Sets displays low level UI User Interface board control options and switches Most of these are for testing and diagnostics but a few may be useful during regular operation The dcbias option performs a DC bias measurement on a specific user data channel and the berc option performs a true bit error rate measurement provided that the current user output data contains the UI diagnostic test vector The UI test vector is a 32767 bit maximal length pseudo random sequence that gets reset synchronous to the system 1 Hz tick It is not the same as the Formatter test vector tested by form berc To inject the UI test vector in place of user input data attach an appropriate external test data generator or switch to one of the UI diag modes e g mode diag8 or one of the C2 cable test modes Note that unlike form berc uic berc will not automatically enable UI diag mode The dataextract and validityextract options take actual 24 bit snap shots of the user data or va
67. and Control Module DSCM The DSCM shown in Figure 1 2 contains custom S2 electronics required to manage the system for mat and control the data on record recover the data on playback and control the transports The DSCM is a semicustom VME cage with three standard VME compatible slots for the system Recorder Control Computer RCC Static RAM board SRAM and optional Ethernet board and 12 slots for electronics required to manage the data flow format the data on record decode the data on play back and interface to the user s hardware These boards consist of an eight channel Formatter FORM board eight decoder or Data Recovery and Deformatter DRDp boards and a User In terface UI board Figure 1 2 Data Signal and Control Module DSCM The DSCM is designed for tabletop or 19 rack mounting Rack mounting may be made easier by removal of the two leg mounts screwed to the outside of the enclosure replace the screws as they also hold on the fan tray DSCM Dimensions and Weight The DSCM is 33 H x 44 W x 33 D cm and weighs approximately 17 kg 7 rack units are required for rack mounting 52 User s Manual INSTALLATION 2 INSTALLATION 2 1 Introduction The S2 recorder normally consists of three units requiring intermodule cable hookup as well as connection to external equipment for operation Figures 2 1 and 2 2 illustrate the system with all signal and power cables connected To install the system pl
68. at 128 Mbits s Total Data Capacity User Data Density Data Shipping Weight Timebase Deviation Tolerance Configuration Dimensions in cm Weights Power Consumption Averaged across eight transports Non data replacement 16 to 128 Mbits s 16 Mbits s per transport 1 x 10 maximum 1 10 typical 1 x 10 maximum 2 x 10 typical SVHS Cobalt Iron Oxide approved types only 3 hrs 50 min ST 120 tape LP 4 hrs 1 min ST 126 SE 180 tape LP 6 hrs 2 min ST 126 SE 180 tape SLP 5 hrs 47 min ST 182 SE 260 tape LP 8 hrs 41 min ST 182 SE 260 tape SLP 1 85 Tbits ST 126 tape LP 3 94 Tbits ST 182 tape SLP 675 Tbits m ST 126 tape LP 1440 Tbits m ST 182 tape SLP 1 1 Kg Tbit ST 126 tape LP 0 6 Kg Tbit ST 182 tape SLP Max delay rate of external reference clock 1 0 s s corresponds to input frequency deviation of 40 196 Max delay acceleration of external ref clock 1 07 s s Max delay step at 0 delay rate 1 07 s 1 or 2 Transport Array Modules TAMs 1 Data Signal and Control Module DSCM 19 rack mount or table top operation TAM 40Hx 44 W x 46D 10 U DSCM 33 Hx 44 W x 33 D 7 U 1 TAM 36 Kg DSCM 17 Kg 1 TAM 140 W DSCM 230 W 52 User s Manual APPENDIX A APPENDIX A 2 RCL SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS PROTOCOL A 1 Overview This section describes the communications protocol of the S2 Radioastronomy Control Link RCL a serial com municat
69. be and there is not enough time to rewind the tapes to determine the position in the normal way Position preset can also be used to explicitly mark the position as unknown by using the unknown position 0x80000000 the minimum 32 bit signed integer value POSITION READ 36 bytel type of request 0x00 return overall mid point position and linear variance 0 01 return 8 individual transport positions total data bytes 1 RESP POSITION 0 5 sec transport display position also displayed on console screen Reads the current 52 tape position in one of two formats overall or individual The overall position is a single position value defined as the mid point middle of the individual transport positions and includes a linear variance value which indicates the maximum absolute deviation of any individual tape position from the mid point Only the transports selected under the current mode and group set tings are counted in the overall position If the variance is small enough depending on the user s application then it will be possible to later return to the same position using only the overall position value If for some reason the variance is large it may be necessary to obtain the individual transport tape positions to be able to return to exactly the same position The individual position information obtained should be treated as a unit for purposes of subsequently commanding the S2 to return to that position with POSITION_SET
70. examination of particular record channels See also the general description of how to record tapes in Section 4 2 4 2 Command review Syntax review Description Puts the currently selected transports into a reverse movement state that is about 9 times faster than playback but slower than rewind This command serves no significant purpose in normal operation and should be avoided Use the position command instead to perform tape positioning The S2 must currently be in playback otherwise review is not allowed Also must not currently be aligning or posi tioning Use unreview to stop reviewing and return to normal play Command rewind Syntax rewind Description Rewinds the tapes Stops playback first if necessary The S2 must be in stop play play pause or fast forward state otherwise rewind is not allowed Also must not currently be aligning or positioning 52 User s Manual OPERATION Command scan Syntax scan aux nomap time Description This command is for use during manual playback only It scans all active transports to acquire valid tape time and or auxiliary data If no options are specified aux is the default which means to scan for complete time and auxiliary data aux nomap is similar but doesn t try to establish the DRD crossbar mapping and may work better in difficult situations The time option is not useful on a PT since time unlike the rest of auxiliary data is extracted from all channels simultaneously
71. ff fs gn hc hd ho hs hu hz il i3 iP k0 k9 k str P str P str str str sr str NP str str bool bool str P str bool bool str sr bool str bool str str str str P str str bool str P9 str num str str str str str str str str str str str str str str str str str str str str str str str bool num 0 str 0 APPENDIX D delete character delete line enter delete mode down one line disable status line enable graphic character set erase n characters end delete mode end insert mode can erase overstrikes with a blank escape can be used on the status line hardcopy terminal page eject return from status line generic line type for example dialup switch hardcopy terminal half line down forward 1 2 linefeed home cursor has extra status line half line up reverse 1 2 linefeed cannot print s Hazeltine terminal initialization string terminfo only terminal initialization string terminfo only pathname of program for init terminfo only insert character name of file containing initialization string enter insert mode insert mode distinguishes nulls insert pad after character inserted terminal initialization string tab stops initially every n positions sent by function keys 0 9 sent by function key 10 sent by insert line key sent by back tab key sent by clear screen or erase key sent by delete character key sent by clear to end of line key
72. have answered the installation questions they will not appear again If you ever wish to re run the installation procedure press space during phase 2 of the boot sequence to enter the VxWorks shell and then type install at the shell prompt gt All installation options can also be set by editing the system defaults file by using the default command see Section 4 2 7 Most ROS hardware and software initialization happens before the main display screen appears Each major step outputs a message to the console These messages can usually be ignored but are useful for debugging if problems arise Any serious problems will result in status messages following the boot phase so there is no particular need to pay attention to the bootup messages As part of DRD board initialization the OK LEDs are sequenced from left to right for visual verification that the address jumpers correctly match the address labels on the front of the boards although any errors will also be caught by the self test The ROS power on self test starts just after the main console display appears The self test requires all necessary transports and other system hardware modules to be present and connected Normally all 8 transports and DRDs are tested but the diagnumtran option in the system defaults file can be changed to reduce the number of trans ports DRDs to test 1 2 4 or 8 This is useful for scaled down S2 PTs with fewer than 8 transports DRDs the default
73. hours and minutes of active head use and can be displayed by typing transport N status time In addition to the in service and head use times this also shows the total cumulative head use and total on time since manufacture as in the following example Transport 2 On 5764h 51m Head use 518h 44m 1662h Serv 178h 02m 1662h This indicates that The transport has been powered on for 5764 hours and 51 minutes since manufacture There have been 518 hours and 44 minutes of active head use since the last head replacement There have been 178 hours and 2 minutes of active head use since the last service There have been 1662 hours of active head use since manufacture These values can also be displayed in the transport window using the following three console commands transport display ontime transport display headtime transport display servtime S2 PT User s Manual MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING iN Parts Name Hour iN Parts Name Hour P L 500 1000 1500 2000 2500 3000 3500 4000 4500 5000 P L 500 1000 1500 2000 2500 3000 3500 4000 4500 5000 7 1 Upper Cylinder U e Rie 914 914 H9 4 24 1 Main Brake U 6 1 Oylinder U 9 9414 91904 414 0 27 1 Takeup Main Brake U 34 1 A C Head 99199 9499 55 1 Mode Switch 17 1 FE Head 913 14 09M 9 4
74. if unknown Ox7FFFFFFF if transport not selected total data bytes 9 overall 34 individual This is the response to the POSITION READ command There are two formats as indicated by the first data byte position or individual positions See also POSITION READ POSITION SET ALIGN 0 01 RESP ESTERR 138 bytel number of strings in list always 8 if ordered by transport 1 2 4 or 8 depending on recorder mode if ordered by channel byte2 list of up to 8 variable length strings each terminated by null with next string following immediately Each string max 12 bytes incl null total data bytes variable max 97 See ESTERR READ command RESP PDV 139 bytel number of strings in list always 8 if ordered by transport 1 2 4 or 8 depending on recorder mode if ordered by channel byte2 list of up to 8 variable length strings each terminated by null with next string following immediately Each string max 12 bytes incl null total data bytes variable max 97 See PDV READ command RESP SCPLL MODE 143 bytel SC PLL mode code 0x00 xtal 0x01 manual 0x02 refclk 0x03 1hz 0 04 errmes total data bytes 1 Indicates the current System Clock PLL mode RESP TAPETYPE 145 bytel ASCII tape type string terminated by a NULL 0 character maximum 6 characters not incl NULL Note that all normal tape type codes are one character long 0 9 or A Z but unl
75. indicates whether any errors or fatal errors ex ist Overall system status can be considered if the summary error bit is clear cautionary if the error bit is set but the fatal error bit is clear and failed if the fatal error bit is set fatal errors imply that the error bit is set too If any fatal error conditions appear at any time including clear on read conditions there is a good chance that the system is not operating correctly and immediate corrective action should be taken Note that the S2 will not automatically abort any operation even in the presence of fatal er rors unless there is no possible way to continue or there is imminent danger of hardware damage Status codes mnemonics and messages are given in the table below Code numbers range from 1 to 127 RCL_STATCODE_MAX The text mes sage shown is the long RCL version of the status message as would be returned by STATUS DETAIL or STATUS without the short op tion For a list of the short console messages see Section 4 5 of the User s Manual This information is subject to change at any time typically for the purpose of adding new status entries All efforts will be made to avoid chang ing existing status code numbers but such changes cannot be ruled out espe cially since status codes are ranked by priority and some renumbering may be necessary when new codes are added The mnemonics are unlikely to change If possible user so
76. indication is a summary of the states of the individual transports shown in the transport window to the left of the middle of the screen During tape positioning the word POSITIONING will appear on the bottom boundary of the state window If the state is playback and the tapes are aligned the word ALIGNED will appear The Transport window shows the state of each transport in the system An asterisk marks those transports selected for use under the current mode and group settings During record and playback an L indicates that the transport head drum servo is properly locked to the system timing reference If a transport is playing and locked and the decoder has been able to extract playback tape time then the tape time is shown In addition to transport state and tape time the Transport window can be switched to show many other parameters related to the transports or extracted from tape during playback see Page 4 24 If the system status indicates one or more transport failure conditions affected transports are marked with a highlighted F on the right hand boundary of the Transport window The last window is a small one in the top left corner of the screen Its main feature is an activity indicator that changes each time the screen is updated This can be used to check that the S2 software is still running and that the console terminal is properly connected The station number when non zero is shown in this windo
77. initiated alignment operations that fail for certain reasons as outlined below The reason is given by the error code nnn embedded in the message use error decode to translate the numeric error code to a text message Alignment must be explicitly re initiated using the align command or by stopping and re starting playback Causes of STAT ALIGNFAIL include ERR ALCRSBOUND Crossed a boundary from one recording into another Tape alignment can only be performed within a single continuous recording ERR ALBADTIME Requested alignment time is out of range It is either more than 10 hours away from the current tape time or in the case of automatic self alignment the difference between some transport s tape time and the target time exceeds the value given for the selfaligntime defaults file parameter normally 30 minutes ERR BOTEOT One or more transports ran into beginning end of tape during alignment transports have been stopped ERR EOD One or more transports encountered EOD the end of recorded data during alignment All transports have been stopped 61 Mnemonic STAT ERRALIGN Type Error clear on read Console Msg Err aligning tapes nnn retrying Interpretation A playback tape alignment operation has failed under circumstances for which alignment will be automatically retried The reason is given by the error code nnn embedded in the message use error decode to translate the numeric error code to a t
78. interface and does not need to worry about the details of the RCL protocol The RCL interface library routines are written in ANSI C and should be easy to port to many different types of computers As shipped they work on IBM PCs and compatibles or on the following flavours of Unix SunOS Solaris and Linux The commands available over the RCL are a subset of the console commands and are intended mainly for high level control during automated operation The RCL tries to present a view of the S2 as a single tape recorder not 8 individual transports Consequently most commands and responses make no mention of individual transports Section 4 3 gives some additional general information on RCL operation but most of the detailed information is in Appendix A the RCL protocol specification 4 1 1 Terminology Because so many different kinds of control and status information are processed by the S2 software and hardware it is necessary to use very precise terminology when describing things Words that are normally used imprecisely and interchangeably have been given concrete definitions in the context of the S2 Recorder Channel Channels are signal paths carrying sampled data An important distinction is made between user channels and internal S2 channels User channels carry data as sup 52 User s Manual OPERATION plied by the user at one of several different data rates with up to 16 user channels available depending on the current S
79. is loaded from SRAM into DRAM If any problems are encountered the console will beep and display an error message and the CPU will drop into the VxWorks shell at the end of phase 2 The VxWorks shell prompt gt is used for software checkout and debugging by technical personnel You can also force the shell to start up by pressing the space bar during the software load portion of the bootup but this is not normally done If no problems are encountered in phase 2 the boot procedure continues on to phase 3 ROS bootup 4 2 6 ROS Bootup The Recorder Operating System ROS boot procedure comes after the VxWorks system portions of the bootup and includes software initialization hardware configuration and initialization and the power up self test known as self test 1 If this is the first time you are running this S2 system ROS will first ask some installation questions including the terminal type and baud rate you wish to use The default terminal type is VT100 and the default baud rate is 9600 but these can be changed at this time Enter your console terminal type and baud rate max 9600 If your terminal type is not one of those recognized by the S2 you will be given the opportunity to add a terminal definition to the terminal capability database but to do this you must understand the Berkeley Unix termcap file format see Appendix D Table 4 2 shows some popular terminal types recognized by the S2 software as shipped After you
80. list can be either by transport or by internal recorder channel If by transport the order corresponds to the physical transports and the tapes they contain If by channel the order is in dependent of playback tape ordering and corresponds to the ordering of trans ports and tapes at record time The default should usually be ordering by transport data bytel 0x00 Estimated error rates are encoded as ASCII strings instead of as binary floating point quantities to avoid problems with in compatible floating point representations Error rates are estimated by counting the number of missed sync words in the formatted internal data channels and extrapolating to encompass all data bits We assume that the error rate is low so if a sync word is incor rect we presume that in fact only a single bit is in error These assumptions break down for high error rates and for extended burst errors but in practice the estimate has been found to be very close to the true bit error rate in al most all cases Because sync words represent only a small proportion of the data a relatively long integration is needed to measure useful error rates The integration period used is 6 seconds giving a minimum measurement resolution of around 1 0 x 10 There is also an artificial upper limit of 52 User s Manual 39 Command Msg Code Data Expected Resp Timer Duration Eq Console Cmd Description APPENDIX A 10 107 imposed to avoid the inacc
81. network boot It then enters a short 4 second count down sequence Normally the count down is allowed to expire and the boot procedure continues to phase 2 VxWorks initialization If however you hit the space bar the boot sequence is interrupted and the CPU enters the boot monitor whose command prompt is 52 Boot The monitor supports a small number of low level commands used only for CPU SRAM diagnostics and maintenance functions The boot sequence will also drop into the boot monitor if it detects data corruption in certain critical portions of the SRAM VxWorks and root partitions See Section 6 2 for information on how to re load a corrupted SRAM Type go to continue the boot sequence from inside the boot monitor Back at the count down sequence you can type n to cause a network boot This is only for maintenance operations at CRESTech SGL Phase 2 in a normal boot sequence is VxWorks system initialization and Static RAM checkout The boot monitor first copies the VxWorks system code from SRAM into the DRAM on the CPU board and then begins executing it A series of messages like the following accompanies the creation and checkout of SRAM partitions 2 VyWorks software was developed by Wind River Systems Inc Curses software was developed by the University of California Berkeley 52 User s Manual OPERATION Creating SRAM disk sram bin at 0 4012 00 length 819200 bytes Next ROS and related software
82. networked RCL control code Before RCL commands can be sent to a particular S2 system a network connection must be opened by calling rcl open RCLCO open command specifying the desired internet name or address The open operation returns a reference address which is an integer used to subsequently refer to that connection The reference address should be substituted for the RCL device address when issuing RCL commands In network operation the RCL device address is not used since internet addresses are sufficient to identify different S2 systems in fact network RCL packets contain the broadcast address to be sure to be accepted by the target S2 system More than one network connection can be opened simultaneously to control multiple S2 systems While a connection is open the target 52 system will not respond to RCL commands sent over the regular RCL serial link If desired the rellock defaults file parameter can be used to prevent unwanted network connections from interrupting serial RCL operation When you are finished use rcl close RCLCO close command to close each active network connection For more information refer to the RCLCO and RCL Interface Library source code and IREADME files 52 User s Manual OPERATION 4 5 Status Codes and Interpretations The S2 recorder has approximately 80 different status codes that describe its current state of well being These are ranked and divided into 3 severity categories informational error
83. not being recorded properly and could be due to a Formatter failure transport failure or C3 cable connection fault During playback this may mean that data cannot be properly decoded and is probably due to a failure in the indicated transport s The acceptable AGC ranges are from 100 to 254 for record and 1 to 254 for playback STAT MARGAGCLEV Informational nnn AGC levels are marginal One or more transport AGC levels are outside the ideal range during automatic record or play the AGC level indicates record or playback signal strength This will probably not affect operation but should eventually be investigated Check the indicated transports If recording also check the Formatter board and C3 cable The ideal AGC ranges are from 150 to 249 for record and 6 to 249 for playback STAT ERRLOG Error clear on read Log file error nnn An error was encountered maintaining the ROS internal log To re initialize the log you may manually clear it using 109 clear STAT ERRDRCONFIG Error clear on read Error in DRD nnn DR config nnn The data recovery calibration software encountered an internal error This should not normally happen and can usually be ignored STAT ERRDRTRACK Error clear on read Error in tran nnn tracking cal nnn The data recovery phase 2 tracking calibration software encountered an internal error This is displayed only at verbose level 3 for both the console and the RCL
84. not currently be positioning The PLAY command is normally issued after the recorder has been positioned using PO 52 User s Manual 2 Command Msg Code Data Expected Resp Timer Duration Eq Console Cmd Description 3 Command Msg Code Data Expected Resp Timer Duration Eq Console Cmd Description 4 Command Msg Code Data Expected Resp Timer Duration Eq Console Cmd Description 5 Command Msg Code Data Expected Resp Timer Duration Eq Console Cmd Description 6 Command Msg Code Data Expected Resp Timer Duration APPENDIX A SITION SET In an S2 RT playback is restricted to 16 Mbit s total bit rate out of either 1 2 or 4 channels instead of the usual 128 Mbit s RECORD 02 none RESP ERR ERR NONE 1 5 sec record Starts recording Recorder must currently be stopped REWIND 03 none RESP ERR ERR NONE 1 5 sec rewind Rewinds the tapes Stops the recorder first if necessary except when recording Recorder must be in stop play play pause or fast forward state otherwise RE WIND is not allowed Also must not currently be aligning or positioning FF 04 none RESP ERR ERR NONE 1 5 sec ff Fast forward winds the tapes Stops the recorder first if necessary except when recording Recorder must be in stop play play pause or rewind state otherwise FF is not allowed Also must not currently be aligning or positioning PA
85. operation 4 58 packet format A 1 RCLCO test program 4 58 4 61 response formats A 32 rcllock 4 61 RDATE 4 50 Rebooting 4 14 4 46 record 4 43 Record play back monitor task 4 41 4 71 Recorder Control Computer See RCC Recording 4 10 4 43 group setting 4 11 manual 4 43 mode setting 4 11 speed setting 4 13 starting the recording 4 14 tape ID and User Info 4 12 tape type 4 13 test vector 4 13 time setting 4 10 recordspeed 4 13 review 4 43 rewind 4 43 rlogin 4 36 4 39 4 60 ROS 1 1 4 15 ROS Configuration defaults file 4 17 4 32 editing 4 17 4 36 network 4 58 startup cmd file 4 36 4 59 termcap file 4 17 ROSCO 4 1 4 48 6 1 software reloads upgrades 6 1 RS 232C serial links 4 1 scan 4 44 scpll System Clock PLL 4 44 scpllmode 4 27 4 44 scpllrefclkfix 4 18 4 67 4 76 Self test 4 15 4 34 4 62 4 63 4 80 selfaligntarg 4 29 selfaligntime 4 29 serial 4 45 serialnum 4 45 Service History 4 53 6 6 Service Manual for AG25x0 6 5 6 12 Servicing 6 3 setremote 4 11 4 50 Setup 4 2 4 20 4 45 4 72 Shell 4 15 4 17 4 36 4 46 4 59 4 60 Shipping 7 1 7 2 containers 7 1 environment 7 2 shutdown 4 46 skipselftestl 4 80 sleep 4 46 Sockets 4 61 Soft keys 4 5 Software Reloads Upgrades 4 58 6 1 Specifications interface B 1 summary 8 1 Speed 4 13 4 47 See also Tape SRAM Static RAM board 1 2 6 1 State 4 2 4 5 4 24 4 72 Static RAM board See SRAM
86. operation that may be in progress The only recommended way to restart the system following shutdown without the reboot option is a full system reset There are several ways to do this tum the power off and on press the small red reset button on the RCC board or type Cntl on the console con trol underscore may require shift as well Typing reboot in the VxWorks shell will also work Use the shell command instead of shutdown if you just want to issue a few VxWorks shell commands and then return to ROS for experts only The rcl option closes any currently active network RCL connection useful to clean up hung RCL connections It does not shut down the rest of ROS Command sleep Syntax sleep NUM lt seconds gt NNN lt day gt NN lt hour gt NN lt min gt NN lt sec gt Description Delays for a certain amount of time or waits until a specific time This is useful in batch files to introduce delays and make commands execute in a precisely sched uled manner There are 3 general formats of the sleep command The simplest is to give a number of seconds to delay e g Sleep 5 causes a delay of 5 seconds There is also a long form relative format e g 52 User s Manual OPERATION n leep 03 45 30 delays for 3 hours 45 minutes and 30 seconds The third format is a long form absolute sleep command e g leep 189 23 00 00 which waits until 11 00 pm on day number 189 The time to wait is not allowed to exceed 30 days a
87. over the RCL If the system is functioning properly and no serious problems were discovered by the self test or online status the green LED on the front of the VME card cage will be lit ledmode defaults file parameter must be set to ok The LED on the Formatter board has the same function If there are serious problems with any of the DRD boards the LED on the 52 User s Manual OPERATION affected boards will fail to light making it easy to tell which ones to swap Any failure conditions indicated by LEDs will also be shown in the console Status window 4 2 7 ROS Configuration Two configuration files used by the Recorder Operating System can be edited by the user the defaults file and the termcap file The defaults file contains default boot up parameters such as the console terminal type tape type serial port baud rates and input output clock rates and modes It also contains the S2 station number and nickname and many other operational parameters you may wish to set Appendix C contains an example defaults file Each default parameter is documented right in the file and should be self explanatory The defaults file can be edited using the edit command see below or individual parameters may be displayed and updated directly using the default command described on Page 4 32 Note that changes to the defaults file take effect only after the next system boot A few parameters such as the terminal type sta
88. should be terminated on the DRDp with the corresponding channel label and address jumper setting C5 the Transport Control Link TCL is a serial cable connecting the TAMs and the DSCM NOTE Insertion keys are present on the C3 and C4 cables to prevent accidental interchange as this may result in damage It is recommended that the C3 and C4 cables be inserted with the power off if possible If power must remain on exercise care and do not force the connectors 2 4 Power Requirements Total S2 PT power requirements are 510 W 230 W for the DSCM and 140 W for each of the TAMs At least 700 VA should be available in order to supply sufficient current when the transports are most active which normally occurs when tape is loaded onto the transport scanner 52 User s Manual INSTALLATION 2 5 Power cables 120 Volt Operation The S2 units may be powered from any standard 120VAC wall outlet capable of supplying the total current re quirements of the S2 The system is supplied with three power cords the recommended power cord arrangement is shown in Figure 2 1 2 6 Power cables 240 Volt Operation For operation from a 240 VAC power source an external 2 1 transformer must be used to supply the TAMs with 120 VAC as indicated in Figure 2 2 The DSCM contains an auto ranging power supply and may be powered directly with 240V as shown The DSCM is supplied with an incomplete power cable to which a suitable plug can be attached Colour codin
89. speed lp slp recordspeed slp Tape type code one of 1 Scotch ST 120 SE 180 2 Maxell ST 180 ST 182 SE 260 3 Ampex 289 ST 120 ST 126 SE 180 or additional typecodes as listed by the tapetype typecodes command Used to determine write current levels For unlisted tape types enter digits NNNMMM where NNN is write current for LP and MMM is current for SLP tapetype 3 Number of transports connected to this S2 system 1 2 4 or 8 normally 8 This determines the number of transports to check during general diagnostics and self test This also determines the number of transports to select and use in the test modes cltestXX c2testXX and diagXX In a PT determines the minimum number of DRD boards that must be present diagnumtran 8 Default system clock PLL lock mode one of refclk 1127 errmes xtal auto or manual Normally refclk for record terminal auto selects refclk if user ref clock present xtal otherwise on both RT and PT scpllmode auto Source selection for input ref clock and 1 Hz signals 7 17 for record cable and c for C2 playback cable default means select on an S2 RT and C2 on an S2 PT clkinsrc cl Default input ref clock rate in MHz one of 4 8 16 32 or followdata clkinrate 32 Default output ref clock rate in MHz one of 4 8 16 32 or followdata clkoutrate 32
90. station 4 47 Station delay 4 18 4 33 4 67 4 76 See also align Status 4 3 4 22 4 48 4 62 codes 4 22 4 48 4 62 stop 4 48 Index 3 Stop setup 4 2 4 20 4 23 4 45 4 48 stopsetup 4 20 syncerrlocate 4 32 System Bootup 4 14 autoexec file 4 16 boot monitor 4 14 initial baud rate 4 15 ROS bootup 4 15 self test 4 15 4 80 System Clock PLL 4 18 4 27 4 33 4 44 4 68 4 69 4 78 TAM servicing 6 5 TAM Transport Array Module 1 1 Tape choice of 5 1 guides 6 12 shipping 5 2 storage 5 2 tape speeds 4 47 5 1 type 4 13 4 30 5 1 Tape alignment 4 9 4 29 4 77 absolute 4 29 preventing self alignment A 20 relative 4 30 self alignment 4 29 4 41 A 20 Tape ID 4 12 4 23 4 48 4 75 Tape positioning 4 23 4 25 4 42 Tape type 4 13 4 30 tapeid 4 48 tapeinfo 4 49 tapetype 4 13 4 30 5 1 4 25 4 54 6 7 telnet 4 36 4 39 4 60 Temperature See Transport term 4 49 4 60 termcap file 4 17 Termcap file format D 1 Terminal type 4 15 4 17 4 36 4 49 4 60 Test sequence See Test vector Test vector FORM 4 13 4 34 4 37 UI 4 13 4 34 4 40 4 54 B 2 Time 4 18 4 50 conversion 4 11 4 50 setting 4 10 4 50 uptime 4 50 timehost 4 50 Timing Interface B 2 Output C2 B 2 S2 Data Input C1 B 2 S2 Data Output C2 B 2 Tracking See Transport Transformer external 2 7 Transport 4 24 4 51 address assignment 6 7 dead 4 52 4 66 4 78 6
91. terminal has in and the software uses it When a is specified it is sometimes useful to give a delay of the form 3 5 to specify a delay per line to tenths of milliseconds Only one decimal place is allowed 52 User s Manual D 2 Comments e To comment out a capability field insert a period as the first character in that field following the D 2 2 Escape Sequence Codes A number of escape sequences are provided in the string valued capabilities for easy encoding of characters there E maps to ESC X maps to CTRL X for any appropriate character X n maps to LINEFEED r maps to RETURN t maps to TAB b maps to BACKSPACE f maps to FORMFEED Finally characters may be given as three octal digits after a backslash for example M23 and the characters caret and backslash may be given as V and respec tively If it is necessary to place a in a capability it must be escaped in octal as 1072 If it is necessary to place NUL character in a string capability it must be encoded as 1200 The routines that deal with termcap use C strings and strip the high bits of the output very late so that a 200 comes out as a 1000 would D 2 3 Parameterized Strings Cursor addressing and other strings requiring parameters are described by a parameterized string capability with printf 3S like escapes 96x it other characters are passed through unchanged For example to address the cur
92. the mode command which sets the user data rate and channelization and the Scpll mode command which selects the System Clock PLL lock reference Command verbose Syntax verbose NUM lt level gt countall on off Description Sets displays the verbose level which controls the amount of information displayed in the console status window by filtering out certain messages The valid range of verbose levels is from 0 to 3 where 3 gives the most information and 0 the least Level 1 is appropriate for normal operation Level 0 eliminates some im portant status messages and therefore is not recommended The verbose level also filters a small number of RCL status conditions but in general has less effect on the RCL than on the console The verbose level should be set to 1 for normal RCL operation The initial verbose level is defined in the system defaults file by the verbose parameter Command version Syntax version Description Displays the Recorder Operating System software version number including CPU type and compilation date time This can be used along with the boot EPROM and VxWorks version numbers displayed during bootup and the transport software version displayed with transport all status version to build a complete picture of the software revision status 52 User s Manual OPERATION Command wait Syntax wait stop aligndone drcal Description Waits until a specified condition is true This command is useful in bat
93. the TCP board since this board contains the EEPROM which S2 PT User s Manual MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING PLAY TAPE X ON TRANSPORT N ESTIMATED BER gt le 4 ON TRANSPORT N PASS TAPE X AND TRANSPORT N YES PLAY TEST TAPE RECORDED WITH S2 DATA IN TRANSPORT N ESTIMATED BER gt le 4 No ON TRANSPORT N MAKE TEST RECORDING ON TRANSPORT N USING TAPE X AND PLAY BACK ON TRANSPORT N ESTIMATED BER gt 1e 4 ON TRANSPORT N NO SERVICE RECORD TRANSPORT Figure 6 2 Transport Tape Diagnostics LP SERVICE PLAYBACK TRANSPORT lt m a REJECT TAPE X holds important information such as head use time service history and pgshift and write current calibration pa rameters This service information must be transferred to the new TCP board Therefore before you remove the original TCP board type the following console command transport N service dumpmem tofile After replacing the TCP board and reassigning the correct address as explained under Replacement type this second command transport N service loadmem NNNN Here NNNN is the old TCP serial number since the new board will have a different serial number Be sure to update the label on the back of the transport to show the new TCP serial number and update the service history file If a TCP board is being replaced because it has failed you may not be able to carry out the initial dumpmem step To guard against this problem the S2 per
94. the encrypted version of the password in the defaults file see Page 4 36 Additional userid pass word pairs can be defined by adding more lines in the same format each new userid line must be followed by a passwd line If desired network console connections can be disabled completely by setting the consolelock defaults parameter to 1 This prevents unwanted rlogin telnet connections from interrupting serial console operation Note that in rare cases you may find yourself in the VxWorks shell after connecting with rlogin or telnet This usually means that the previous user logged out while in the shell or that an error occurred during bootup which prevented ROS from starting If an error occurred you should see a brief error message which gets reprinted every time you press retum in fact it is part of the prompt to be sure you don t miss it The best thing to do in this case is to connect the serial console and reboot the system watching for any error messages 52 User s Manual OPERATION 4 4 3 RCL access via Internet sockets User software can access the RCL over the network using internet TCP sockets and specifying port number 1025 The underlying RCL packet format is exactly the same as when using serial connections The RCLCO program and RCL interface library software supplied with the S2 support network operation when compiled under Unix preprocessor macro UNIX defined You can use these programs as an example of how to write your own
95. the externally supplied 1 Hz reference and the S2 s internal 1 Hz tick which should match the current delay setting if the system clock PLL is in refclk mode or be within a few hundred bits of it when in Ihz mode The station delay measurement is always in the range 5 sec to one bit time short of 4 5 sec See RESP DELAY for the exact reply format If the user external 1 Hz reference is not present RESP ERR with code ERR NOUIHZ will be returned BARRELROLL SET 32 bytel Boolean barrel roll setting 0x00 Turn barrel roll OFF 0 01 Turn barrel roll ON total data bytes 1 RESP ERR ERR NONE 0 5 sec barrelroll onloff Turns barrel roll on or off When on barrel roll rotates user data over all ac tive transports and un rotates on playback so that the possible effect of a marginal transport is averaged over all channels BARRELROLL_READ 33 none RESP_BARRELROLL 0 5 sec barrelroll Reads the current barrel roll setting as set using BARRELROLL_SET During auto playback the barrel roll is automatically set to the same condition as at record time based on information encoded on the tape ALIGN 34 bytel alignment type code 0x00 align to absolute tape time byte2 byte3 tape UT absolute year 1901 2099 byte2 MSB If 0 correct year and day will be inferred If 1 just correct year will be inferred byte4 byte5 tape UT days 1 365 366 byte4 MSB Ignored if year is 0 correct day will be inferred byte6 tape U
96. the formatter hardware 1 Hz signal 1122 ledmode ok Recorder setup to use when S2 is stopped or in rewind ff etc either bypass or play default means select bypass on an S2 RT and play on an S2 PT Record applications will typically use bypass while playback applications will use play which ensures a consistent SIHZ PB output tick on the C2 cable except during mode changes stopsetup default Target time selection method in automatic playback self alignment first chooses the earliest transport s tape time last chooses the latest transport s tape time and middle chooses the time half way between the two selfaligntarg first Maximum time difference allowed during automatic playback self alignment in minutes from 1 to 600 default 30 min 0 means no limit If the difference between any transport tape time and the selected target time exceeds this value status code STAT ALIGNFAIL with error ERR ALBADTIME will appear This limit does not apply to user align selfalign requests selfaligntime 30 SC PLL refclk glitch fix flag Automatically resets correct station delay after a clock glitch in refclk mode 1 or does nothing 0 normally 1 Delay measurement must be different from setting and stable for two seconds 52 User s Manual APPENDIX C scpllrefclkfix 1 Position display format S2 tape positions are normally displayed
97. the internal counters 92 Command DATA EXTRACT READ Msg Code 92 Data byte 1 type of extraction 0 to 3 0 extract S2 user data format less 1 extract S2 data validity 2 extract MkIII format data trigger on sync detect 3 extract MkIII format data trigger on 1 Hz tick byte 2 bit offset 0 to 255 must be 0 for 32 Mbit modes 32xU Q byte 3 user channel number range 0 15 for S2 data validity or 0 13 for data total data bytes 3 Expected Resp RESP DATA EXTRACT Timer Duration 1 25 sec Eq Console Cmd uic dataextract uic validityextract mk3 dataextract 52 User s Manual APPENDIX A Description Extracts a small snapshot of data consisting of 24 consecutive bits or three bytes of data from a particular S2 user data channel Can also be used to extract 52 data validity or Mark III formatted data when the Mark III formatter is enabled The extracted data snapshot starts synchronous to the next 1 Hz tick or op tionally synchronous to the next detected sync word for Mark III format data ex traction type code 2 A bit offset may be specified to delay the start of extraction for up to 255 bits relative to the 1 Hz tick or sync word trigger Bit offsets are not supported in 32 Mbit modes offset value must be 0 For Mark III data extract the three least significant bits of the fourth response byte indicate parity errors for each of the 3 data bytes The contents of the data or validity chan
98. the message the numeric code is used Error codes can be manually translated to the appropriate message with the console error decode command or the RCL ERROR_DECODE command For a com plete list of error codes see Page A 32 Status The S2 software continuously gathers and reports status information which de scribes the overall health and operational condition of the system On the console this information is displayed in the 3 line status window to the right of the center of the screen Over the RCL it is obtained via the STATUS command and is the principal method of monitoring system activity Status is distinct from errors in that it represents conditions that arise after a command has executed or result from interactions between multiple commands so that error returns cannot be used to convey the necessary information It is sometimes called online status to em phasize that it is gathered continuously and not the result of a specific diagnostic test or procedure Status codes are positive numbers in the range 1 to 127 each associated with a mnemonic and a text description The console status decode command or RCL STATUS_DECODE command can be used to translate a status code to its corresponding text message Three status severity levels are defined informational error and fatal error In addition status codes representing transient or instantaneous conditions are classified as clear on read meaning that they are no longer rele
99. the same response RESP ERR with error code ERR INPBAUX will be returned If auxiliary data cannot be extracted from one or more of the tapes ERR NOPBAUX will be returned this error can be expected to oc cur during tape alignment and just after playback has started USER DV SET 23 bytel Boolean user DV value record only 0x00 Set record user data valid FALSE 0x01 Set record user data valid TRUE byte2 Boolean playback user DV enable value playback only 0x00 Ignore user data validity flag during playback 0x01 Recognize user data validity flag during playback total data bytes 2 RESP ERR NONE 0 5 sec user dv yeslnolplayback enableldisable Sets the value of the record user data valid DV flag This flag is recorded continuously on the S2 auxiliary data channel which is the same for all tapes and recovered at playback time where it is used to invalidate data if FALSE by lowering the data validity signals on the C2b c cable This facil ity provides a way to indicate at record time that invalid data is being re corded e g the telescope is slewing or off source The user DV value should be set as desired prior to the start of recording and thereafter may be changed at any time but should not be changed more often than every few seconds The user DV setting first data byte is only relevant during record and is not used during playback The second data byte controls a playback option to ignore the user DV
100. time The above information may not be valid during tape alignment or imme diately after playback starts channel ID will be OxFF See RESP TAPEINFO for detailed field information DELAY SET 29 bytel type 0 absolute setting 1 relative setting byte2 byte5 32 bit signed 2 s complement delay value in nanoseconds byte2 MSB Range 500000000 to 500000000 1bit abs 1000000000 1bit to 1000000000 1610 rel total data bytes 5 52 User s Manual Expected Resp Timer Duration Eq Console Cmd Description 30 Timer Duration Eq Console Cmd Description 31 Command Msg Code Data Expected Resp Command APPENDIX A RESP ERR ERR NONE 4 0 sec delay NUM slmslusinsibits relative Sets the station delay This provides a positive or negative offset of up to 1 2 second between the external 1 Hz reference and the S2 internal timing This can be used during record to implement clock offsets and corrections or during playback to implement smooth delay and delay rate corrections if the system clock PLL is in 1hz mode Delay setting can be performed in either absolute or relative terms For absolute delay setting the external 1 Hz sync signal SIHZ REC on ca ble or CIHZ on C2a cable is used as the reference and must be present otherwise error code ERR NOUIHZ is returned Relative delay changes do not require the 1 Hz signal All delay settings are rounded off to the n
101. to display update latencies use the Diag dec time display for a more instantaneous tape time value State Tape time Shows the transport state or playback tape time if available hours mins secs frames Includes servo lock indicator L This is the parameter normally displayed time State Tape day Like the first display above but the tape time includes day hours mins day State Tape year Like the first display above but the tape time includes year day year Tape position Gives the individual transport tape positions in hours min utes seconds of recorded data since BOT or as an integer number of seconds de pending on the posdisformat defaults file parameter position Est error rate Shows the estimated bit error rate for each transport DRD includes all transports in auto record play only esterr data valid Shows the data valid for each transport DRD includes all transports in auto record play only dv AGC level Indicates the playback record bypass signal strength agclevel Tape channel ID Shows the channel ID extracted from tape during playback This corresponds to the address of the transport used to record the tape chanid Transport temp Shows the temperature inside the transports in degrees Cel sius temp In service time Shows the total number of hours the transport has spent in play record pause cue or review states since the last service event as recorded using transport N servic
102. transports automatically turn off above 60 degrees or below 5 degrees C In rare cases if a transport has shut itself off but is known not to exceed the temperature and condensation limits it could be that the temperature calibration factor has been corrupted and needs to be re entered The wrlev option allows you to explicitly set the write current level used during record however the write current is normally set according to the tape type and should not be changed By using the word optimize transport wrlev optimize you can run a special optimization routine that automatically deter mines the best individual write current offset for each transport This can signifi cantly improve bit error rates compared to operating without offsets You can also set the offset manually using the wrlevoffset option but this is not recom mended To display the write current value and offset for one or more transports use transport status wrlev See Section 6 4 4 for more information on write current optimization The options option allows you to turn on and off specific software features of the transport This should not normally be necessary except in rare cases to work around unusual problems Under options the takeupsense option switch lets you turn off the TCP takeup reel sensing software and prevent tape motion fail errors status code STAT TRANTPMOTPFAIL in the event that these errors are occurring erroneously The wrlevoffset option switch lets y
103. will be reported immediately in the console status window When the recording is complete type stop to stop the tapes If any of the tapes should reach the end EOT the S2 will stop tapes automatically Type rewind to wind the tapes to the beginning if desired and then type eject to extract them Eject All Feature A special convenience feature allows all of the tapes to be manually ejected without using the console press and hold any transport s eject button for two seconds or more and all the tapes will eject This feature should preferably be used only when all transports are stopped No other transport front panel switches or buttons should be touched The ejectalldisable defaults file option can be used to disable the eject all feature 4 2 5 System Bootup The S2 system goes through a boot procedure approximately 90 seconds long every time the power is applied or the system is reset The boot procedure loads and initializes the software configures the hardware and performs a number of integrity checks to ensure correct system functionality This section may be a bit technical for some users so you may wish to skip ahead to ROS Bootup The first code to run is part of what s called the boot monitor which resides in EPROMs located on the RCC MVMEI33XT CPU board VME slot 1 This performs phase 1 of the boot sequence The boot monitor first displays the following message Press space bar to enter boot monitor n for
104. with miss ing excess sync since the last status reset command 52 User s Manual OPERATION 4 2 9 Console Command Descriptions This section explains each console command and its parameters Commands are listed alphabetically or to find a specific command use the index Virtually all commands that set some kind of switch register or mode follow a general convention that the command with parameters sets the value of the switch and the same command without parameters displays its value without changing it For example the time command with parameters sets or adjusts the time while without parameters it displays the current time Of course the time is also shown on the console display Command syntax is indicated by listing keywords in lower case and numeric string parameters in upper case NUM STR with a descriptive word in angle brackets This is the same as the conventions used by the soft key display Optional parameters are enclosed in square brackets and lists of alternatives are separated by vertical bars I Alternatives where exactly one must be chosen are enclosed in brace brackets An ellipsis means that a portion of the syntax description has been omitted Note that a number of low level and diagnostic commands are not fully documented Many console commands are not needed for regular S2 operation Most of the extra commands are for system configuration testing and unusual operation modes Importa
105. x x 4p8 2 10 0 01 10 4x16 1 4 16 2 0 0 Note active signal 0 driven low blank floating Table B 5 S2 Modes with active C1 C2 signal channels Continued from previous page PIN SIG NAME vO DESCRIPTION 2 TxD Transmit Data 3 RxD Receive Data 4 RTS Request to Send 5 CTS Clear to Send 7 GND Signal Ground 8 DCD l Data Carrier Detect 20 DTR Data Terminal Ready Table B 6 C6 RCL Cable Signal Assignments APPENDIX B 0 26 APPENDIX B C2b C2c CABLE TEST VECTOR SEQUENCES 2 FIRST 20 WORDS FOLLOWING 112 RESET AT t ee lt gt c o I gt gt c x o 5 3 5 o ec gt c G a 2 02 gt rcm lt gt lt e4 c c c oru L gt lt o e ero
106. year Relative alignment is performed by applying a signed relative offset to the current tape time Unlike absolute alignment there are no special synchro nization requirements for the command itself However the tapes must al ready be aligned to the same tape time or error code ERR NOALIGN will be returned if necessary use the self align option first see below The exter nal control computer may read the tape time with TIME READ PB in order to calculate the required relative offset Two special alignment options are provided that may be useful in certain cases type code 2 causes the tapes to re align to the previously chosen reference time should one or more transports ever become un aligned 52 User s Manual APPENDIX A This is normally done automatically by the S2 s regular playback monitoring but a way to initiate this manually may sometimes be useful following a tal align error STAT ALIGNFAIL where no further automatic attempts are made to re align The option should not be used unless some other type of alignment has already been performed for the current set of tapes The self align option type code 3 causes the transports to align to each other by chosing a target reference time based on the current tape times Three selection methods are available according to the defaults file op tion selfaligntarg the first tape time the last tape time or the
107. 18 ERR_MISSIG Operation encountered missed DRD signatures 24 ERR_NOTIMP Operation not yet implemented 25 ERR_HWCONFIG Not possible with this hardware configuration 26 ERR_CNTLC Operation interrupted by cntl C continued on next page 52 User s Manual APPENDIX A ROS Error Return Codes continued 28 ERR ILSETUP Recorder setup is illegal for requested operation 29 ERR INSETUP Recorder setup is inconsistent across selected transports 30 ERR ILSTATE Recorder state is invalid for requested operation 31 ERR_NOPBAUX Could not decode playback auxiliary data 32 ERR_CHIDMISS Tape with required channel ID is missing 33 ERR_CHIDDUP Two tapes have the same channel ID 34 ERR_BADCRC Operation failed due to bad CRC 35 ERR_DRNOTINIT DR configuration is not initialized 36 ERR_MK3SYNC frame sync error 37 ERR_LOGBADLEN Log file full logging aborted 38 ERR LOGCLOSED Log file is closed 39 ERR NOU1HZ User 1 Hz sync signal not present 40 ERR ECHOOFF Interactive command echoing must not be turned off 41 ERR NOALIGN Tapes playing but not aligned 42 ERR_INPBAUX Tapes have inconsistent aux data 43 ERR_CURSWIN Error returned by curses windowing routines 44 ERR_BOTEOT Encountered beginning end of tape BOT EOT 45 ERR_ALBADTIME Tape alignment target time is out of ran
108. 197 RESP_IDENT RCL device type string This is a generic response 199 RESP_VERSION ea version information This is a generic Command Response Formats This section contains detailed format descriptions of each command and response Each format description has the following entries 52 User s Manual Command Msg Code Data Expected Resp Timer Duration Eq Console Cmd Description Commands 0 Command Msg Code Data Expected Resp Timer Duration Eq Console Cmd Description 1 Command Msg Code Data Expected Resp Timer Duration Eq Console Cmd Description APPENDIX A The name of the command or response The entry is labeled Response for re sponses The word generic is included in brackets if this is a generic command or response The hex command response code The contents of the packet data field commands only The proper response if the command is successful unsuccessful commands return RESP ERR commands only The time in which the sender of the message should get a reply If a reply is not received after this duration then the message should be re sent This information is for setting timeout intervals only in practice most commands will complete much faster than the time indicated The RCL Interface Library in corporates the timer duration values documented here and performs timeouts and retries as required Therefore users calling the
109. 2 Output Data ECL 25 OUT 10 S2 Output Data ECL 26 OUT 10 S2 Output Data ECL 27 OUT 11 S2 Output Data ECL 28 OUT 11 S2 Output Data ECL 29 OUT 12 S2 Output Data ECL 30 OUT 12 S2 Output Data ECL 31 OUT 13 S2 Output Data ECL 32 OUT 13 S2 Output Data ECL 33 NC No Connection 34 NC No Connection 35 OUT 14 S2 Output Data ECL 36 OUT 14 S2 Output Data ECL 37 OUT 15 S2 Output Data ECL 38 OUT 15 S2 Output Data ECL 39 GND Ground 40 GND Ground 41 GND Ground 42 GND Ground 43 CCLK Correlator 32 MHz Reference Clock ECL 44 CCLK Correlator 32 MHz Reference Clock ECL 45 C1HZ Correlator 1Hz Reference ECL 46 1 2 Correlator 1Hz Reference ECL 47 S1HZ PB Playback 1Hz Reference ECL 48 S1HZ PB Playback 1Hz Reference ECL 49 NC No Connection 50 NC No Connection Table B 2 S2 C2a Output Cable Signal Assignments APPENDIX B S2 PT User s Manual SIGNAL NAME 1 0 DESCRIPTION 1 GND Ground 2 GND Ground 3 DV OUT 0 S2 Output Data Validity ECL 4 DV OUT 0 S2 Output Data Validity ECL 5 DV OUT 2 S2 Output Data Validity ECL 6 DV OUT 2 S2 Output Data Validity ECL 7 DV OUT 4 S2 Output Data Validity ECL 8 DV OUT 4 S2 Output Data
110. 2 mode 2 bit quantized data occupies 2 user channels bit streams and is generally treated like two channels of 1 bit quantized data except that during playback only one Data Validity signal is used for both sign and magnitude Internal S2 channels carry data at a fixed rate of 16 Mbits s or slightly higher when the data includes format overhead There are 8 internal channels one per transport for a total of 128 Mbits s Mode The mode describes the current user data rate and channel allocation of the S2 It is sometimes called observing mode or recorder mode Each mode has a specific number and arrangement of active user data channels at a data rate of 4 8 16 or 32 Mbits s per channel The product of the number of channels and the channel data rate gives the total system data rate which can be anywhere from 16 to 128 Mbits s in multiples of 16 Mbits s Dividing the total data rate by 16 gives the number of transports needed for operation in a particular mode In addition to regular observing modes there are a number of test modes for check ing C1 C2 cable connectivity and general system operation Group In modes that require less than 8 transports the active transports are normally selected in order starting at 0 For example in a mode requiring 4 transports trans ports 0 3 would be selected This group of transports is called group 0 Other group numbers can be specified thus selecting a different set of tra
111. 4 6 8 10 12 14 Refer to Table B 5 for a list of which user channels are active in each recorder mode If the S2 is in Cl cable test mode Cltest is shown A switch can be set to disable the data inputs for diagnostics in which case the display shows disabled C2 data Indicates which of the 16 user data output channels on the C2a cable are active in the current mode and setup The numbers shown correspond to the output signal names OUT 0 to OUT 15 listed in Table B 2 Unless the S2 PT is in play or set up to play only a subset of the potential C2 outputs are active since there is only one diagnostic signal path When the UI is set to feed through mode all potential C2 data outputs are active and contain feed through data from the Cl input cable When the Mark III formatter is enabled mk3 form enable the C2a cable switches to Mark III compatible mode and Mk3 is displayed The cable pin outs are as shown in Table B 4 but in this case the channel numbers shown in the display do not correspond directly to the TRACK numbers shown in the table but rather should be multiplied by 2 and then incremented by either 1 or 2 depending on whether the odd or even Mark III track number convention is being used When the S2 is in a C2 cable test mode C2test is shown or C2tMk3 if the Mark III formatter is also on A switch can be set to disable the C2 data and validity outputs for diagnostic purposes in which case the dis
112. AGCLEV EF Transport xxx AGC levels are outside acceptable range 73 STAT MARGAGCLEV Transport AGC levels are marginal but still within acceptable range 74 STAT ERRLOG E C Log file error xxx xxx 75 STAT ERRDRCONFIG E C Error xxx in DRDxxx data recovery config xxx 76 STAT ERRDRTRACK E C Error xxx in tran xxx DR tracking calibration xxx 77 STAT DELAYFIX Station delay auto resets xxx 81 STAT NOALIGN Tapes playing but not aligned playback data not valid 84 STAT_ALIGNIP Tape alignment operation in progress 85 STAT ALIGNDONE C Tape alignment operation completed successfully 89 STAT_TAPESYNCERR E C Tape time sync error has occurred 92 STAT_SCPLLDACRAIL System clock PLL DAC at or near rail value 93 STAT_SCPLLACCRAIL System clock PLL accumulator at or near rail value 94 STAT DRTAPRAIL DRDxxx data recovery taps at or near rail value xxx continued on next page 52 User s Manual APPENDIX A Status Response Codes continued E indicates error indicates fatal error indicates clear on read 95 STAT_DREQSETRAIL DRDxxx data recovery EqSet at or near rail value 96 STAT DRFSETRAIL DRDxxx data recovery FSet at or near rail value 97 STAT_TRANDIEDBORN E C Transports died born 98 STAT TRANPKTRETRY C Transport packet retries xxx 99 STAT_DRFSETFADJ C DRDxxx data recovery fine FSet adjustments xxx
113. Black or Professional Broadcast Quality Note These thin tapes will not work in systems with AG25 10 transports 3 Ampex 289 ST 126 SE 180 20 micron SVHS tape Some cassettes may be labeled ST 120 but are actually the same length as the ST 126 4 Fuji H471S ST 120 SE 180 20 micron SVHS tape Available in North America as ST 120 and in Europe Australia as SE 180 about 5 longer than ST 120 Refer to Table 5 1 for a summary of tape types and recording times The fast S2 tape speed is LP 29 micron track pitch and gives 4 hours 1 minute total recording time per ST 126 SE 180 tape at a specified bit error rate of less than 1 x 107 Typical bit error rates of around 1 x 10 can be expected in LP Note that AG2550 transports cannot record in LP but can play back LP tapes recorded using other transports Operating the system at the slower SLP speed 20 micron track pitch gives 5096 longer recording times or 6 hours 2 minutes on ST 126 SE 180 tapes SLP bit error rate is specified at less than 1 x 10 averaged across 8 transports with typical bit error rates around 2 x 107 Note that AG2510 transports can record in SLP but should not be used for SLP playback due to inadequate performance With Maxell ST 182 SE 260 thin tapes the SLP recording time is extended to 8 hours 41 minutes and although thin tapes have not been formally specified BER performance should be similar to thick tape Note that thin tapes those longer than
114. CE SPECIFICATIONS B 1 B 1 Overview B 1 B Ll 2 Sinal Interface soe ve Rp GAR ed St ae ER ERA B 1 1 2 S2 Control Interface B 1 B 2 S2 Signal Interface B 1 B 2 1 Signal Assignments 2 5 oz ER RR Red duce ee SS B 1 B 2 1 1 Signal Characteristics crecer urea aea a a a R e ee B 2 B 2 12 Electrical Characteristics ssi sero n a bee eae RR Rae B 2 B 2 1 3 Physical 8 8 B 2 B 2 1 4 Input Output Cable Connection Test Modes B 2 B 3 S2 Control Interface B 3 B 3 1 RCL Serial Link C6 Cable B 3 B 3 2 RCC Console Cable C7 Cable B 3 C SAMPLE ROS DEFAULTS FILE C 1 D UNIX TERMCAP FILE FORMAT D 1 D Overview D 1 D 2 Types of Capabilities D 2 DX2ib Comments sg Bia Ps ae BMS OES Ss Be ae med s D 3 D 2 2 Escape Sequence Codes 3 D232 Parameterized Strings sis sis ecto i GS A he eae D 3 D24 Delays aor ime Dae RI ALINE IO Ed d ETRAS D 4 1 2 5 Similar Terminals SENS E Bled pese a xut D 5 D 3 Capabilities D 5 E GLOSSARY E 1 BIBLIOGRAPHY INDEX 52 User s Manual Figure 1 1 Figure 1 2 Figure 2 1 Figure 2 2
115. Console Msg nnn stuck in phasel trk Interpretation The phase 1 tracking algorithm performed by the transports is taking too long This message indicates a possible hardware fault or software bug in the Transport Control Processor It may be caused by a broken transport control track sensor which is erroneously reporting blank tape 56 Mnemonic STAT ILSETUP Type Error Console Msg setup Interpretation The current internal diagnostic signal path configuration is illegal or inconsistent This normally appears only during manual operation and indicates that something is wrong with the switch settings that define the setup The specific problem 18 given in place of the x s in the message e g ch filt on shld be off The channel emulation filter is being used when it shouldn t be ch filt off shld be on The channel emulation filter is not being used when it should be diag transpt is dead The current diagnostic transport is dead diag transpt is off The current diagnostic transport is off diag DRD N is dead The current diagnostic DRD is marked not present 57 Mnemonic STAT INSTATE Type Fatal error Console Msg motion state is inconsistent Interpretation The overall tape motion state cannot be consistently determined based on the states of currently selected transports For example some transports are recording and some are stopped This can also arise if so
116. D PB uem T aux data fields amp labels Values must be consistent 23 USER DV SET Set user data valid flag boolean record continued on next page S2 PT User s Manual APPENDIX A Code Cmd Name Function continued 24 USER DV READ Read user data valid flag record 25 USER DV READ PB Read user data valid flag Value must be consistent across all tapes 26 GROUP SET Set transport group number 27 GROUP READ Read transport group number also gives number of groups 28 TAPEINFO READ PB Return tape related information during playback for all 8 individual transports 29 DELAY SET Set the station delay offset 30 DELAY READ Read the current station delay offset setting 31 DELAYM READ Read the current station delay offset measurement 32 BARRELROLL SET Turn barrel roll on or off 33 BARRELROLL READ Read the current barrel roll setting 34 ALIGN Align tapes pb use STATUS to test completion 35 POSITION SET Position tapes use STATE READ to test completion 36 POSITION READ Read the current tape position 37 ERRMES Supply error measurement for playback rate control in SCPLL mode errmes 38 ESTERR READ Read estimated error rates for all transports 39 PDV READ Read 96 data valid values for all transports 42 SCPLL MODE SET Set the System Clock PLL mode 43 SCPLL MODE READ Read the curren
117. DRAM DRD DSCM DV EOD EOT EP ERRMES FF FIFO FORM LAN LP PB PCES PLL PT RCC RCL RCLCO REFCLK ROS ROSCO RPMON RT SCPLL SLP SP SRAM SRSYR SVHS TAM TCL TCB TCP TRAN TVG TVR UI UIC UTC VCO VLBI VSOP APPENDIX E GLOSSARY Analog to Digital Converter Automatic Gain Control Analog Direct Hookup Bit Error Rate Bit Error Rate Counter Beginning Of Tape Bypass Cyclical Redundancy Check Digital to Analog Converter Deformatter Digital Direct Hookup Data Recovery Dynamic Random Access Memory Data Recovery Deformatter Data Signal and Control Module Data Validity End Of Data End Of Tape Extended Play same as SLP Error Measurement Fast Forward First In First Out memory Formatter Local Area Network Long Play Playback Personal Computer Field System NASA Goddard Space Flight Center Phase Lock Loop Playback Terminal Recorder Control Computer Radioastronomy Control Link formerly Recorder Control Link Radioastronomy Control Link Communications program Reference Clock Recorder Operating System Recorder Operating System Communications program Record Playback Monitor Record Terminal System Clock Phase Lock Loop Super Long Play Short Play Static Random Access Memory Servo Sync Record Super VHS Transport Array Module Transport Control Link Transport Control Board Transport Control Processor Transport Test Vector Ge
118. Data Expected Resp Timer Duration Eq Console Cmd Description 13 Command Msg Code Data Expected Resp Timer Duration Eq Console Cmd Description APPENDIX A RECORD command was sent The SPEED READ command may be sent at any time SPEED READ PB 11 RESP SPEED 0 5 sec none playback speed displayed on console screen Reads the current playback tape speed This may be LP SLP SP or un known see RESP SPEED The 52 must currently be playing back tapes The unused speed SP may appear for blank tapes or when tapes were not re corded by an S2 An unknown response may appear when playback speed has not yet been determined or when tapes recorded at different speeds are played at the same time TIME SET 12 bytel byte2 Absolute UT year number 1901 2099 1 58 byte3 byte4 UT day number 1 to 365 366 byte3 MSB byte5 UT hours 0 to 23 byte6 UT minutes 0 to 59 byte7 UT seconds 0 to 59 total data bytes 7 RESP ERR ERR NONE 0 5 sec time NNN NN NN NNI slmlhldly l NUMlIvalidate Sets the S2 system time which is the time encoded onto tape during record It is also used for other miscellaneous functions such as time tagging internal log entries and implementing absolute time delays in batch files If the Sys tem Clock PLL is in refclk mode then the TIME SET command must be synchronized to the S 1 C 1 Hz input tick SIHZ REC on cable or
119. ER INFO READ USER INFO READ PB commands RESP USER DV 124 bytel Boolean value 0x00 Record playback user data valid FALSE 0x01 Record playback user data valid TRUE byte2 Boolean value always 0 for USER DV READ PB 0x00 User data valid flag ignored at playback 0x01 User data valid flag recognized at playback total data bytes 2 See USER DV READ and USER DV READ PB commands RESP GROUP 127 bytel Transport group number 0 7 byte2 Number of valid groups in current mode 1 8 total data bytes 2 See GROUP READ command RESP TAPEINFO 128 bytel byte416 Table of information values for 8 tapes with 52 bytes 2 1 row per tape For each tape row of the table the following informa tion is given rbytel address of transport containing tape range 0 7 numbers will be consecutive rbyte2 channel ID S2 internal channel number of the tape s data range 0 7 Equivalent to the transport address used at record time If auxil iary data could not be extracted for this tape the channel ID will be OxFF and all following fields except possibly playback tape time will contain ze roes rbyte3 rbyte23 20 character tape ID string terminated by a null for 21 bytes total Tape IDs shorter than 20 characters will leave trailing bytes unused set to null but will still occupy 21 bytes total 52 User s Manual Description 130 Description 133 Description 136 Response Msg Cod
120. Emodule 32 Bit Monoboard Microcomputer User s Manual MVME133XT D1 April 1988 7 Georg Feil 52 Operations Overview for VSOP Version 1 5 CRESTech SGL TR98 040 Centre for Research in Earth and Space Technology Space Geodynamics Laboratory March 22 1998 ftp fip sgl crestech ca pub s2 svlbi artop ps Z Bibliography 1 1Hz PB output 4 33 1Hz REC BNC output 4 33 Ahook 4 19 align 4 29 Alignment See Tape alignment assignaddr 4 51 Autoexec file See Batch files Auxiliary data 4 12 4 19 4 20 4 32 4 34 4 41 4 49 4 74 4 75 Mark 4 27 Bad tapes 4 9 barrelroll 4 30 Basic procedures 4 8 batch 4 31 Batch files 4 7 4 31 agc_noscope 6 17 agcoff 6 17 agcon 6 17 autoexec 4 16 batch command 4 31 batch edit 4 7 4 31 batch log 4 7 4 31 batch verify 4 31 berlp tst 2 9 4 81 berslp tst 2 9 4 81 inter tst 2 9 4 81 Battery replacement 6 3 beep 4 31 berlp tst batch file 2 9 4 81 berslp tst batch file 2 9 4 81 Bit error rate BER 4 20 4 25 4 37 4 54 A 30 Bootup 4 14 BOT 4 42 4 71 4 73 boxmode 4 31 Cables 2 5 Cl cable 2 5 B 1 C2a cable 2 6 B 1 Index C2b cable 2 6 B 1 C2c cable 2 6 B 1 C3 cable 2 6 C4 cable 2 6 C5 cable 2 6 C6 RCL cable 2 6 C6 cable B 1 C7 console cable 2 6 C7 cable B 1 power cables 2 7 caltemp 4 53 Channel 4 1 Channel ID 4 25 4 49 4 73 clear 4 31 clkinrate 4 27 4 56 clkinsrc 4 27 4 56 c
121. FORMDFIFOTERR Type Error clear on read Console Msg Form d FIFO timing errs nnnnnnnn Interpretation Indicates internal timing errors in one or more S2 Formatter channels specifically the data FIFOs Isolated Formatter data FIFO errors can be caused by glitches in system timing such as System Clock PLL sync errors STAT_SCPLLSLIP check your external timing reference Continuous data FIFO errors probably mean a hardware fault on the Formatter board The error condition is sampled only once per second so there can be at most one data FIFO error reported per second but in actual fact there may have been more The display shows the number of errors in one of two formats if there have been fewer than 10 errors in all 8 Formatter channels a string of 8 digits is shown where each gives the number of errors in the corresponding Formatter channel 0 7 If any channel has had 10 or more errors only the channel with the most errors is shown The impact of a Formatter data FIFO error event during record is that at least one frame of data will be lost in all channels even if only one channel registered an error there are 64 frames 52 User s Manual OPERATION per second During playback there should be no adverse effect since the formatter is not used assuming no other timing related problems occurred 42 Mnemonic STAT MK3PLLSLIP Type Error clear on read Console Msg PLL sync errors nnn Interpretation During
122. Formatter TVG pseudo random noise sequence Command term Syntax term STR type default Description Sets the console terminal type If the terminal type is not set correctly the console display may appear garbled and editing with the edit or batch edit commands may be almost impossible Note that the terminal type will revert to its default value as entered in the system defaults file next time the system is rebooted unless you specify default which causes the defaults file to be automatically updated Terminal types entered with this command must appear in the terminal ca pability termcap file or they will not be recognized Table 4 2 shows some popular terminal types recognized by the S2 software as shipped The termcap file can 52 User s Manual OPERATION be edited by typing edit termcap but if the terminal you are using is not supported by the S2 you will need to add a definition for it to the termcap file without using the editor This can be done via the S2 install procedure which is invoked from the VxWorks shell by typing install use the console shell command or press the space bar at the appropriate part of the bootup to enter the shell See Section 4 2 7 and Appendix D for more information on termcaps Command Syntax time NNN lt day gt NN lt hour gt NN lt min gt NN lt sec gt s m h d y JNUM validate convert NUM lt day gt NUM lt year gt I jan feb dec NUM day NUM lt year gt
123. GNFAIL with error ERR ALBADTIME appears Self alignment can also be initiated manually using the selfalign command option in which case the time restriction does not apply To skip the automatic self alignment step manually issue an absolute alignment or self alignment request immediately after starting playback In absolute tape alignment the user specifies a time to which the S2 should align its tapes e g align 14 59 02 173 This tape time is referenced to the second it is received by the S2 i e it is the tape time that would appear if the procedure was instantaneous but in fact alignment may take several seconds or minutes depending on the distance to slew Because of the asynchronous nature of the console the user should issue the absolute align command immediately following a 1 Hz output clock tick and that tick is taken as the reference for the absolute time contained in the command While alignment is in progress the current tape time is undefined and playback data should be con sidered invalid If it takes 20 seconds to align then the first valid data will be 52 User s Manual OPERATION tagged with the requested alignment time plus 20 seconds If a fractional seconds portion is included in the time the 1 Hz output tick SIHZ PB on C2a cable will shift backwards by the indicated amount e g in the above example the SIHZ PB tick would start coming out 173 ms earlier Relative tape alignment applies a signed relative of
124. Interpretation During automatic playback at least two tapes have different Tape ID strings This could mean they come from different tape sets If so stop the S2 insert the correct tapes and restart playback This message may appear momentarily if the recorded Tape ID changes but its presence will have no adverse effects on system operation Nonetheless we recommend that the same Tape ID be used throughout the entire length of the tape 68 Mnemonic STAT BADPBESTERR Type Error Console Msg Tran N estimated err rate gt nnn Interpretation During automatic playback this indicates that the estimated error rate for one or more transports is above a certain acceptable threshold The threshold is currently 5 0 x 107 for speed LP and 3 0 x 10 for SLP This message should just be treated as a warning any more severe conditions will cause additional status mes sages to appear To see the actual estimated error rates for each transport type transport display esterr 69 Mnemonic STAT RECBADSYNC Type Fatal error Console Msg Tran nnn rec data has bad sync Interpretation The diagnostic loopback data from one or more transports has missing or marginal sync during automatic record This may mean that the data is not being recorded properly and should be investigated immediately Possible causes include Formatter failure transport failure DRD failure or marginal 4 cable connections 70 Mnemonic STAT RECBADAUX T
125. K IlI Format NRZM data output ECL 24 TRACK 19 TRACK 20 MK Format NRZM data output ECL 25 TRACK 21 TRACK 22 MK Format NRZM data output ECL 26 TRACK 21 TRACK 22 MK Format NRZM data output ECL 27 TRACK 23 TRACK 24 MK Format NRZM data output ECL 28 TRACK 23 TRACK 24 MK Format NRZM data output ECL 29 TRACK 25 TRACK 26 MK Format NRZM data output ECL 30 TRACK 25 TRACK 26 MK Format NRZM data output ECL 31 TRACK 27 TRACK 28 MK III Format NRZM data output ECL 32 TRACK 27 TRACK 28 MK Format NRZM data output ECL 33 NC NC No Connection read after write Ch A MKIII 34 NC NC No Connection read after write Ch A MKIII 35 HIGH HIGH HIGH ECL 36 LOW LOW LOW ECL 37 HIGH HIGH HIGH ECL 38 LOW LOW LOW ECL 39 GND GND Ground 40 GND GND Ground 41 GND GND Ground 42 GND GND Ground 43 NC NC No Connection ECL 100 ohm input termination 44 NC NC l No Connection ECL 100 ohm input termination 45 NC NC No Connection ECL 100 ohm input termination 46 NC NC No Connection ECL 100 ohm input termination 47 HIGH HIGH HIGH ECL 48 LOW LOW LOW ECL 49 NC NC No Connection read after write clock Ch A MKIII 50 NC NC No Connection read after write clock Ch A MKIII Table B 4 MkIII C2a Output Cable Signal Assignments APPENDIX B S2 PT User s Manual
126. LUNLOCK status messages indicating that the SC PLL is con sidered unlocked difference between delay setting and delay measurement greater than about 6 x 107 8 Smooth delay tracking is still attempted although internal timing problems resulting in loss of playback data become more likely in this situ ation Smooth delay tracking is suspended for delay errors or steps greater than about 3 x 10 s at which time phase offsetting is used to adjust the delay hence there will definitely be a glitch in the playback data Phase offsetting can be dis abled by setting the SC PLL type to purephase For detailed information on S2 timing and playback rate control facilities please refer to the following document ISTS SGL TR94 030 Timing and Synchronization in S2 Record and Playback Terminals available at ftp tp sgl crestech ca pub s2 doc timing timing ps Z See also the ERRMES RCL command for an alternate delay tracking method Page A 22 and the description of the STAT SCPLLSLIP status message on Page 4 69 Command diag Syntax diag self1 syncaux formberc uicberc dcbias drdxbar mk3sync ver bose lpgstress decode NUM lt diagcode gt Description Initiates S2 diagnostic sequences or decodes diagnostic result codes The decode option can be used to translate numeric diagnostic codes sometimes found in the status window following the power on self test The remaining options initiate spe cific diagnostic sequences The se1f1 option c
127. Mark III IV compatible operation indicates the Mark III PLL on the UI board is having difficulty locking Isolated Mark III PLL errors can be caused by changes in system timing such as when the setup is changed between play and bypass record or when the recorder mode is changed They can also appear when switching the Mark III formatter on or off If system timing is otherwise stable this message indicates a probable failure of the UI Mark III timing circuitry 43 Mnemonic STAT MK3MISSYNC Type Error clear on read Console Msg sync detect misses nnn Interpretation During Mark III IV compatible operation indicates that the Mark III formatted data contains missing or excess syncs as determined by the Mark III sync detector The sync detector is a diagnostic circuit intended to help verify correct Mark III formatter operation by checking for the sync word pattern Spurious sync misses can be caused by changes in system timing such as when the setup is changed between play and bypass record or when the recorder mode is changed They can also appear when switching the Mark III formatter on or off If system timing is otherwise stable this message may indicate a failure of the Mark III formatter on the UI board 44 Mnemonic STAT MK3DFIFOTERR Type Error clear on read Console Msg Mk3 d FIFO timing errs nnn Interpretation Indicates internal timing errors in one or more Mark formatter channels spe cifically
128. NCE AND SERVICING 4 Wait for tracking calibration to complete about 45 seconds watch for track changing to uncalib finally disappearing wait drcal 5 Measure bit error rate setup transport N form berc 0 30 s Write down the average bit error rate obtained after 30 seconds 6 Measure the flatness profile def syncerrlocate enable def syncerrlocate histogram 0 249 30 s cumulative This measures the tape error distribution across the frame for 30 seconds Write down the flatness and scale values obtained 7 Stopandeject the tape stop eject Part B Adjust Posts An oscilloscope is normally required to carry out the guide post adjustment If no oscilloscope is available the adjustment may be carried out using the alternate method given later below Setup Remove the transport to be adjusted from its TAM as described on Page 6 7 and position it in an accessible location Take off the top cover by removing the four black screws two on each side and lifting the cover starting at the back of the transport The slider brackets do not need to be removed Reconnect the transport using the transport extender cable TRXTNDR and a spare power cable Connect the EQOUT test port on the DRD board to oscilloscope CH1 Connect the FSYNC test port on the Formatter board to oscilloscope CH2 SMB to BNC converters will likely be required insert carefully Set os cilloscope CH1 to 50 ohm coupling 2ms div
129. PENDIX D D 2 5 Similar Terminals If there are two very similar terminals one can be defined as being just like the other with certain exceptions The string capability tc can be given with the name of the simi lar terminal This capability must be last and the com bined length of the entries must not exceed 1024 The capa bilities given before tc override those in the terminal type invoked by tc A capability can be canceled by placing xx to the left of the tc invocation where xx is the capabil ity For example the entry hnl2621 nl ks 9 ke tc 2621 defines a 2621 nl that does not have the ks or ke capabili ties hence does not turn on the function key labels when in visual mode This is useful for different modes fora ter minal or for different user preferences D 3 Capabilities The characters in the Notes field in the next table have the following meanings more than one may apply to a capabil ity N indicates numeric parameter s P indicates that padding may be specified indicates that padding may be based on the number of lines affected o indicates capability is obsolete Obsolete capabilities have no terminfo equivalents since they were considered useless or are subsumed by other capa bilities New software should not rely on them Name Notes Description 11 str sent by shifted save key 12 str sent by shifted suspend key 13 str sent by shifted undo key 1 str sent by shifted help key
130. RONOUS TV amp 3 Figure B 1 C1 C2 Test Vector Generator Logical Circuit TVG2 GENERATOR TVG1 VECTOR TEST CLOCK S2 PT User s Manual APPENDIX B TEST VECTOR DATA 16 Mb s TVG1 TVG2 TV63 DATA 16 Mb s 8 Mb s DATA 4 Mb s ru nA S CLK REC 32 MHz 4 4 4 e 1Hz REC TIMING SPECIFICATIONS PARAMETER VALUE ts Data S lHz to S CLK setup time es 15 6 5 ns ty 5 01 pulse width high w cscvevveee 15 6 5 ns t 5 01 to data S 1Hz hold time 15 6 5 ns h NOTE Measurements made on cable C1 at UI receptor connector Pl with ECL terminations Figure B 2 C1 Input Timing Interface 32 MHz clk DATA MS NODE CLE REC 32 Miz i i i i i i i i DATA 15 Mb s Eolo c CLK REC 16 Mz i i 1011 3201 a REFERENCE HOE S CLK_REC B MHz DATA 4 Mb s 4 s CLK REC 4 MHz 1Hz REC k NOTE All active positive clock edges to occur at data and lHz mid cell 5 ns Figure B 3 C1 Input Timing Interface clk data rate 11 S2 PT User s Manual APPENDIX B TEST VECTOR DATA 16 Mb s TVG1 Tv82 TV amp 3 DATA or VALIDITY 16 Mb s
131. S2 can also be in structed to automatically station delay mismatches by setting the defaults file parameter scpllrefclkfix to 1 In this case any station delay mismatch that arises while in SC PLL refclk mode and remains stable for 2 seconds will be auto 52 User s Manual OPERATION DSCM TRANSPORTS FORM FORM TVG Digital direct hookup Analog direct hookup Transport bypass Transport record Transport play FORM TVR Data lt DEF home s2 doc userman workindg dwa diaa xpic Figure 4 5 S2 Diagnostic Loopback Paths matically corrected by re asserting the last entered station delay setting The in formational status message STAT DELAYFIX will appear giving a count of the total number of such station delay auto resets since the last status reset Be ware that this momentarily disturbs the entire system timing and may cause a significant glitch during both recording and playback resulting in loss of several seconds of data Users should decide whether station delay mismatches should be corrected at record time with the possibility of glitching or simply logged and then corrected at correlation playback time To make it easier to establish later what the actual station delay was at record time the delay measurement is con tinuously recorded in the tape auxiliary data channel and
132. SP_ERR ERR_NONE 5 0 sec mk3 form enableldisable Turns the S2 internal Mk3 format generator on and off When turned on the C2a cable output switches to Mk3 compatible mode MK3 FORM READ 51 none RESP MK3 FORM 0 5 sec mk3 form Reads the current Mark III formatter enable disable state as set with MK3 FORM SET TRANSPORT TIMES 55 none RESP TRANSPORT TIMES 0 5 sec transport status time For all transports reads the total power on time since manufacture total head use time since manufacture time since last head replacement head use and time since last service in service The head use and in service times give the amount of active head use since the last head replacement or service op eration was performed respectively as entered using the transport N service console command The reply includes TCP serial numbers for iden tification See RESP TRANSPORT TIMES for more information STATION INFO READ 60 52 User s Manual Data Expected Resp Timer Duration Eq Console Cmd Description 70 Command Msg Code Data Expected Resp Timer Duration Eq Console Cmd Description 71 Command Msg Code Data Expected Resp Timer Duration Eq Console Cmd Description 80 Command Msg Code Data Expected Resp Timer Duration APPENDIX A none RESP STATION INFO 0 5 sec station serial Reads information which identifies the S2 system including its station num ber
133. T User s Manual MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING 6 4 6 Transport Tape Guide Adjustment Poor transport performance as shown by high estimated error rates or error rates above spec in the post installation record playback test Section 2 8 may indicate that the transport P2 and P3 tape guide posts require adjustment In particular this adjustment has sometimes been found necessary following shipment of S2 systems Required Tools The tools required to perform tape guide adjustment are supplied as part of the Transport Tape Guide Adjustment Kit They are also part of the larger Transport Servicing Kit The required tools are as follows e Post adjustment screwdriver Matsushita Panasonic part VFK0329 e Transport C3C4 C5 extender cable TRXTNDR e SMB to BNC converters 2 e Matsushita Panasonic NTSC alignment tape part VFM8080HQFP e S2 alignment tape best tape recorded during post installation test not supplied see below Basic Steps Stripped to its essentials the procedure is described by the following sequence Detailed instructions are given later below A Measure baseline performance using the 52 alignment tape Record the baseline data re ported by the S2 console display B Adjust the tape guide posts using an oscilloscope and the Matsushita Panasonic NTSC align ment tape The guide posts are adjusted by determining the adjustment range which pro duces an acceptable waveform and setting each post to the mid point of th
134. T hours 0 23 byte7 tape UT minutes 0 59 byte8 tape UT seconds 0 59 byte9 byte12 tape UT ns 0 999999999 byte9 MSB 32 bit unsigned integer 0x01 relative alignment byte2 sign 52 User s Manual Expected Resp Timer Duration Eq Console Cmd Description APPENDIX A 0 positive forward in time 1 negative backward in time byte3 hours 0 23 byte4 minutes 0 59 byte5 seconds 0 59 byte6 byte9 nanoseconds 0 999999999 byte6 MSB 32 bit unsigned integer 0x02 re align Re align to latest alignment reference time no additional data bytes 0x03 self align Align the transports to each other using the earliest latest or middle tape time as the reference as per the selfaligntarg defaults file option no additional data bytes total data bytes 12 max RESP ERR ERR NONE 0 5 sec align l NN NN NN NNNNNNNNN This is used during automatic playback to align tapes to an absolute time or by some relative amount It works by slewing the transports and if neces sary adjusting the station delay setting Alignment is normally done after po sitioning is complete Unlike positioning tape alignment is a precise operation accurate down to the bit alignment times are rounded off to the nearest bit sample time at the current user channel data rate Any ALIGN command where the nanoseconds portion is non zero implicitly per forms a relative station delay adjustment in
135. TIME includes both the playback tape time and tape position for a particular transport When test tapes are recorded in such a way that the tape time matches the tape position this can be used to determine cumula tive position sensing errors The response from the S2 recorder is sent imme diately unlike TIME READ PB where the response is synchronized to the 1 Hz tick If the playback tape time is unknown or invalid the year day hour min sec and frame fields will all be 0 If the transport position is unknown position will be 0x80000000 STATUS generic 80 none RESP STATUS 0 5 sec 52 User s Manual APPENDIX A Eq Console Cmd displayed on console screen Description Reads the S2 recorder brief status report The brief report includes only numeric status codes no text messages For a detailed description of all status codes see Section 4 5 This command should be sent approximately every 1 to 5 seconds since status conditions accumulate in between reads and will come out all at once on the next read Status entries are returned in order of severity from most to least severe which means in order of increasing status code number not in order of occurrence Reading S2 status with the RCL STATUS command causes all clear on read status entries to be cleared for the RCL similar to typing status reset on the console for the console status These entries will not appear in the next STATUS request u
136. TPMOTFAIL Type Fatal error clear on read Console Msg Tran nnn tape motion fail Interpretation A transport has detected that the tape motion state is not as required via a sensor on the takeup reel The transport automatically issues a stop command to itself without affecting other transports to return to a consistent state This situation can arise when a transport fails to respond to a tape motion command missed remote control code or if the tape jams or there is some mechanical failure There can be a delay of up to 30 seconds before the transport recognizes a tape motion failure For example suppose a rewind command is issued for all 8 trans ports but one of them transport 2 fails to respond due to a missed remote control code Initially the console display for transport 2 will indicate that it is rewinding although it is in fact stopped having never physically started rewinding After approximately 30 seconds a tape motion fail status message will appear and trans port 2 will be instructed to stop after which the display will correctly show that it is stopped Users should react to the 5 condition by stopping the current operation and restarting it from the beginning Repeated oc currences of STAT_TRANTPMOTFAIL indicate a tape jam or hardware failure within the transport In the rare event that a transport repeatedly stops on erroneous tape motion fail conditions yet appears to be worki
137. The nickname is stored in the system defaults file and can be set using the station command or by editing the defaults file edit defaults This space will be blank if no nickname is defined Top line right The system time This is the current reference time written on tape during record The time is synchronized to the S 1 C 1 Hz sync input SIHZ REC on cable or C1HZ on C2a cable possibly with a delay offset see Station delay below Time is usually set to UTC using the time command The display format is YYYY DDD HH MM SS where YYYY is the year DDD is the day number 1 365 366 for leap years and HH MM SS is the 24 hour time The display will be highlighted in the event of a severe failure of S2 internal system timing and the clock will stop There is a very short delay between the actual 1 Hz tick and the screen time display update but it should be short enough so as not to cause problems Most other display parameters have a somewhat longer delay 1 4 of a second or less since it s not possible to update everything on the screen at the same time Recorder mode This shows the current S2 channelization mode also called recorder mode or ob serving mode The mode determines the user data rate and the number of active user data channels and is set using the mode command If the barrel roller is on is shown beside the mode Station delay Shows the amount of clock offset between the externally supplie
138. Trigger on CH2 rising edge also 50 ohm coupled If 50 ohm couplers are not available regular high impedance inputs may be used A special alignment tool is required to adjust the tape guide posts Matsushita Panasonic part VFK0329 In a pinch a flat screwdriver can be modified for the task by filing or grinding a notch into the middle of the blade and reducing the screwdriver blade thickness as required to fit the guide posts The two posts which move wrapping the tape around the head drum when the tape is played are designated P2 and P3 The P2 Cylinder post is the one on the supply reel side P3 is on the takeup reel side see Figure 6 3 In general prob takeup reel lems at the beginning of a frame are corrected by ad supply reel justing P2 while end of frame problems are corrected by adjusting P3 Figure 6 3 Location of Guide Posts Using some kind of ink pen place one dot on the perimeter of each tape guide post to serve as a reference S2 PT User s Manual MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING Figure 6 4 Proper tape guide adjustment Figure 6 5 End of frame distortion example1 Figure 6 6 End of frame distortion example2 Figure 6 7 Beginning of frame distortion example Procedure 1 Place the NTSC alignment tape Matsushita Panasonic partit VFM8080HQFP in the transport and rewind it The portion of tape which is relevant to this adjustment is the first section Interchange Note that this
139. USE 05 none RESP_ERR ERR_NONE 1 5 sec pause Puts the S2 recorder into play pause or record pause state Recorder must cur rently be recording or playing and must not be aligning or positioning This differs from STOP in that PAUSE is sometimes able to re enter play or re cord more quickly Unlike STOP time spent in PAUSE counts against head lifetime To prevent excessive head and tape wear the recorder automatically stops after pausing for more than about 3 minutes For normal record or play back operation PAUSE provides no significant benefits and should not be used use STOP instead UNPAUSE 06 none RESP_ERR ERR_NONE 1 5 sec 52 User s Manual Eq Console Cmd Description 7 Command Msg Code Data Expected Resp Timer Duration Eq Console Cmd Description 8 Command Msg Code Data Expected Resp Timer Duration Eq Console Cmd Description 9 Command Msg Code Data Expected Resp Timer Duration Eq Console Cmd Description 10 Timer Duration Eq Console Cmd Description Command Msg Code Data Expected Resp APPENDIX A unpause Un pauses the S2 recorder after a PAUSE command and resumes playback or re cording as the case may be The recorder must currently be in play pause or re cord pause state EJECT 07 none RESP ERR ERR NONE 1 5 sec eject Ejects the tapes from all currently selected transports Stops the S2 recorder
140. User s Manual OPERATION This does not indicate the absence or presence of user supplied clock signals see STAT NOREFIHZ 18 Mnemonic STAT TASKFAIL Type Fatal error Console Msg Task not running Interpretation One or more required ROS software tasks are not running A task may die if it encounters a severe error condition or detects an internal inconsistency resulting in this message The S2 system should be rebooted by cycling the power or pressing the RCC reset button 19 Mnemonic STAT TRANSWFAIL Type Fatal error Console Msg Tran nnn s w fail xxx Interpretation One or more transport internal processors have detected a software related failure The possible types of failure are as follows EEPROM chksum bad The transport internal EEPROM has been corrupted This contains the TCP program code and TCB Xilinx configuration plus calibration parameters and service history information The transport must be completely re programmed using transport N program stack overflow The transport software stack has grown past a predefined limit This indicates a software bug and should be reported to CRESTech The transport may continue to operate normally since there is a built in safety margin before the stack actually overflows speed set fail The transport could not set its speed or sense the correct speed This indicates a probable hardware failure in the speed sensing circuitry 20 Mnemonic STAT TRAN
141. Validity ECL 9 DV OUT 6 S2 Output Data Validity ECL 10 DV OUT 6 S2 Output Data Validity ECL 11 GND Ground 12 GND Ground 13 DV OUT 8 S2 Output Data Validity ECL 14 DV OUT 8 S2 Output Data Validity ECL 15 DV OUT 10 S2 Output Data Validity ECL 16 DV OUT 10 S2 Output Data Validity ECL 17 DV OUT 12 S2 Output Data Validity ECL 18 DV OUT 12 S2 Output Data Validity ECL 19 DV OUT 14 S2 Output Data Validity ECL 20 DV OUT 14 S2 Output Data Validity ECL a C2b SIGNAL NAME vo DESCRIPTION 1 GND Ground 2 GND Ground 3 DV OUT 1 S2 Output Data Validity ECL 4 DV OUT 1 S2 Output Data Validity ECL 5 DV OUT 3 S2 Output Data Validity ECL 6 DV OUT 3 S2 Output Data Validity ECL 7 DV OUT 5 S2 Output Data Validity ECL 8 DV OUT 5 S2 Output Data Validity ECL 9 DV OUT 7 S2 Output Data Validity ECL 10 DV OUT 7 S2 Output Data Validity ECL 11 GND Ground 12 GND Ground 13 DV OUT 9 S2 Output Data Validity ECL 14 DV OUT 9 S2 Output Data Validity ECL 15 DV OUT 11 S2 Output Data Validity ECL 16 DV OUT 11 S2 Output Data Validity ECL 17 DV OUT 13 S2 Output Data Validity ECL 18 DV OUT 13 S2 Output Data Validity ECL 19 DV OUT 15 S2 Output Data Validity ECL 20 DV OUT 15 S2 Output Data Validity ECL b C2c Table B 3 S2 C2b c Output Cable Signal Assignments APPENDIX B S2 PT User s Manual APPENDIX B
142. WFAIL Fatal error ROS s w failure reason follows The Recorder Operating System software is operating incorrectly This is a general OK FAIL indicator for the S2 software and is a summary of other status conditions which appear later in the display STAT SRAMCHKSUM Fatal error SRAM board bad checksum One or more partitions of the 3 MB SRAM board have become corrupted and are failing a checksum comparison test Try rebooting the S2 system to see the results of similar checksum tests performed during bootup The corrupted partition or the entire 3 MB SRAM probably needs to be reloaded See Section 6 2 for information on how to re load a corrupted SRAM STAT_NOSRSYR Fatal error 64 Hz frame sync is absent The Formatter 64 Hz frame sync signal SRSYR which normally drives most of the S2 internal hardware and software is absent This is a severe internal timing fault and causes the 52 system clock to stop It can be caused by a failure of the timing or interrupt generation circuitry on the Formatter board or a failure of the System Clock PLL on the UI board This does not indicate the absence or presence of user supplied clock signals see STAT_NOREFCLK and STAT NOREFIHZ STAT NOFGI Fatal error System 1 Hz tick is absent The Formatter 1 Hz reference tick FG1 is absent This is a severe internal timing fault It can be caused by a failure of the timing circuitry on the Formatter board 52
143. a ECL 44 SCLK REC E lass 20 IN 7 S2 Input Data ECL 45 GND Ground 21 GND Ground 46 GND Ground 22 GND Ground 47 S1HZ REC Input 1Hz Reference ECL 23 IN8 S2 Input Data ECL 48 S1HZ REC Input 1Hz Reference ECL 24 IN 8 l S2 Input Data ECL 49 GND Ground 25 INQ l S2 Input Data ECL 50 GND Ground Table B 1 C1 Input Cable Signal Assignments S2 PT User s Manual SIGNAL NAME Vo DESCRIPTION 1 GND Ground 2 GND Ground 3 OUT 0 S2 Output Data ECL 4 OUT 0 S2 Output Data ECL 5 OUT 1 S2 Output Data ECL 6 OUT 1 S2 Output Data ECL 7 OUT 2 S2 Output Data ECL 8 OUT 2 S2 Output Data ECL 9 OUT 3 S2 Output Data ECL 10 OUT 3 S2 Output Data ECL 11 OUT 4 S2 Output Data ECL 12 OUT 4 S2 Output Data ECL 13 OUT 5 S2 Output Data ECL 14 OUT 5 S2 Output Data ECL 15 OUT 6 S2 Output Data ECL 16 OUT 6 S2 Output Data ECL 17 SCLK PB Playback Sample 32 MHz Clock ECL 18 SCLK PB Playback Sample 32 MHz Clock ECL 19 OUT 7 S2 Output Data ECL 20 OUT 7 S2 Output Data ECL 21 OUT 8 S2 Output Data ECL 22 OUT 8 S2 Output Data ECL 23 OUT 9 S2 Output Data ECL 24 OUT 9 S
144. a full screen editor similar to Unix vi for online help type help while in the editor In the event that your terminal type is not set correctly it may be difficult or impossible to edit In this case use the console term command to set the correct terminal type before editing Command eject Syntax eject Description Ejects the tapes from all currently selected transports Stops the S2 first if it is not already stopped The S2 must not be recording or record paused Another way to eject all the tapes is to press and hold any transport s eject button for two seconds or more This feature may be convenient if the console terminal is not located near the TAM racks or the S2 is under computer RCL control Eject all should preferably be used only when all transports are stopped No other transport front panel buttons or switches should be touched The ejectalldisable defaults file option can be used the disable the eject all feature Command encrypt Syntax encrypt STR lt passwd gt Description This command encodes a password to be used when connecting to the console using rlogin or telnet Type the desired password and the encrypted version of the password will be displayed Then enter the encrypted string as the value of the loginpasswd parameter in the defaults file Along with loginuserid this defines the user ID and password that must be entered when connecting via rlogin or telnet Command error Syntax error decode NUM lt e
145. acquired in SC PLL 1hz and errmes modes If the SC PLL mode is refclk check the input clock frequency selection userio clkin and ensure that the external clock signal conforms to S2 interface specifications given in Ap pendix B If problems persist there may be a fault in the System Clock PLL hard ware on the UI board If the SC PLL mode is xtal there may be a problem with the UI on board 32 MHz crystal oscillator 52 User s Manual OPERATION 39 Mnemonic STAT SCPLLSLIP Type Error clear on read Console Msg System clk PLL sync errors nnn Interpretation Indicates that the System Clock PLL is not locked or is having difficulty locking to its reference Occurrence of this message is normal when lock is first being acquired particularly in SC PLL 1hz and errmes modes Continuous sync errors mean the SC PLL is unlocked and will activate the STAT SCPLLUNLOCEK status message If the SC PLL mode is refclk ensure that the external clock signal con forms to S2 interface specifications given in Appendix B If problems persist there may be a fault in the System Clock PLL hardware on the UI board If the SC PLL mode is xtal there may be a problem with the UI on board 32 MHz crystal os cillator In SC PLL 1hz mode the SC PLL is considered unlocked whenever the dif ference between the external and internal 1 Hz ticks is more than about about 60 microseconds from its intended value This is equivalent to the difference be tween th
146. agnostic loopback path and will usually be 100 0096 Be cause it has only one decoder an S2 RT may take between 8 and 90 sec onds to build up a complete data valid list when first starting playback or record Until then entries are considered unknown and appear as empty strings The same is true when recording on a PT because there is only one diagnostic path but not during playback This also means that at any time in dividual values might be up to 90 seconds old In addition certain status con ditions can interfere with automatic playback record scanning and prevent 90 data valid from being computed or cause it to stop being updated Remem 52 User s Manual 42 Expected Resp Timer Duration Eq Console Cmd Description 43 Timer Duration Eq Console Cmd Description 44 Expected Resp Timer Duration Eq Console Cmd Description Command Msg Code Data Command Msg Code Data Expected Resp Command Msg Code Data APPENDIX A ber that data valid is calculated for internal recorder channels and does not apply directly to user data channels unless the user data rate is 16 Mbits s e g mode 16x8 1 The 96 data valid values are for operator refer ence only and do not by themselves indicate correct system functionality sys tem status is used for that SCPLL MODE SET 42 bytel SC PLL mode code 0x00 xtal 0x01 manual 0x02 refclk 0x03 1hz 0x04 errmes total data bytes
147. al for installation operation maintenance and servicing of the system This manual is for S2 PT systems which use an MVMEI33XT Recorder Control Computer board Please note the version number on the front cover This manual is accurate only for S2 PT systems running the matching Recorder Operating System ROS software version number To check which software version you are using type version at the S2 console For systems running older software lower version numbers you should use the appropriate older User s Manual or upgrade the software For systems running newer software higher version numbers you should check to see if a newer version of the User s Manual has been issued by CRESTech SGL If not refer to the release notes for the software version you are using they will contain documentation on additional features If you have any problems or questions related to the S2 please call CRESTech SGL in Canada at 416 665 5470 or send email to s2support sgl crestech ca We can be found on the World Wide Web at hitp Avww sgl crestech ca Up to date versions of this User s Manual are available at fip ftp sgl crestech ca pub s2 doc userman for all four 2 system combinations S2 RT amp 162 CPU S2 PT amp 162 CPU S2 RT amp 133XT CPU S2 PT amp 133XT CPU Note that the the name CRESTech was formerly ISTS Institute for Space and Terrestrial Science until it was changed in late 1997 1 2 S2 Physical Description The S2 consists of
148. ally 0 skipselftest 0 RCL baud rate normally 19200 max 57600 rclbaud 19200 This 5258 RCL address 0 253 Use 0 unless connecting multiple RCL devices using RS485 Address is ignored during RCL connection via network sockets rcladdr 0 Mark III hardware ID code identifies recording station in Mark III header Two hex digits FF not allowed mk3hwid 52 Backspace character for VxWorks shell ASCII code normally 8 or 127 backspace 127 The following parameter supplies stevie vi editor startup options Use nobackup to prevent use of backups recommended when editing large files remaining SRAM partition space e g termcap file exinit set nobackup showmode The following parameters are used for network operation only 52 User s Manual APPENDIX C Lock the console against access by rlogin and telnet 1 or allow access as usual 0 As a special case 2 allows access during the boot sequence but not after ROS starts running consolelock 0 Lock the RCL against access by network sockets 1 or allow access as usual 0 rcllock 2 0 During bootup set system time from remote network host using RDATE protocol 1 or from built in battery backed up clock 0 normally 0 remtime 0 Internet name or address of host to use for network time setting If omitted or blank will use host name and inet address from boot parameters Host names entered here mus
149. ally loads the standard programming module and then loads all ag25x0 In the event that the EEPROM is corrupted a transport may appear dead will not beep and set its front panel address display a few seconds after power on making it impossible to issue the transport program command to repair the damage In this case it is sometimes possible to recover using a special emergency re covery feature Hold the eject button on the front panel while applying power to the transport This will force it into program mode standard programming mod ule after which you should use transport N program all ag25x0 You will get a warning assuming transport already in program mode but this is normal The position option is a low level version of the position command and should not normally be used However it does support the position preset feature which is intentionally left out of the regular position command Normally position preset will be done via the RCL The tracking option can be used to manually adjust the tracking control on the transports Each integer tracking unit is equivalent to pressing a tracking button once Tracking adjustments are always relative but the absolute range is approximately 50 to 50 Use the recalibrate sub option to trigger automatic tracking calibration There are two automatic tracking algorithms phase 1 is per formed by the transport green DIGITAL TRACKING light flashes if present and phase 2 is performed by
150. alue around the current tape time If the tapes are playing but not sufficiently aligned so that all user DV flags are the same response RESP ERR with er ror code ERR INPBAUX will be returned It is not usually necessary to read the user DV flag at playback since the S2 will automatically set the hard ware data validity signals accordingly combined with other sources of play back data validity If the playback DV enable flag is set to FALSE the playback user DV flag will not be used as a factor in determining data valid ity GROUP SET 26 bytel transport group number 0 7 total data bytes 1 RESP ERR ERR NONE 1 5 sec group NUM Selects which group of transports should be used in modes that don t require all 8 transports There can be from 1 to 8 different groups depending on the total data rate of the current mode Groups are numbered starting at 0 For example in mode 16x2 1 there are 4 groups numbered 0 to 3 Transports 0 1 are group 0 transports 2 3 are group 1 and so on The GROUP SET command is not allowed to change the group number during automatic play back or record the S2 must be stopped and then restarted to change groups GROUP SET is typically used following a MODE SET command GROUP READ 27 none RESP GROUP 0 5 sec group Reads the current transport group number 0 7 as set using GROUP SET The reply also includes the total number of groups available 1 8 since this changes depen
151. an be used to manually re execute the power on self test type diag selfl verbose Without the verbose op tion diagnostic sequences display a formal diagnostic result message single fault only With verbose different output is produced that is more suitable for in teractive use Most diagnostic sequences are not allowed during automatic record or playback All of the sequences except dcbias and mk3sync run as part of the power on self test The syncaux test checks for the presence of sync and auxiliary data in all channels of the current diagnostic loopback path It tests internal 16 Mbit s data channels not user data channels and works in any of the following setups dhook ahook bypass record In paths that go through the transports channels for which the transport is not currently selected are not tested This test is roughly equivalent to manually entering setup N and group M for each available channel and group and checking the Diag dec time and Diag dec sync displays The formberc test uses the Formatter diagnostic test vector form diag mode and bit error counter to check that all channels of the current diagnostic loopback path contain near perfect data It tests internal 16 Mbit s data channels not user channels and works in any of the following setups dhook ahook bypass record In paths that go through the transports channels for which the transport is not currently selected are not tested This test assumes that
152. an then use the align command to adjust the overall tape alignment and synchronize two or more playback terminals For example align 00 01 27 0893017 will move the tapes backward in time by 1 minute 27 seconds and 89 3017 milliseconds Alignment times can also be given in absolute terms see the align command on page 4 29 Handling Bad or Lost Tapes tapes In the event that one or more tapes in a set is lost or damaged or was never recorded due to a failure at record time users may still wish to play back the remaining good tapes In this situation the following procedure should be used 1 Insert the available tapes 2 Setthe correct mode amp group as if the bad missing tape s were present 3 Type transport autoselect N where 15 the transport corresponding to the bad missing tape This de selects that transport If more than one tape is missing you can specify additional transport numbers with minus signs Note that there is no RCL equivalent for this command but RCL users can still enter it using CONSOLECMD 4 Perform positioning and playback as usual You will get the following fatal status messages which may be ignored STAT BADTRANSEL Bad transport selection for mode group STAT CHIDMISS Tape with channel ID N is missing 5 When done restore the normal transport selection by resetting the group number with the group command The effect of a missing tape depends on whether barrel roll was on or off at recor
153. and is shown in brackets beside the measurement 90 DV is computed not only during playback but also during record where the decoders are fed with diagnostic loopback data and thus the percentage of valid data will usually be 100 When recording there is only one active diagnostic signal path so the DV represents only one internal data channel of 16 Mbits s however the automatic record monitor continuously scans active transports for complete diagnostic coverage To see individual channel DV measurements type transport display dv The 96 DV measurement normally recognizes the user DV flag so it will drop to zero whenever user DV is set to false user dv no Type user dv playback disable to ignore the user DV flag Decoder Xbar This shows the current mapping of decoder outputs onto S2 internal data channels In general there are up to 8 decoders in an S2 system Each decoder input is physically connected to a particular transport The crossbar switch at the decoder outputs allows tapes to be inserted in any order and allows switching between different groups of transports during playback Setting of the crossbar is normally totally automatic so the display is for reference only The crossbar setting is rep resented by an 8 digit string where each digit position represents an internal data channel from 0 to 7 The value of the digit in a particular position indicates which decoder transport is outputting on that channel x indicates no ou
154. ansports beep several times and refuse to go into record model AG2520 or AG2530 transports or the transport tape display flashes and they refuse to go into record model AG2550 transports A The write protect tab on the edge of the tapes is broken off See the record command on Page 4 43 2 Q The AG2520 transports make unexpected clicking noises after they have been stopped for about 5 minutes A Don t worry this is just the sound of the tapes automatically unwrapping It is normal 3 Q The system reports spurious interrupt errors after adding or removing the Ethernet board A The IACK backplane jumper for the Ethernet board s VME slot slot 2 must be put in place when the Ethernet board is removed and taken out when the board is inserted See Section 4 4 4 Q One or more transports are off and refuse to tum on A The transports automatically shut off when the internal temperature is above 60 or below 5 degrees Celsius They can also shut down if excessive internal condensation is detected In this case the console display will show off for the affected transports First unplug the transport power cords and wait for conditions to stabilize If a transport still refuses to tum on it could be that the temperature calibration factor has been corrupted and needs to be re entered see Section 6 4 5 If this is not the problem or the transport appears dead shows on the console display the transport EEPROM could be c
155. ansports for com plete diagnostic coverage Even in an 52 with 8 decoders there is only one diagnostic signal path because of other hardware and software design factors The decoder in the current diagnostic signal path is referred to as the diagnostic de coder or diagnostic DRD The setup also controls whether the system timing is set for playback or record Playback timing is used when playback data from the transports is being decoded play and record timing is used at all other times bypass record ahook dhook The setup used when the S2 is stopped or re winding etc is known as the stop setup and is treated specially in that it is variable The stop setup is normally bypass on an S2 RT and play on an S2 PT This ensures that the system timing does not get disturbed unnecessarily when going between play record and stop which may be desirable if external systems are locked to the output 1 Hz tick Configuration This term refers to all other hardware switch settings and most software switch settings besides setup 52 User s Manual OPERATION Error All commands and actions have an associated error return code which describes the success or failure of the particular operation Error codes are negative numbers in the range 1 to 128 each associated with a mnemonic and a one line text description Normally only the text description is shown but in certain cases where there is not enough room to display
156. anual sf sg SO Sr st ta tc te ti ts uc ue ug ul up us vb ve vi vs vt ws xb xn XO xr xs xt XX str P num str str P str str P str str str str N str str num bool str str str str str str num str N num bool bool bool bool bool bool bool APPENDIX D scroll text up of garbage chars left by so or se default 0 begin standout mode scroll text down set a tab stop in all rows current column move cursor to next 8 position hardware tab entry of similar terminal must be last string to end programs that use termcap string to begin programs that use termcap go to status line column n underscore one character and move past it end underscore mode of garbage chars left by us or ue default 0 underline character overstrikes upline cursor up start underscore mode visible bell must not move cursor make cursor appear normal undo vs vi make cursor invisible make cursor very visible virtual terminal number set curr window to line i thru j col m thru n number of columns in status line Beehive f1 ESC f2 C NEWLINE ignored after 80 cols Concept terminal uses xoff xon handshaking RETURN acts like ce cr nl Delta Data standout not erased by overwriting HP TAB chars destructive magic so char Teleray Tektronix 4025 insert line 52 User s Manual ADC AGC BOT BYP CRC DAC DEF DHOOK DR
157. anual INSTALLATION TO EXTERNAL CONTROL 6 REL 5 101 e Ire COMPUTER 1 1 3 0 3 pa 1 RCL TEL e TO TERMINAL RCC Es FORN 4 0 3 F lu SRAM 0 1 DROO TO ETHERNET 1 TRANSPORTS 0 3 optional optional DRDI can
158. are monitors active transports and scans for abnormal conditions Anything un usual is reported in the console Status window Some of the diagnostic checks include Playback sync and auxiliary data valid including tape time Tape alignment maintained automatically re align if alignment lost Auxiliary data consistent no missing duplicate channel IDs Current mode matches mode at record time if not switch Current barrel roll setting matches record setting if not switch As indicated by the last two items above during playback the correct mode and barrel roll settings are selected automatically In special circumstances it may be desirable to play back using a mode that is different from the mode used at record time The playmodemap defaults file parameter provides this capability with the restriction that both the original and the new playback mode must have the same total data rate The manual option suppresses most of the regular playback monitoring and scanning including automatic actions such as tape alignment and mode setting It is useful to manually examine particular playback channels but should not be used for regular operation Note When automatic playback first starts one of the first steps is to scan all transports for auxiliary data If for any reason auxiliary data cannot be obtained from one or more transports automatic tape alignment will not be attempted To force tape alignment issue a manual alig
159. ari able TERM would normally be set The last name should fully identify the terminal s make and model other names are taken as synonyms for the initial terminal name All names but the first and last should be in lower case and contain no blanks the last name may well contain upper case and blanks for added readability Terminal names except for the last verbose entry should be chosen using the following conventions The particular piece of hardware making up the terminal should have a root name chosen for example for the Hewlett Packard 2621 hp2621 This name should not con tain hyphens Modes that the hardware can be in or user preferences should be indicated by appending a hyphen and an indica tor of the mode Thus a vt100 in 132 column mode would be given as vt100 w The following suffixes should be used where possible Suffix Meaning Example W wide mode more than 80 columns vt100 w am with automatic margins usually default vt100 am nam without automatic margins vt100 nam n number of lines on the screen aaa 60 na no arrow keys leave them in local concept100 na 52 User s Manual APPENDIX D np number of pages of memory concept100 4p rV reverse video concept100 rv Terminal entries may continue onto multiple lines by giving a as the last character of a line and empty fields may be included for readability here between the last field on a line and the first field on the next Comments
160. as hours minutes seconds of recorded data since BOT e g 5 47 29 format 1 Tape positions may also be displayed as an integer number of seconds e g 20849 format 2 Note that console commands such as position always accept both position formats posdisformat 1 Mapping for mode selection on playback This is used in special situations where the mode selected on playback should be different from the mode used at record time Give pairs of modes in brackets maximum 230 characters total Both modes in a pair must have the same total data rate e g 16x8 1 1618 1 8x16 1 8116 1 playmodemap Default setting for per transport write current offset option switch as set by the transport options wrlevoffset console command offset set by transport wrlevoffset command 0 means disable per transport write current offsets at bootup 1 means enable per transport write current offsets at bootup default means enable offsets at bootup for AG2550 and later transports only wrlevoffoption 1 Disable the eject all feature 1 or eject all tapes as usual when any transport eject button is held longer than 2 seconds 0 normally 0 ejectalldisable 0 Disable the console reboot key 1 or reboot the 52 software and hardware as usual when cntl _ control underscore is typed 0 normally 0 rebootkeydisable 0 Skip self test 1 at bootup 1 or run the self test as usual 0 norm
161. at record time to label the tapes with the correct hardware ID even though the Mark III formatter itself may be off so that the correct hardware ID gets used at playback The default hardware ID is 52 for 552 but may be set as desired in the system defaults file When finished use mk3 form disable to turn off the Mark III formatter and return to regular S2 operation The remaining command options are for low level diagnostic use The dcbias 52 User s Manual OPERATION and dataextract options are similar to the same options of the uic command except they examine formatted Mark data The errinduce option is useful when testing the interface to external Mark equipment such as a correlator or decoder A given number of consecutive frames with sync word or CRC errors can be introduced starting at a particular frame number With errinduce sync the usual Mark III sync word Oxffffffff is replaced by the invalid sync word 0x55555555 and with errinduce crc the 12 bit CRC field is replaced by an invalid CRC value Note that the S2 also invalidates the Mark III CRC field during playback whenever the auxiliary data extracted from S2 tapes is invalid Command mode Syntax mode 82x4 1 4x4 2 c1test16 c2test8 diag4 Description Sets the S2 recorder mode which controls the user data channelization and bit rate sample rate The S2 supports up to 16 channels of user data at 4 8 16 or 32 Mbits s with a maximum total data
162. attribute turn on bold extra bright attribute turn off all attributes turn on half bright attribute safe to move while in insert mode turn on blank attribute characters invisible memory lock on above cursor turn on meta mode 8th bit turn off meta mode turn on protected attribute turn on reverse video attribute safe to move in standout modes memory unlock turn off memory lock no correctly working cr Datamedia 2500 non destructive space cursor right NEWLINE character if not terminal is a CRT but does not scroll NEWLINE behaves like cr followed by do padding will not work xoff xon required terminal overstrikes turn on the printer for n bytes lowest baud where delays are required pad character default NUL turn off the printer function key n to type string s terminfo only function key n to exec string s terminfo only label n to show string s terminfo only turn on the printer print contents of the screen has hardware tabs may need to be set with is function key n to transmit string s terminfo reset terminal to sane modes terminfo only reset terminal to sane modes terminfo only reset terminal to sane modes terminfo only like ip but when in replace mode restore cursor to position of last sc name of file containing reset string unkown at present repeat character c n times reset terminal completely to sane modes define the video attributes 9 parameters save cursor position end standout mode 52 User s M
163. ayback parameters are shown otherwise record parameters are shown The stop setup is normally bypass on an RT and play on a PT but can be changed in the defaults file or by using the setup command while the S2 is stopped Tape ID Shows the tape identifier string up to 20 characters long as set by the tapeid command User info D Shows user info field 1 The label text to the left of the colon can be changed by the user Depending on the length of the label the entire 16 character info field may not fit on the display If so it will be truncated on the right User info is set with the user info command User info 2 Shows user info field 2 similar to user info 1 User info 3 Shows user info field 3 similar to user info 1 except that the maximum length is 32 characters so this field is more likely to be truncated User info field 4 is not shown Type user info N to display any user info field in its entirety where N is from 1 to 4 User data valid Shows the setting of the user data valid flag The user DV flag is recorded on tape as part of the auxiliary data and recovered at playback time where it is used to invalidate data if false by lowering the data validity signals on the C2b c cable This facility provides a way to indicate at record time that invalid data is being recorded e g the telescope is slewing or off source see the user dv command on page 4 55 During playback the display shows what the user DV flag was se
164. be decoded for the particular frame at the moment of display XXX XX XX XX XX is shown The time dis play update is synchronized to the system internal 1 Hz tick with a very short delay between the actual 1 Hz tick and the display update Most other display parameters in particular the playback tape times in the transport window have a somewhat longer delay about l4 of a second or less Diag dec sync This shows the percentage of L2 sync achieved by the diagnostic decoder over the previous one second period It is computed by counting the number of data blocks with valid L2 sync there are 250 data blocks per frame L2 level 2 sync is acquired at the beginning of each frame upon the detection of two con secutive sync words followed by 3 consecutive block IDs The amount of sync is displayed as an integer percentage with fractions rounded down so that only perfect sync over a 1 second period will show up as 100 Remember that this value comes from a single decoder so it represents only one internal data channel of 16 Mbits s The word uncalib appears beside the percentage if data recovery calibration for the diagnostic decoder has not yet reached a sufficiently stable state where it is considered calibrated track cal during playback indicates that phase 2 tracking calibration is in progress In some cases when the system is having difficulty playing back a particular tape a special phase 1b algorithm may be triggered by ROS
165. be necessary you can use the TAPEINFO READ PB command to read the different indi vidual tape IDs If auxiliary data cannot be extracted from one or more of the tapes ERR NOPBAUX will be returned this error can be expected to oc cur during tape alignment and just after playback has started USER INFO SET 20 bytel Info field number 1 to 4 byte2 Boolean 0x00 Set field value 0x01 Set field label byte3 ASCII info field or label string terminated by a NULL 0 charac ter Avoid using unprintable characters Maximum field sizes not incl NULL are as follows Field 1 16 chars Field 2 16 chars Field 3 32 chars Field 4 48 chars Label 1 4 16 chars total data bytes length of string 3 max 51 RESP ERR ERR NONE 0 5 sec user info 1121314 STRIblankllabel STRiblank Sets the value of one of 4 user defined information fields or its label For ex ample two separate commands could set field 1 label to Source Name and field 1 to 3C273 This information is recorded continuously as part of the S2 auxiliary data which is the same for all tapes and recovered at play back time The user info format is totally up to the user as long as the over all length does not exceed the limits given above The user info fields and labels should be entered prior to the start of recording and thereafter may be changed at any time but should not be changed more often than every few seconds otherwise some user info ma
166. be used to translate the numeric error code to the full text message STAT RPMONBOTEOT Fatal error clear on read BOT EOT EOD during auto One of the active transports encountered the beginning of tape BOT or end of tape EOT during automatic record or playback The S2 has automatically stopped the remaining transports This message will also appear when a transport encounters the end of recorded data EOD during playback tape alignment EOD 18 defined as approximately 30 seconds or more of blank tape encountered during positioning or alignment slewing in the forward direction STAT RPMONILSTATE Fatal error clear on read Unexp tran state chg during play record The current overall tape motion state unexpectedly changed to something other than play record during automatic playback record This can happen if the transport front panel buttons are pressed or if certain commands such as pause or cue are used these commands should be avoided during automatic playback and record This message will also appear if an attempt is made to record on tapes with the write protect tabs broken since write protected tapes will be automatically ejected by the transports model AG2510 or the transports will beep 7 times and refuse to go into record models AG2520 and AG2530 52 User s Manual OPERATION 53 Mnemonic STAT TRANLKFAIL Type Fatal error Console Msg xxx servo failed to lock
167. ce Test OPERATING ENVIRONMENT OPERATION 4 1 42 Overview 4 1 Terminology Console Operation 4 2 1 Connecting the Console 4 2 2 Display Organization 4 2 3 Console Command Entry 42 3 sSOICkeyS colat xS ERREUR eH HERE 4 2 3 2 Command Editing and History lesse 4 2 3 3 Batch Files 424 Basic Procedures s 24 4 2 0064p 4 45 4228 RoE RRGGHeiG e EIER ER 4 24 Playing Back 8 4242 Recording Tapes ef tain swale pave alk os eS EI aa eases 4 2 5 System Bootup 4 256 ROS Bootuip tee a ae ee ead ee Semi as 427 ROS Configuration 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 1 2 3 2 3 2 4 2 5 2 5 2 6 2 6 2 7 2 7 2 7 2 8 2 8 2 8 2 8 3 1 52 User s Manual 43 44 4 2 8 Console Screen 4 2 8 1 4 2 8 2 4 2 8 3 4 2 8 4 4 2 8 5 4 2 8 6 4 2 8 7 Crucial Parms Window upper right Figure 4 1 Status Window middle right Figure 4 6 User Parms Window upper middle Figure 4 1 State Window middle Figure 4 1 Transport Window middle left Figure 4 1 User Window upper middle Figure 4 7
168. ch files where sleep commands of uncertain length would otherwise be required Cur rently the following options are supported stop aligndone drcal wait stop waits until the overall tape motion state changes to stop This can be used in a number of different situations e g Wait for rewinding to complete Wait for positioning to complete Wait for playback or record to hit end of tape If there are no tapes in the transports wait for user to insert tapes wait aligndone waits until tape alignment completes during automatic play successfully or not It is needed because in automatic play tape alignment happens in the background i e the alignment command returns immediately In manual play alignment commands do not retum until alignment is complete so wait aligndone is not needed but no harm is done it will just return immediately Sometimes wait aligndone may not work as desired immediately after a play command since no alignment operation has started yet it returns right away The solution is to issue an align selfalign command first wait drcal waits until the data recovery parameters of the current diagnostic transport DRD have been calibrated including phase 2 tracking if applicable In tended for use in manual play Should be avoided in automatic play record Note Use echo prompt to wait for the user to hit return 52 User s Manual OPERATION 4 3 RCL Operation The basic approach to RCL operation
169. clear on read conditions from the console status window and zeroes all miscel laneous error counters Note that status reset affects only the console status indications not the RCL status for the RCL clear on read status conditions are cleared each time status is read The pagedn and pageup options allow you to page through the status messages in case there are more than 3 of them although the most important conditions will usually be shown first As a convenience feature when running the ROSCO terminal emulator program the PgUp and PgDn keyboard keys automatically generate the commands status pageup and status pagedn Another way to show all status information is with the display option which writes all current status conditions to the interaction window or to the log with tolog Normally the long RCL version of the status messages is given but short can be specified to see the short form which is the form used in the console status window The numeric status code and mnemonic are both shown making it easy to look up the code in the status descriptions Section 4 5 By specifying fullscreen the information can occupy the entire terminal screen to get around size limitations of the interaction window This can be used to capture status information to a file if your terminal emulator has that capability e g in ROSCO press shift F9 followed by F2 to begin capturing incoming characters to a file The tolog option writes the curren
170. cted to automatically fix station delay mismatches by setting the defaults file parameter scpllrefclkfix to 1 In this case any station delay mismatch that arises and remains stable for 2 seconds will be corrected by re asserting the last entered station delay value See the station delay measurement description on page 4 18 for more information 52 User s Manual OPERATION 33 Mnemonic STAT UICVERFAIL Type Error clear on read Console Msg UI verifier errors nnn Interpretation Indicates one or more UI board verifier errors have occurred since the last status read RCL reset console In cable test mode this shows a cable connection fault During record this indicates a failure of the distributor or de distributor on the UI board Note UI verify errors are not considered fatal because continuous verifier errors activate STAT UICFAIL which is fatal 34 Mnemonic STAT SYNCERRIHZ Type Error clear on read Console Msg 1 Hz sync errors nnn Interpretation Indicates one or more internal 1 Hz sync errors have occurred since the last status read RCL reset console A 1 Hz sync error is defined as two consecutive system internal FG 1 Hz ticks that are not exactly 64 frames apart Excessive 1 Hz sync errors can indicate a failure of the Formatter or User Interface boards 35 Mnemonic STAT NESTFRINT Type Error clear on read Console Msg Nested frame interrupts nnn Interpretation Indicates on
171. ctor sequence The UI BER measurement performs a true bit error rate measurement on one user data channel 0 15 by comparing against the UI test vector sequence Both BER measurements always count both detected and undetected errors i e data validity is ignored In the case of FORM BER the formatter Test Vector Generator is automatically turned on for the duration of the measurement if required The UI DC bias measurement counts the number of bits with value 1 in the specified user data channel 0 15 This is useful to determine the ratio of 1 bits to O bits to check if data is reasonable Note that both the UI DC bias and UI BER measurements are made on UI output data similar to the data at the C2a cable port To make measurements of UI input data similar to the data at the C1 cable port you should tum UI feed through mode on Since there is currently no RCL command to set UI feed through you will have to use the RCL CON SOLECMD feature with the console command strings feedthru on or feedthru off The typical recommended measurement time is 1 second to keep RCL response times quick It is important to understand that while the BERDCB command is in progress no other RCL commands are allowed therefore the maximum rec ommended measurement time is 10 seconds In the case of FORM BER times of up to 255 seconds are actually possible but for UI BER and DC bias times are limited to a few seconds because of limited resolution in
172. d 1 Hz reference 51 7 REC on cable or CIHZ on C2 cable and the S2 s internal 1 Hz tick This is a true measurement of the difference with positive numbers indicating that the internal 1 Hz tick is later than the external reference and negative numbers indicating that the internal tick is earlier During record the station delay determines the offset between the user s 1 Hz reference and the time used to label the bits on tape During playback the station delay determines the offset between the user s 1 Hz timing reference and when the corresponding data bit is output on the C2 cable The displayed station delay can range from 0 5 seconds to 0 5 seconds less 31 25 nanoseconds Display may be in units of seconds s milliseconds ms microseconds us nanoseconds ns or user data bits bits depending on the units used when the delay was set the display units can also be changed without changing the delay When the System Clock PLL is in refclk mode used for recording or fixed rate playback the delay measurement should exactly match the delay setting from the last delay command Glitches on the high rate reference clock or a shift in the external or internal 1 Hz timing can cause a mismatch in which case the delay measurement display will be highlighted and the status message Stn delay meas urement setting STAT BADSTNDELAY will appear Corrections should be made manually by resetting the appropriate delay value The
173. d and verify that all 8 transports are responding properly the transport window should show all transports are stopped Then type the following console command transport all program This will first display the version number and date of the software currently loaded in the transports followed by the version number and date of the new transport software about to be loaded The S2 will then wait for user confirmation by asking you sure yes no If the version dates match perfectly there is no need to upgrade the transport software so type no Otherwise if the version dates are different type yes and wait for transport programming to complete about 5 minutes If everything is successful the S2 will report Transports 0 7 Pro grammed prog amp all You should ignore most status messages which come up during programming such as 3 If your 52 system has fewer than 8 transports all transports present should be responding S2 PT User s Manual MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING Tran N failure transpts are off dead motion state is inconsistent and Transports died born N N Note that if your S2 system has a mixture of transport types you will need to program transports of each type separately For example if your TAM contains 4 AG2520 transports while TAM B contains 4 AG2530 transports you must type the following transport 0 1 2 3 program transport 4 5 6 7 program
174. d time If one of 8 tapes is missing and barrel roll was on one out of every 8 bits in each user data channel will be invalid on playback If barrel roll was off at record time those user data channels which correspond to the missing tape s will contain invalid data while the remaining channels will be intact To see exactly which user data channels on the C2 cable are still valid in this situation switch to the user I O screen by typing userio In both cases barrel roll on and off the data obtained for the invalid bits is undefined When finished with playback stop rewind and eject can be used to rewind and remove the tapes as usual 52 User s Manual S2 Recorder User Parms record 24 1998 211 03 07 08 Operating System Tape ID CA 3 0028813 Recorder mode 32 4 2 br Station delay O us Transports Station USUDA64 Diag dec O in channel O rec Ox gt REC LI Source 220223 Diag dec time 211 03 07 08 00 1 gt REC LI Scan Start 211 03 00 00 Diag dec sync 100 uncalib 2 REC LI 3 gt REC LI User data valid yes Est err rate lt 1 0 6 1 ch 4 gt LI Tape speed 51 3 data valid 100 00 16 Mb s gt REC LI Tape position 2 40 34 01 s Decoder 01234567 fthru gt REC L 7 gt REC LI lt lt gt 11 11 H M
175. dard RS 232C serial cable which connects to a female DB 25 connector on the RCC configured as DCE Data Communications Equipment Refer to the MVMEI33XT User s Manual for pin assignments S2 PT User s Manual APPENDIX B PIN SIG NAME DESCRIPTION PIN SIG NAME l O DESCRIPTION 1 GND Ground 26 IN9 S2 Input Data ECL 2 GND Ground 27 IN 10 S2 Input Data ECL 3 INO S2 Input Data ECL 28 IN 10 S2 Input Data ECL 4 NO S2 Input Data ECL 29 IN t1 S2 Input Data ECL 5 IN 1 S2 Input Data ECL 30 IN 11 1 S2 Input Data ECL 6 IN 1 S2 Input Data ECL 31 GND Ground 7 IN 2 l S2 Input Data ECL 32 GND Ground 8 IN 2 l S2 Input Data ECL 33 IN 12 l S2 Input Data ECL 9 IN 3 l S2 Input Data ECL 34 IN 12 l S2 Input Data ECL 10 IN 3 S2 Input Data ECL 35 IN 13 S2 Input Data ECL 11 GND Ground 36 11 13 1 S2 Input Data ECL 12 GND Ground 37 IN 14 l S2 Input Data ECL 18 IN 4 S2 Input Data ECL 38 IN 14 S2 Input Data ECL 14 IN4 S2 Input Data ECL 39 IN 15 S2 Input Data ECL 15 IN 5 S2 Input Data ECL 40 IN 15 S2 Input Data ECL 16 IN5 l S2 Input Data ECL 41 GND Ground 17 IN6 l S2 Input Data ECL 42 GND Ground 18 IN 6 2 Input Data ECL 48 SCLK REC 19 IN 7 S2 Input Dat
176. ded that you turn off expert mode by typing expert off This hides low level diagnostic commands that may cause confusion To see an actual demonstration of a playback procedure run the 52 demo batch file as follows First place 8 scratch tapes in the transports then type batch demo pt The demo will not work on S2 systems with fewer than 8 transports 4 2 4 1 Playing Back Tapes Playing back previously recorded tapes involves the following basic steps Select a mode with the correct number of transports mode command Select the desired group number group command Position the tapes to the appropriate starting location using the posit ion command En y des Start playback by typing play The user will typically have available information logged at record time to help decide what mode group and position to use in steps 1 to 3 In addition several S2 parameters such as the recorder mode and barrel roll settings are automatically set to the right value once playback starts Although the correct playback mode will be set automatically step 1 above is still necessary because the required mode cannot be determined until the transports are put into motion and for that the S2 must be told how many transports to use Any mode can be chosen in step 1 as long as it has the same total data rate as the mode used for recording The same group number as used at record time should be chosen Figure 4 2 shows what the console display might
177. determine if all tapes belong to the same set at playback regardless of their current po sitions If this rule is not followed status code STAT INTAPEID may appear during playback indicating that two transports have different tape IDs but it will have no adverse effect on system operation TAPEID READ 18 none RESP TAPEID 0 5 sec tapeid also displayed on console screen Reads the current Tape ID setting from the last TAPEID SET command This is the Tape ID to be recorded not the playback tape ID TAPEID READ PB 19 none RESP TAPEID 0 5 sec tapeid also displayed on console screen Reads the playback Tape ID The S2 must currently be playing back prop erly recorded tapes and all of them must indicate the same Tape ID value this should automatically be true if the tapes are aligned and may or may not be true if they are not Since the Tape ID can be changed at any time 52 User s Manual 20 Command Msg Code Data Expected Resp Timer Duration Eq Console Cmd 21 Description Command Msg Code Data Expected Resp Timer Duration Eq Console Cmd 22 Description Command Msg Code APPENDIX A during record the value returned by TAPEID READ PB reflects its instanta neous value around the current tape time If the tapes are playing but not sufficiently aligned so that all tape IDs are the same response RESP ERR with error code ERR INPBAUX will be retumed should it
178. diag syncaux has already been run successfully diag formberc is roughly equivalent to manually entering setup N and group M for each available channel and group and checking the bit error rate with form berc However it is not able to spend enough time on each channel to detect anything except gross failures The uicberc test uses the UI bit error counter to check that all active or potentially active user data channels contain near perfect data It requires that the S2 is currently being fed and or is outputting the UI diagnostic test vector To inject the UI test vector attach an appropriate external test data generator or switch to one of the UI diagnostic modes e g mode diag8 or one of the C2 cable test modes diag uicberc tests user data channels on the UI board not just internal data channels and works in any of the following setups dhook ahook bypass The UI feedthru switch may be on or off if on the current setup doesn t matter The Mk3 formatter must not be active Note that no 32 Mbit s modes will work unless feedthru is on because each 32 Mbit s channel requires two internal 16 Mbit s channels and there is always only a single internal diagnostic path even 52 User s Manual OPERATION in PTs hence it is not possible to reconstruct 32 Mbit s data For similar reasons this test also won t work with barrel roll on diag uicberc is roughly equivalent to manually checking the bit error rate with uic berc N for each pot
179. ding on the current mode See RESP GROUP for the reply format TAPEINFO READ PB 28 52 User s Manual Timer Duration Eq Console Cmd Description 29 Data Expected Resp Command Msg Code Data APPENDIX A none RESP TAPEINFO 0 5 sec tapeinfo Returns tape related information during playback for each of the 8 individual transports This information is extracted from the auxiliary data channel and includes the following for each tape Transport address The number of the transport containing the tape 0 7 Channel ID The 52 internal channel number of the tape s data which is equivalent to the transport address at record time Can be used to deter mine the ordering of tapes in transports If auxiliary data could not be ex tracted or tape is not playing ejected etc the channel ID will be given as OxFF In this case all other fields will appear as zeroes except possibly the tape time since it can be independently extracted has its own CRC Note than if auxiliary data cannot be extracted for a particular transport channel ID is OxFF other transports may also show bad auxiliary data even though their data is in fact good particularly those with higher transport addresses This is because the S2 looks at the transports in order and may not scan past the bad one This does not affect the tape time field Tape ID The max 20 character tape identifier string as returned by the TAPEID READ PB command Us
180. distinguishes control messages to different transports and must match the C3 C4 cable channel the transport is connected to which depends on its position inthe TAM racks Address reassignment will normally be accomplished through the console On the command line enter transport assignaddr SERIAL NUMBER ADDRESS where SERIAL NUMBER is the four digit serial number found on a label on the back of the transport of the form TCP SERIAL NUMBER and ADDRESS is the channel number of the transport 0 7 If at any time two or more transports have the same address both will appear dead in the transport display However the transport assignaddr command should still work properly provided the serial number used is correct If for some reason a transport s serial number label is lost or becomes unreadable the number can be obtained using transport N status serial where is the transport s address If at the same time the transport s address is invalid front panel display shows 69 or conflicts with other transports proceed as follows Disconnect the TCL serial cable C5 from all transports except the one in question then issue the console command transport 255 status serial Re labelthe transport serial number immediately Transport TCP Board Replacement Occasionally it may be necessary to replace or swap the TCP board inside a transport due to failures Users and service personnel must be careful when replacing
181. e Console Msg Mnemonic Type Console Msg Mnemonic Type Console Msg Mnemonic Type Console Msg Mnemonic Type Console Msg OPERATION STAT REFCLKOUTLOW Fatal error C2 output ref clock rate too low The C2 output reference clock rate is set to a value lower than the current user channel data rate Set the correct clock rate using the userio clkout console command STAT ERRRCL Fatal error clear on read RCL error nnn The RCL task encountered an internal software error This should not normally appear If the complete error message does not fit in the status window error decode can be used to translate the numeric error code to the full text message STAT ERRRPMON Fatal error clear on read RpMon error nnn The record playback monitor task encountered an unexpected software error This can happen if conditions are not correct for automatic record or playback in which case this message will be accompanied by other more descriptive status messages If the complete error message does not fit in the status window error decode can be used to translate the numeric error code to the full text message STAT ERRMK3SW Fatal error clear on read Mk3 form s w error nnn The Mark related software encountered an internal error This should not normally happen If the complete error message does not fit in the status window error decode can
182. e Data Response Msg Code Data Response Msg Code Data APPENDIX A rbyte24 rbyte33 9 character recorder mode string terminated by a null for 10 bytes total Indicates what mode was in effect when the tape was recorded Modes shorter than 9 characters will leave trailing bytes unused set to null but will still occupy 10 bytes total In the rare case of an ille gal mode at record time the mode string will be empty rbyte34 rbyte41 Playback tape time 8 bytes total as follows may be present even if channel ID is OxFF rbyte34 rbyte35 Absolute year number 1901 to 2099 rbyte34 2 MSB A year value of 0 indicates time could not be extracted from aux data remaining time bytes will be 0 rbyte36 rbyte37 Day number 1 to 365 366 rbyte36 MSB rbyte38 Hours 0 to 23 rbyte39 Minutes 0 to 59 rbyte40 Seconds 0 to 59 rbyte41 Frames 0 to 63 each frame is 1 64th of a second rbyte44 Record start time 3 bytes total as follows rbyte42 Hours 0 to 23 rbyte43 Minutes 0 to 59 rbyte44 Seconds 0 to 59 rbyte45 rbyte46 Record S2 serial number 0 to 65535 0 unde fined rbyte45 MSB rbyte47 rbyte48 Record transport serial number 1 to 65535 rbyte47 MSB rbyte49 rbyte52 32 bit signed 2 s complement measured record station delay value in nanoseconds rbyte49 2 MSB Range 500000000 to 500000000 1bit or OX7FFFFFFF if unknown no Hz input total data bytes 416 Gives tap
183. e RESP STATUS without having the active status conditions change The detailed status messages are suitable for logging or other error reporting purposes If the re read flag is set this command lists new status condi tions i e implicitly performs STATUS first The short option allows ac cess to shorter versions of the detailed status messages useful to save space when displaying status However the regular long form should still be used whenever possible since the short messages are intended for the console and are not as accurate or complete The reason that two versions of the status command STATUS and STATUS DETAIL are provided is for efficiency so that you can use the fast one for polling and the slower one STATUS DETAIL after problems are found if you need the text messages If you always ask for the text messages regardless you can skip sending STATUS and send STATUS DETAIL directly with the re read flag TRUE See RESP STATUS and RESP STATUS DETAIL for more information 82 Command STATUS DECODE generic Msg Code 82 52 User s Manual Data Expected Resp Timer Duration Eq Console Cmd Description 83 Expected Resp Timer Duration Eq Console Cmd Description 90 Expected Resp Timer Duration Eq Console Cmd Description 91 Command Msg Code Data Command Msg Code Data Command Msg Code APPENDIX A bytel numeric status code from 1 to 127
184. e the most straightforward modes have names of the form bxu q where b is the user channel bit rate in Mbits s and u is the number of user data channels The q indicates either 1 or 2 bit quantization By convention two S2 user data channels are occupied by each 2 bit quantized sampler channel i e sign and magnitude are counted separately For example mode 16x8 1 is 8 channels of 16 Mbits s data at one bit quantization Mode 4x16 2 is 16 channels of 4 Mbits s data at two bit quantization and therefore represents 8 2 bit sampler channels With regular S2 modes x letter code active user data channels are allocated sequentially starting at channel 0 Other modes exist in which the active channels follow different patterns for example the i and p modes initially added to support RadioAstron To see exactly which user data channels are active switch to the user I O screen by typing userio repeat the command to switch back Table B 5 also shows the active user channels for each mode Note that some modes have the same active user data channels and data rate as other modes but differ in the way channels are mapped internally e g 16x8 2 and 16v8 2 Setting the mode implicitly selects how many transports will be used for subsequent operations Transports are normally selected in order starting at address 0 including as many as is necessary to accommodate the total data rate For modes which do not require all available transports
185. e DSCM bringing clock and data from the DSCM Formatter to the TAMs This port originates the C4 cable from the DSCM returning signal from the TAMs to the eight DSCM Data Recovery modules and bringing 5 V from the DSCM to the custom transport electronics C5 port C3 port a o a HM gt o C4 port 120VAC TAM RACK OUTPUT POWER SWITCH 120VAC INPUT Figure 2 4 TAM Rack Connector Placement 2 23 2 Ports Figure 2 4 illustrates the cable ports on the fixed back panel of the TAM These are C3 Port This port terminates the C3 cable from the DSCM bringing clock and data from the DSCM Formatter to the TAM 52 User s Manual INSTALLATION Figure 2 5 DSCM Shipping Box with Cable Assemblies C4 Port This port terminates the C4 cable from the DSCM retuming signal from the TAM to the eight DSCM Data Recovery modules and supplying 5 V from the DSCM to the TAM custom electronics C5 Port This port terminates the serial Transport Control Link TCL cable from the DSCM Power In Out This port supplies power to the TAM and includes a connector for feed through power to a second TAM This port is rated for 120 volts 50 60 Hz only 2 3 Cables Figure 2 5 shows the S2 cable assemblies as shipped in the DSCM container They consist of S2 to user I O cables for transfer of signals and power to and from the user and S2 system cables linking S2 modules Connect the cable assemblies as shown in Figure 2 1 or 2 2 S
186. e by running the ROSCO terminal emulator program supplied with the S2 see Section 6 2 for more information on ROSCO 5 Power on the system and answer the installation questions which appear on the console first time system turned on only See Section 4 2 6 for more information on the installation questions 6 Perform the post installation checkout tests as described in Section 2 8 52 User s Manual INSTALLATION 2 2 Identifying Cable Ports 22 1 DSCM Ports Figure 2 3 illustrates the cable ports on the front panels of the DSCM circuit boards These are RCC Console Port This port connects the RCC to a console terminal via the C7 serial cable It is a female DB 25 connector configured as RS 232C DCE Data Communications Equipment Ethernet Port Optional BNC connector for thin Ethernet or female DB 15 connector for Ethernet trans ceiver These ports are not both active simultaneously the chip in socket U4 of the Ethernet board must be moved to the adjacent socket U3 or vice versa to enable the other Ethernet connector The factory default setting is for the BNC coaxial connector to be enabled TCL Port This DB 9 pin port is the DSCM input for the C5 Transport Control Link TCL connecting the DSCM and TAM RCL Port This port is the DSCM input for the C6 Radioastronomy Control Link RCL It is a male DB 25 connector configured as RS 232C DTE Data Terminal Equipment Formatter FORM Ethernet ENP 10TL Us
187. e cocoocoocoocooooccooaooooco v zw we gt MU ind zu e mc 5 lt 9 ox 52 A in I wow H on e da MET az o asm ev e a G eo r PEN as o nd uu S5 N on i JO gt m ev Q lt c c wo Q O gt 6 OSHA E wie ze 5 5 oc ow fn v s v o Q c rco eost eu t c roe Goa a 20 24 CABLE TEST VECTOR SEQUENCE FIRST 20 WORDS FOLLOWING 1Hz RESET AT t 52 User s Manual oe e oc oc e e 2 oc a ec eo eroe eooeeoococoeoocooocococoo OL T c 5 eoceecooococoecccooococ bm 2 oa Oo Let st t cu
188. e current station delay setting and the delay measurement shown on the console display A similar definition of lock applies in SC PLL errmes mode except that the user supplied error measurement is used This lock definition has been chosen somewhat arbitrarily based on the requirements of space VLBI and the capabilities of the S2 hardware The of STAT SCPLLSLIP or STAT SCPLLUNLOCK status errors does not in itself indicate a problem with S2 internal timing only that the synchronization with the external reference has exceeded the 60 us threshold However internal timing problems resulting in loss of data become more likely in this situation See the description of the delay command for more information 40 Mnemonic STAT DRDMISSIG Type Error clear on read Console Msg DRD nnn missed extra sigs nnn nnn Interpretation Indicates one or more missed or extra signatures were detected by the indicated DRD board s since the last status read RCL reset console The Recorder Control Computer and the DRD 8051 control processors synchronize by exchanging sig nature codes and any missing or extra signatures mean a problem with that syn chronization Isolated missed sigs can be caused by timing glitches but continuous missed sigs indicate a probable failure of the DRD control processor If more than one DRD board is listed the number of missed extra sigs shown is the maximum of all the affected boards 41 Mnemonic STAT
189. e lastserv Also shows the total in service time since manufacture servtime Head use time Shows the total number of hours the transport has spent in play record pause cue or review states since the last head replacement as re corded using transport N service lasthead Also shows the total head use time since manufacture headt ime On time Shows the total amount of time the transport has had power applied since manufacture in hours and minutes ont ime Transport tracking Displays the current transport tracking control value rela tive to the internal phase 1 optimized position Includes manual and pending flags tracking TCP serial Shows the transport TCP serial number serial Playback TCP serial Shows the transport serial number extracted from tape This corresponds to the serial number of the transport TCP used to record the tape serialpb Transport state Shows the transport state but does not switch to tape time state 4 2 8 6 User I O Window upper middle Figure 4 7 This window summarizes the current input output configuration It replaces the User Parms window when you type userio Most of the parameters shown in the User I O window are controlled using the userio and 11 console commands Top line Gives the name of this window User Data rate Shows the user channel data rate in Mbits s and the number of active user channels These are determined by the current recorde
190. e or more nested frame sync interrupts have occurred since the last status read RCL reset console This can be caused by frame syncs SRSYR occurring too close together such as might happen during an internal timing glitch 36 Mnemonic STAT LATEFRINT Type Error clear on read Console Msg Late frame interrupts nnn Interpretation Indicates one or more frame sync interrupts have been late or missed since the last status read RCL reset console A late frame interrupt is defined as a period longer than oth of a second without the occurrence of a frame sync interrupt This can be caused by a system internal timing glitch or absent SRSYR signal see STAT NOSRSYR 37 Mnemonic STAT SCPLLBADMODE Type Error Console Msg SC PLL mode should be Interpretation Appears during record if the System Clock PLL mode is not refclk and external input data is being recorded The S2 must lock to an external high rate reference clock for correct record operation therefore the SC PLL mode must be refclk The SC PLL mode can be set using 11 mode command or by changing the scpllmode parameter in the defaults file edit defaults 38 Mnemonic STAT SCPLLUNLOCK Type Fatal error Console Msg System clk PLL is unlocked Interpretation Indicates that the System Clock PLL is not locked This message is triggered by continuous SC PLL sync errors see STAT_SCPLLSLIP It is normal when lock is first being
191. e per sec ond occasionally missing one is not serious The time between taking the FIFO error measurement and transmitting the command should be kept as short as possible for optimum SC PLL performance The following limits should be observed Max delay rate 1 x 10 s s Max delay acceleration 1 x 10 sis Max delay step at 0 delay rate 1 x 107 s Exceeding these limits may cause STAT_SCPLLSLIP and or STAT_SCPLLUN LOCK status messages indicating that the SC PLL is considered unlocked FIFO error greater than about 6 x 107 S In this situation i e ERRMES values greater than 6 x 10 s smooth delay tracking continues as well as possible although internal timing problems resulting in loss of playback data become more likely in extreme cases where the SCPLL VCO is pushed near its rail values 2 ESTERR READ 38 bytel ordering of returned list 0x00 in order of transports 0 7 0 01 in order of internal recorder channels 0 7 total data bytes 1 RESP ESTERR 0 5 sec transport display esterr Returns a list of estimated bit error rates Each entry in the list corresponds to a transport and or S2 internal data channel number although this fact can be ignored The number of entries in the list depends on how many chan nels transports are currently active as determined by the current mode The list can be further processed externally to compute an average or select the highest amp lowest entres The ordering of the
192. e related information during playback for each of the 8 individual trans ports See the TAPEINFO READ PB command for further description rbyte42 RESP DELAY 130 bytel byte4 32 bit signed 2 s complement delay value in nanoseconds bytel MSB Range 500000000 to 500000000 1bit total data bytes 4 See DELAY SET DELAY READ DELAYM READ RESP BARRELROLL 133 bytel Boolean value 0 00 Barrel roll is OFF 0 00 Barrel roll is ON total data bytes 1 See BARRELROLL READ command RESP POSITION 136 bytel type of response 0x00 overall mid point position and linear variance byte2 byte5 overall absolute position as a 32 bit signed integer number of seconds since BOT MSB first range 99 43199 0x80000000 if unknown 52 User s Manual Description 138 Description 139 Description 143 Description 145 Description 151 Response Msg Code Data Response Msg Code Data Response Msg Code Data Response Msg Code Data Response APPENDIX A byte6 byte9 linear variance as a 32 bit signed integer number of seconds MSB first range 0 43199 0x80000000 if unknown individual transport positions byte2 number of positions being returned normally 8 byte3 byte34 List of positions For each transport there is a 32 bit signed integer representing the absolute position in seconds since BOT MSB first range 99 43199 0x80000000
193. e without echoing add echo off as the first command This will suppress both the printing of commands and their output so if you want to see a particular command s output you will have to tum 52 User s Manual OPERATION echoing back on Exceptions are the echo command itself 1og display and status display whose output always appears The prompt option of echo writes out Hit return to continue and waits for the user to press return For examples of how to use the echo command examine the supplied demo pt batch file See also the wait command Command edit Syntax edit defaults termcap startup cmd Description Use this to edit one of three system configuration files defaults termcap and startup cmd The defaults file contains many system startup options which allow users to customize S2 behaviour for their environment The termcap file contains terminal capability definitions in Berkeley termcap format allowing users to add support for their console terminal type if it does not already exist See Section 4 2 7 for more information on these two files The startup cmd file contains VxWorks shell commands to execute at boot time and might be used occasionally for ad vanced network operation or to implement binary software patches You must use only VxWorks shell commands not ROS console commands one per line Do not use the exit shell command anywhere in the startup cmd file The editor invoked by the edit command is
194. ead 99 Command VERSION generic Msg Code 99 Data none Expected Resp RESP_VERSION Timer Duration 0 5 sec Eq Console Cmd version Description Returns ROS Recorder Operating System software version information as a string including the version number CPU type and compilation date time Example response 3 0d 133 compiled Fri May 16 12 59 08 EDT 1997 See also RESP_VERSION S2 PT User s Manual Responses 100 Response Msg Code 100 Data bytel 8 bit signed 2 s complement error code see description total data bytes APPENDIX A RESP ERR generic D Description Response code RESP ERR is returned any time a request cannot be com pleted The data portion of this response contains an error code byte which can be translated into a descriptive error message using the ERROR DE CODE command Requests which complete successfully and don t need to re tum any additional information e g PLAY respond with RESP ERR error code ERR NONE Those successful requests which provide specific informa tion return the appropriate response packet e g the TIME READ command returns RESP TIME packet ROS error codes and messages are shown below Note that error codes are negative decimal numbers encoded as 8 bit 2 s complement integers This list is subject to change at any time typically for the purpose of adding new error codes All effo
195. earest bit sample Use DELAY READ to obtain the actual delay value imple mented after rounding and DELAYM READ to obtain the current true sta tion delay measurement The allowed absolute delay range is 0 5 sec to one bit time less than of 0 5 sec where the bit time is one over the current user channel data rate e g 62 5 ns in mode 16x8 1 The allowed relative de lay range is one bit time short of 1 0 sec to one bit time short of 1 0 sec See also ALIGN below and the descriptions of the delay align and Scpll console commands If the System Clock PLL mode is 1hz used for playback small station delay changes involve a smooth gradual movement to the new delay value in any other SC PLL mode besides 107 delay changes glitch the output clocks and data A typical application would be to have several S2 PTs at a correlation center fed by a common fixed 1 Hz reference with DELAY SET commands sent over the RCL to each PT for delay tracking All system tim ing and data remains continuously valid provided that the following limits are met max delay rate 1 x 10 s s max delay acceleration 1 1079 5 52 max delay step at 0 delay rate 1 10 s You should use the ALIGN command instead of DELAY SET for large delay changes that would exceed these limits Exceeding the limits may cause STAT SCPLLSLIP and or STAT SCPLLUNLOCK status messages indicating that the SC PLL is considered unlocked difference between delay setting and dela
196. ease follow these steps l T9 EXTERNAL CONTROL COMPUTER TO TERMINAL ETHERNET optional TO DATA SOURCE TO DATA DESTINATION TO DATA VALDITY DESTINATION 126VAC OUTLETS MAIN POWER INPUT Configure the TAMs and DSCM in a 19 rack or on a bench in the desired arrangement Please refer to Chapter 3 of this manual to establish environmental constraints on system configuration and operation Identify the cables and cable ports described in the next two sections C6 RCL 05 TCL RCC SRAM 1 TRANSPORTS 0 3 ETHERNET optional POWER OUT 120 vac POWER IN 50 60 Hz TAM2 TRANSPORTS 4 7 VME CAGE AC JUMPER CORD BELDEN 17254 DSCM POWER IN 120 or 240 YAC 50 50 Hz POWER OUT 120 vac POWER IN 50 60 Hz DSCM POWER EQUIPNENT POWER CORD TAM POWER BELDEN 17281 Cl User data clock and 1 Hz in C2 User data clock and 1 Hz and data validity out C3 Formatted data and record clock C4 Playback signal C5 Transport Control Link TCL C6 Recorder Control Link RCL C7 S2 terminal serial cable Figure 2 1 S2 PT Configuration 120VAC Operation 52 User s M
197. ecord play In some unusual situations no consistent overall tape motion state can be derived e g after certain transport errors or low level console commands In this case no state is indicated The word POSITIONING indicates that tape positioning is in progress The word ALIGNED indicates that all tapes are aligned during playback The words NO TAPE indicate that one or more required tapes have not yet been inserted 4 2 8 5 Transport Window middle left Figure 4 1 Top line Indicates what transport related parameter is being displayed Normally the window shows the transport state and switches to tape time during playback if time can be extracted In this case the window is simply labeled Transports For other display parameters more specific labels are used Body of window For each transport 0 7 shows one of several parameters as selected with the transport display command Transports which do not respond to com munication attempts are shown as Currently selected transports are marked and transports for which system status contains failure conditions are marked with a highlighted F A list of possible display parameters is given below The word in square brackets is the transport display command code that selects the 52 User s Manual OPERATION parameter Note that when playback tape times are shown the displayed values are typically delayed by about 1 4 of a second due
198. ed Group switching can be used to extend unattended recording time in low bandwidth modes and will typically be performed using the RCL GROUP_SET command as part of an automated schedule running on an external control computer Note that group switching is not allowed during regular automatic play or record the S2 must be stopped and then restarted See the description of the mode command on page 4 40 for additional information including a complete list of valid mode designators and the group command on page 4 38 Tape ID and User Info The tape ID and user info are user assignable text fields that get recorded on tape as part of the S2 auxiliary data All 8 transports receive the same auxiliary data so this information is common to all tapes in a set The 52 User s Manual OPERATION tape ID is a text string up to 20 characters long assigned using the tapeid console command It should be chosen so that it uniquely identifies the set of tapes being recorded and should remain the same for the entire duration of the tapes Information contained in the tape ID is entirely up to the user however CRESTech and the Canadian correlator group have defined an S2 tape labeling convention with tape IDs of the form XX T YYYYYZZ where XX is the country code T is the tape type code YYYYY is the tape set index number and ZZ is a checksum Example CA 3 0012307 The physical tape label includes an extra suffix which indicates the tape number withi
199. ee Appendix B for detailed pin assignments timing and electrical specifications 2 3 1 S2 User Cables Cl This cable consists of a 50 conductor twisted pair ribbon cable maximum length 10 m carrying user data clock and 1 Hz signals from the user data source to the 52 52 User s Manual C2a C2b C2c C6 C7 INSTALLATION This cable consists of a 50 conductor twisted pair ribbon cable maximum length 2 10 m carrying recovered data clock and 1 Hz from the S2 to the user This cable consists of a 20 conductor twisted pair ribbon cable maximum length 10 m carrying recovered data validity for 1 or 2 bit quantized data carries only even user channels for 1 bit data This cable consists of a 20 conductor twisted pair ribbon cable maximum length 10 m carrying recovered data validity for the odd user channels in the case of 1 bit quantized data It is needed only for 1 bit quantized modes that use odd user data channels Note that the C2c cable is not accessible from the UI front panel but is available from a straight dual row header near the front and center of the UI board itself this header is unlabeled The C2c header is polarized to accept only the wider end of the physical C2c cable assembly The blank panel on the right hand side of the UI must be removed to install this cable This cable also known as the Radioastronomy Control Link RCL is a serial cable connecting the S2 to an external control com
200. een re loaded and one transport may be dead or only partially pro grammed After successfully programming all eight transports you should see this message Transports 0 7 Programmed prog amp all The transport software is actually broken down into a number of different modules and it is possible to give the name of a specific module to re load This should be done by expert service personnel only A combination of all the modules is called all ag25x0 a different version of which exists for each transport type Two identical programming modules are used for downloading the EEPROM with one being used to download the other when the programming modules themselves need to be updated their names are prog tep and progalt tcp for the standard and alternate programming modules respectively Two other modules exist main ag25x0 and xil ag25x0 These two modules and progalt tcp are not normally included in S2 software distributions to save space in any case they are part of all ag25x0 Care must be taken when programming individual transport modules especially when using all ag25x0 because it is possible to make a mistake and kill a transport Only use all ag25x0 if you are sure the old and new programming modules are exactly identical If not you must download one of the programming modules first Of course you can avoid these problems by using the standard pro gramming sequence transport N program described above since this auto matic
201. eful to determine individual tape IDs in case the tape IDs are not all the same causing TAPEID READ PB to return error ERR INPBAUX Recorder Mode The max 9 character recorder mode string indicating what mode was in effect when the tape was recorded Tape time The playback tape time as returned by the TIME READ PB command Useful to determine individual tape times in case the tapes are not aligned causing TIME READ PB to return error ERR NOALIGN Note that times obtained here may be ambiguous to within 1 to 3 seconds since spe cial response synchronization is not performed as with TIME READ PB However relative time differences between tapes will be accurate The year value 0 indicates that time could not be extracted from aux data remaining time bytes will be 0 In general the time field is much more likely to be valid when playback is marginal because it is decoded separately ie chan nel ID may be OxFF while the tape time is valid Record start time The tape time at which this recording started time RECORD command was issued Record S2 serial num The serial number of the S2 system used to re cord this tape Useful for problem tracing Record transport serial num The serial number of the transport TCP used to record this tape Useful for problem tracing Record station delay The measured station delay at record time Useful to determine if uncorrected delay glitches or any other unreported delay off sets existed at record
202. eing or reviewing Should not be used for regular operation Command user Syntax user info 1 STR16 blank label STR16 blank 2 STR16 blank label STR16 blank 8 STR32 blank label STR16 blank 4 STR48 blank label STR16 blank dv yes no playback enable disable Description Sets displays the value of one of 4 user defined information fields and labels or the user data valid flag User info is shown in the console User Parms window except field 4 During record this information is written continuously to the 52 auxiliary data channel During playback it may be recovered at any position on the tape The format of the user info fields is totally up to the user as long as the overall length does not exceed 16 16 32 48 characters for fields 1 through 4 respectively and 16 characters for each label Specify blank to clear an info field or label the command with no parameters displays its current value User info should be entered prior to the start of recording and thereafter may be changed at any time but should not be changed more often than every few seconds See Tape ID and User Info on page 4 12 for more information including some ex amples The dv option of the user command is used at record time to set a boolean flag which indicates whether data is valid or invalid Then at playback time the hardware data valid DV signals will mark the data invalid whenever the user DV flag was false User DV is just one
203. em defaults file using the clkinsre and clkinrate options Note that the high rate reference clock is used only in System Clock PLL refclk mode and the 1 Hz reference is used only in SC PLL modes refclk and 1hz The clkout option sets the frequency of the high rate reference clock output on the C2 cable 5 1 PB either 4 8 16 or 32 MHz or followdata If the Mark III IV formatter is active the output clock can t be set to anything except followdata and the output clock rate increases by a factor of 9 8 due to parity insertion The default output clock rate is set by the clkoutrate defaults file pa rameter The clin option is used to enable and disable the Cl cable data inputs while c2out enables and disables the C2 cable data and validity outputs These may be useful when testing the interface between the S2 and a correlator or between the S2 and a data acquisition system Note that in both cases the timing signals clock and 1 Hz are unaffected The syncerrinduce option may be used to test the correlator timing in terface Turning syncerrinduce on introduces a timing offset error in the 1 Hz output SIHZ PB on C2a cable relative to the data unlike the delay command which shifts data and clock together when in playback The amount of error offset is 250 ns in 4 8 and 16 Mbit s modes and 62 5 ns in 32 Mbit s modes Don t forget to turn it off when you are done For other commands which affect the S2 s input output configuration see
204. ence clocks which can come either from the or C2 cable The cable is normally selected on a Record Terminal and the C2 cable on a Playback Terminal In System Clock PLL modes other than refclk and 1hz the clock inputs are not used so this display shows unused In System Clock PLL xtal mode this display shows int Xtal indicating that the high rate reference is an internal crystal oscillator located on the UI board The clkinsre defaults file parameter determines the default input clock source to use at bootup Ref clk in rate Shows the expected frequency of the high rate input reference clock in MHz This can be set to 4 8 16 or 32 MHz using the userio clkin command It can also be set to follow the user channel data rate followdata in which case the display shows fd and the expected input frequency tracks the user data rate on mode changes The input ref clock is used only in System Clock PLL refclk mode otherwise unused is displayed In SC PLL xtal mode 32 MHz is shown because this is the frequency of the internal crystal oscillator The clkin rate defaults file parameter determines the default input clock frequency to use at bootup Ref clk out rate Shows the frequency of the high rate reference clock output on the C2 cable This can be set to 4 8 16 or 32 MHz independent of the input clock rate using the userio clkout command It can also be set to follow the user chan
205. ence number as the previous packet After a certain number of retries 2 recommended for a total of 3 failed transmissions the external computer should flag a communication error and declare that the S2 recorder is dead not functioning power off RCL cable disconnected The external com puter can use ping commands described below to detect when communications resume A 3 Command Response Summary Commands are numbered in the range 0 to 99 decimal They are always sent from the external control computer master to the RCL device slave Most commands listed below are specific to the S2 recorder but a few of the commands are generic and must be implemented in the same way by all types of RCL devices Examples of generic RCL commands PING VERSION and IDENT Except for the generic commands other types of RCL devices can have different command sets by defining the same command code numbers differently Code Cmd Name Function 00 STOP Stop transports 01 PLAY Start playback use STATUS to monitor progress 02 RECORD Start recording use STATUS to monitor progress 03 REWIND Rewind tapes use state read to test completion recorder will auto stop 04 FF Fast forward tapes use state read to test completion recorder will auto stop 05 PAUSE Temporarily pause recording or playback not recommended use STOP 06 UNPAUSE Resume recording
206. entially active user data channel switching the setup using setup N if necessary to adjust the coverage of user output channels Like diag formberc diag uicberc is not able to spend enough time on each channel to detect anything except gross failures The dcbias test uses the UI DC bias counter to check that all active or potentially active user data channels contain approximately random data between 4096 and 6096 DC bias In other ways this test is similar to diag uicberc except that it also works with the Mk3 formatter enabled It is roughly equivalent to manually checking the DC bias with uic dcbias N for each potentially active user data channel switching the setup using setup N if necessary to adjust the coverage of user output channels The drdxbar test checks all combinations of the distributed DRD crossbar switch to ensure that each DRD is capable of driving all 8 internal data channels DDP This test detects problems that would otherwise be discovered only when tapes are inserted in a certain unusual order The drdxbar diagnostic is valid only on a PT on an RT diag formberc covers this test so it is unnecessary The mk3sync test checks all 14 Mark III output channels for valid sync using the Mark III sync detector The Mark III formatter must be enabled mk3 form enable The pgstress test is a special diagnostic which plays back reference tapes and determines the allowable range of playback PGSHIFT offsets Before running this t
207. er Interface Ul TCL C5 port 8 x Data Recovery DRDp C2a port RCC MVME 133XT SRAM 271 Ww C2b port gt ans gt 17 PRAY C4n port d Y nm Tz C4 port Ethernet port C1 port Console C7 port RCL C6 port Figure 2 3 DSCM Ports 52 User s Manual C1 Port C2a Port C2b Port C2c Port C3 Port C4 Port INSTALLATION This port originates the C1 cable from the data source to the DSCM bringing clock data and 1 Hz to the User Interface This port originates the C2a cable from the DSCM bringing clock data and 1 Hz from the User Interface to the user data destination it also carries optional clock and 1Hz from the user data destination to the User Interface This port originates the C2b cable from the DSCM bringing data validity from the User Interface to the user data destination this cable carries validity appropriate for 8 channel 1 or 2 bit quantized data from the S2 to the user This port originates the C2c cable from the DSCM bringing data validity from the User Interface to the user data destination this cable carries validity appropriate to the odd channels of 16 independent 1 bit quantized baseband channels Note that the C2c port is not accessible from the UI front panel but is available from a straight dual row header near the front and center of the UI board itself This port originates the C3 cable from th
208. es an gt E Cmode 1 Ctapeid 1 user 1 record 1 play 1 C ETC Figure 4 3 Sample ROS Screen User record 4 2 4 2 Recording Tapes OPERATION The record function is useful on Playback Terminals to for example make test tapes If desired S2 PTs can also be used like regular S2 RTs However to use an S2 PT as a Record Terminal and record real user data you will probably need to change some of the defaults file parameters At minimum the following defaults parameters should be as shown scpllmode refclk clkinsre cl clkinrate AS REQUIRED stopsetup bypass Making a recording involves the following basic steps a a uds Set the time Set the recorder mode and group Enter the Tape ID and other user defined information fields Set the tape speed if different from the default AG2530 and earlier only Set the tape type if different from the default Switch on the diagnostic test vector data if making test tapes Start recording Each of the above steps is described in detail below Figure 4 3 shows what the console display might look like during record For information on what kind of tape can be used in the S2 please refer to Chapter 5 Time Setting Before making a recording the S2 system time must be set typically to UTC time Only the seconds and higher order digits need to be set since the fractional seconds portion of the time is precisely determined by the S 1 Hz hardware sync signa
209. essary to push the transport forward a few inches from the back of the TAM b Transport Insertion 1 Power down the system This is a precautionary step only If operational requirements make it necessary to do so transports can be inserted while the power is on 2 Make a note of the TCP serial number of the transport s being inserted number is printed on a label on the back of the transport This will be needed later 3 Engage the sliders and slide the transport backwards until the slider catch is encountered Depress the catches on both sides of the extended sliders while pushing backward on the transport The transport will slide into the rack Some pressure may need to be applied to the front of the rack to overcome the resistance ofthe extended sliders AG2550 transports have no sliders and are inserted by simply pushing them into the appropriate slot as far as they will go 4 Screw in the slider block to the rack infill brackets on the front of the rack The slider block does not need to be tightened excessively Plug in the ribbon 50 ohm cable serial and power cables into the back of the transport Screw on the TAM back panel Note that thumbscrews should be FINGER TIGHTENED ONLY when securing S2 transports and other TAM hardware c Transport Address Assignment Replacement of a transport in the TAM rack or replacement of the TCP board within the transport may require reassignment of the transport address The address is what
210. est is running most RCL commands which affect tape motion or system switch settings are prohibited The following checks are per formed by self test 1 1 Prerequisite Checks Ensures UI FORM and DRD boards are present and successfully downloaded The number of DRD boards expected to be present is determined by the diagnumtran defaults file parameter usually 8 Ensures the required number of transports is present as given by the diagnumtran defaults file parameter usually 8 If the System Clock PLL is in refclk mode checks that the PLL is properly locked i e no SC PLL sync errors detected If in any other SC PLL mode self test 1 switches to xtal mode for the duration of the test Failure at any of the above steps causes self test 1 to terminate and print a descriptive message to the console interaction window The status window will indicate Diagnostic test failed with a negative numeric error code 2 On line Status Check At this point the on line status is checked for any fatal non clear on read conditions The on line status operates continuously regardless of what operation the 52 is currently performing even during the self test Some of the relevant status conditions include VME 5 5 2 12 12 V power supply bad System internal 64 Hz frame sync SRS YR absent Transport software failure including TCP EEPROM checksum test Transport 5V 5V supply bad Transport record clk data bad
211. est you should select the desired transports and insert official PGSHIFT ref erence 8 Command dnid Syntax dnld form drd uictxdc uicdddv uicdgqa box STR lt filenames gt ls long Description Explicitly downloads the indicated Xilinx chip chain Strictly for diagnostic use only Command dr Syntax dr cal reset all flat setdefault pbsel NUM transport emulin NUM lt drd gt off fdbkout NUM lt transport gt off decsel mlsd bitby bit vco tdacsel eyelerror Description Sets displays low level analog data recovery control options and switches For di agnostic use only Most of these switches are set automatically as a result of other commands during regular operation dr reset flat is sometimes useful to help stabilize the data recovery if it is having trouble calibrating This can happen after updating software re loading the Static RAM The tdacsel switch selects one of two alternative output signals for the ERRDAC test point SMA jack on the DRD board front panel eye selects the eye pattern decoded filtered data while error selects an error signal showing deviation from the ideal eye pattern The default is eye Command echo Syntax echo offlon prompt STR lt txt gt Description Writes a text message to the console interaction window useful from batch files Also controls the echoing of commands from a batch file with the on off options For example to make a batch file execut
212. etation One or more Data Recovery Deformatter boards are operating incorrectly probably due to a hardware failure This is a general OK FAIL indicator for the DRD boards 52 User s Manual 11 Interpretation 12 Interpretation 13 Interpretation 15 Interpretation 16 Interpretation 17 Interpretation Mnemonic Type Console Msg Mnemonic Type Console Msg Mnemonic Type Console Msg Mnemonic Type Console Msg Mnemonic Type Console Msg Mnemonic Type Console Msg OPERATION and is a summary of other status conditions which appear later in the display Each DRD board also has a green OK LED on its front panel which will go out when a failure is detected STAT UICFAIL Fatal error UI board failure reason follows The User Interface board is operating incorrectly probably due to a hardware fail ure This is a general OK FAIL indicator for the UI board and is a summary of other status conditions which appear later in the display STAT TRANFAIL Fatal error Tran nnn failure reason follows One or more transports are operating incorrectly probably due to a cable fault or hardware failure This is a general OK FAIL indicator for the transports and is a summary of other status conditions which appear later in the display Each failed transport listed here will also be marked with a highlighted F in the Trans port window STAT ROSS
213. ets see Section 4 4 3 The RCL can be tested using the RCLCO program provided with the S2 on floppy disks in ANSI C source code format RCLCO supports both serial and network operation and can serve as the basis for user application programs that control the S2 It includes the RCL interface library a set of function calls which provide the programmer s interface to the RCL As shipped RCLCO runs either on IBM PC or compatible computers serial port version or under Unix network version Read the file called IREADME on the first floppy disk for further instructions 4 4 Ethernet Usage The optional S2 Ethernet board allows access to the console and RCL ports over the network using rlogin telnet for the console and internet TCP sockets for the RCL The Ethernet board can also be used to upgrade S2 software or restore the 3 MB SRAM from data files on a remote host but for this the host computer must have the necessary files available and be configured to recognize the S2 target system More information on network software reloads is available from CRESTech SGL upon request Note that when adding an Ethernet board to an S2 system you must remove the VME IACK interrupt acknowledge backplane jumper for that slot VME slot 2 When removing the Ethernet board the IACK jumper must be put back in place 4 4 1 Configuring Network Parameters Before using the S2 on a network you must set boot parameters that define network related information These pa
214. etup 3 selects channel 3 automatically locating the correct transport Similarly setup transport 1 selects transport 1 automatically choosing the correct channel The active range of channel and transport numbers is controlled by the mode and group commands Finally you can specify both the channel and transport effectively forcing a par ticular decoder output mapping e g setup 5 transport 2 The above command may generate status messages such as channel ID does not match setup indicating that the setup is not correct for the data currently being decoded This is considered an inconsistent setup and can be remedied by typing setup with no parameters Besides displaying the current setup this will fix it if it s inconsistent The setup command is not allowed during automatic record or playback Command shell Syntax shell Description Escape to the VxWorks shell without interrupting S2 operation This is strictly for diagnostic use only and requires knowledge of the VxWorks shell syntax Type exit when finished to return to ROS Command shutdown Syntax shutdown reboot rcl Description Terminates the execution of ROS and enters the VxWorks shell or with the reboot option causes an immediate reboot This should be used for diagnostic and de bugging purposes only or as the last command before turning off power to the system Warning this instantly disables the 52 recorder halting any record play back or other
215. etup to use at bootup Command tapeid Syntax tapeid STR20 blank Description Sets the Tape ID shown at the top of the console User Parms window During record the Tape ID is written continuously to the S2 auxiliary data channel and during playback it is recovered and displayed along with other parameters such as User Info The Tape ID should be chosen so that it uniquely identifies the set 52 User s Manual OPERATION of tapes being recorded and should not exceed 20 characters For example the Canadian tape labeling convention defines the Tape ID to contain a two letter coun try code the tape type code and a tape set index number with checksum as follows CA 3 0012307 More information on the Canadian tape labeling conventions can be found in the document DRAO RPCS3001 available at http www drao nrc ca web vIbi docs doc3001 ps gz Specify blank to enter an empty Tape ID the tapeid command with no parameters displays its current value The Tape ID should be entered prior to the start of recording and thereafter should not be changed for the remainder of the tape Following this rule will make it easy to determine if all tapes belong to the same set at playback regardless of their current positions If this rule is not followed status code STAT INTAPEID may appear during playback indicating that two transports have different tape IDs but this will have no adverse effect on system operation Command tapeinfo Syntax tapei
216. ext message The user may wish to take action if this condition persists for a long time Some causes of STAT ERRALIGN include ERR NOPBAUX Couldn t decode time from one or more transports sibly ran past end of recorded material ERR TRANLKFAIL Transport head drum servo failed to lock 52 User s Manual OPERATION 62 Mnemonic STAT CHIDMISS Type Fatal error Console Msg with channel ID N is missing Interpretation During playback one or more of the required tapes is missing This status condition is usually accompanied by STAT BADTRANSEL or STAT CHIDDUP If one or more tapes in a set are ever lost it is still possible to play back the remaining tapes but this status message will appear You should manually de select the unused transport before starting playback by typing transport autoselect N where N is the address of the unused transport 63 Mnemonic STAT BADGROUP Type Fatal error Console Msg Tran N tape data not part of curr group Interpretation One or more of the group of currently playing transports contains a tape that is not part of the current group For example suppose the mode is 16x4 1 and we have chosen group 0 transports 0 3 If during playback the tape in transport 3 is found to contain channel 7 data i e channel ID 7 the message Tran 3 tape not part of curr group will appear since that tape channel ID 7 was actually recorded as part of group 1 The same group setti
217. extract playback auxiliary data Form CRC Shows the Mark III 12 bit cyclical redundancy check being encoded similar to a Mark III decoder s front panel display Form output Shows which S2 user data channels are active at the Mark III formatter output This is similar to the C2 data out display in the User I O window Also indicates whether playback or record feed through data is being used Frame rate Shows the Mark III IV formatter frame rate which depends on the S2 user channel data rate 200 Hz for 4 Mbit s data Mark III 400 Hz for 8 Mbit s data and 800 Hz for 16 Mbit s data Mark IV Bad CRCs Shows the number of deliberately incorrect CRCs generated since the last status reset command The S2 software deliberately generates an invalid CRC whenever the S2 diagnostic decoder is not able to properly extract playback time or auxiliary data The S2 hardware also automatically invalidates the Mark III parity bits when ever the data valid signal is low Test chan This is the user data channel currently being tested by the Mark III sync detector next line and data extractor Only one channel is tested at a time Sync detect Shows the percentage of valid sync detected over the previous one second period by a special Mark III sync detect circuit This circuit counts valid syncs found in one output channel of the Mark III formatter The number displayed in square brackets gives a cumulative count of the number of Mark III frames
218. fies the board s address The plates should slide in and out easily Note that if the jumpers are installed correctly when the system is turned on the front panel LEDs will blink on in sequence from left to right DRDp at channel 0 to DRDp at channel 7 Following insertion of a new FORM or DRD board or re loading replacement of the SRAM board the self test may fail or take unusually long on first power on due to software recalibration lead time If the self test fails S2 PT User s Manual MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING with high error rate or bad sync messages re run the test one or two times by typing diag selfl verbose on the console If the test still fails try the following 1 Select bypass signal path setup bypass 2 Foreachinternal signal channel 0 thru 7 type setup N where N is the channel number and then wait until the display indicates Diag dec sync 100 and Est error rate 1 0e 6 If this does not occur within one minute try entering the command dr reset flat If this still does not help there may be a real hardware failure 3 Reset the 52 by turning it off and on or typing shutdown reboot on the console The self test should now pass 6 4 TAM Servicing Other than the transports themselves the TAMs have no mechanical components requiring servicing except the fan filters These filters are accessible via the back panel of the TAMs and should be replaced every three months of continuous operation or if the 52 is
219. first few letters of the command and then moving up or down in the history The Cntl B Cntl F and Cntl P Cntl N keys are alternate cursor controls for terminals without proper cursor keys Refer to Table 4 1 for a complete list of special function keys Re drawing the Screen Sometimes the display may become garbled because of lost characters or other problems with the terminal Since only screen areas that change are normally updated this condition will not fix itself so press Cntl L to re draw the entire screen 4 2 3 3 Batch Files Batch files are lists of console commands prepared in advance and then executed using the batch command They can be created by capturing a sequence of console commands batch 109 or from scratch using a built in full screen editor similar to the Unix vi editor batch edit The S2 stores batch files in non volatile SRAM memory so they will not be lost when the power is turned off Some console commands are meant exclusively for use within batch files such as sleep which performs absolute or relative time delays and echo which writes messages to the screen or waits for the user to press return echo prompt Batch files can be chained but not nested simply by executing one from within another A variation on this is to make a batch file loop continuously by calling itself Batch files can be interrupted at any time by pressing Cntl C once For more information see the description of the batch command on page 4 31
220. first if it is not already stopped The recorder must not be recording or re cord paused The recorder state changes to STATE NOTAPE STATE READ 08 none RESP STATE 0 5 sec none state displayed on console screen Reads the current recorder state which refers to the status of the recorder with respect to tape motion e g stop record play rewind ff notape etc SPEED SET 09 bytel Speed code 0x01 LP 0x02 SLP total data bytes 1 RESP ERR ERR NONE 1 5 sec speed Iplslp Sets the record tape speed On systems with AG2530 and earlier model trans ports the two allowed speeds are LP long play and SLP super long play Systems with AG2550 and later transports support recording in SLP speed only although they will play back tapes recorded in LP SLP is sometimes also called EP The speed SP is not used Recording times are 5096 longer in SLP than LP with some degradation in bit error rate The SPEED SET command is not allowed during record It is not possible to set the playback speed playback speed is automatically determined SPEED READ 10 none RESP SPEED 0 5 sec speed also displayed on console screen Reads the currently selected record tape speed either LP or SLP If the S2 is not currently recording this is the speed that would be used if a 52 User s Manual 11 Command Msg Code Data Expected Resp Timer Duration Eq Console Cmd Description 12 Command Msg Code
221. for proper operation To display the actual temperature measurements type transport display temp or transport status volt 24 Mnemonic STAT TRANDEAD Type Fatal error Console Msg Req d transpts nnn are off dead Interpretation One or more currently selected transports are off or dead Dead transports show up as in the transport display This means that the Recorder Control Computer is unable to communicate with the transport possibly due to breaks in the TCL serial cable or failure of the Transport Control Processor Transports which are off show up as in the Transport window Some reasons for a transport to turn itself off include excessive condensation temperature out of range see STAT and internal hardware failures You can try turning it on again using transport N power on or the front panel power button labeled operate on AG2530s 25 Mnemonic STAT TRANBADVOLT Type Fatal error Console Msg Tran nnn 5V 5V supply bad C4 Interpretation One or more transports are not receiving proper 55 V supplies over the C4 cable The acceptable voltage ranges are 4 1 to 5 5 V for the 5 V supply and 4 1 to 5 5 V for the 5 V supply Check the C4 cable connections and the interface circuits on either side transport DRD board In particular the transport 5 V supplies pass through chokes on the DRD board which tend to act as fuses and can blow To display the actual supply vol
222. for recording so that the correct number of trans ports is selected The precise mode will be set automatically after playback starts In addition to the numerous regular operational modes there are several test modes used to verify proper connection of the C1 or C2 cable and to perform other system diagnostics Under certain conditions the playback mode may be different from the record mode as specified by the playmodemap defaults file parameter The MODE SET command is not allowed during playback and can only be used to change to modes with the same total data rate during record For any other mode changes the S2 must be stopped first See also the GROUP SET command which should be used after MODE SET to select the appropriate group of transports to use in low bandwidth modes MODE READ 16 none RESP MODE 0 5 sec mode also displayed on console screen 52 User s Manual Description 17 Command Msg Code Data Expected Resp Timer Duration Eq Console Cmd Description 18 Command Msg Code Data Expected Resp Timer Duration Eq Console Cmd Description 19 Command Msg Code Data Expected Resp Timer Duration Eq Console Cmd Description APPENDIX A Reads the currently selected recorder mode During auto playback the correct mode is set automatically based on information encoded on the tape However the initial mode in effect when playback starts must have the same total data rate
223. forms a dumpmem for each transport on every system boot so you should still be able to transfer recent values for the EEPROM parameters just by carrying out the second step The command config 1s long can be used to check the date of the latest service info dump for a particular transport look for a dump file name containing the old TCP serial number In the event that the configuration save area becomes full you may start to see error messages when dumping service info if so you should type config delete all to erase all dump files and start fresh 6 4 2 System Service Calls The S2 console displays an estimate of bit error rate BER during playback see Section 4 2 8 1 In normal operation this will indicate an estimated BER of 1 x 1077 or less tape speed LP or 1 x 10 or less tape speed SLP Although these values may occasionally be exceeded for short periods in the event of regular occurrence S2 PT User s Manual MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING of BER estimates over spec investigation of the cause should be initiated This investigation consists of the steps indicated in Figure 6 2 6 4 3 Transport Setup For Off Line Tests Normal operation of the transport requires that it be supplied with clock and synchronization signals from the cable connection on the back of the transport In a test configuration these signals are supplied by the DSCM via C3C4 C5 extender cables available from CRESTech SGL as part of the Transport Servicing
224. from 1 to 9 and if additional codes are necessary the letters from A to Z will be used See Chapter 5 for a complete list of tape types and their codes You can get the most up to date list of type codes directly from the S2 by typing tapet ype typecodes assuming you have the latest software version The tapetype parameter in the system defaults file gives the default tape type 52 User s Manual OPERATION setting to use at bootup Note that the tape type will revert to its default value as in the defaults file next time the system is rebooted unless you specify default which causes the defaults file to be automatically updated Command batch Syntax batch verify STR filename edit STR lt filename gt autoexec delete STR filename log STR lt filename gt end Is long Description Begins execution of a batch file or initiates other functions such as batch file editing or verification e g batch myfile executes the batch file myfile Use batch 15 to obtain a list of available batch files If long is specified the listing includes file sizes and modify dates The edit option calls up a full screen editor similar to Unix vi for creating new files or editing existing batch files See Section 4 2 7 for more information on the editor Use the verify option after editing to quickly check the syntax of the entire batch file An alternative to editing is the 1og option e g batch log common This copies all sub
225. fset to the current tape time Unlike absolute alignment there are no special synchronization requirements for the command itself However the tapes must already be aligned to the same tape time or relative alignment is not allowed if necessary type align selfalign first For example to shift the tapes ahead by 29 1795453 seconds use align 00 00 29 1795453 The realign option can be used to re align the tapes to the reference time chosen during the previous alignment operation should one or more transports become un aligned but this form of alignment normally happens automatically The most common reason for a tape alignment operation to fail is that the data for the time being aligned to does not actually exist on one or more tapes In this case the affected transports might encounter blank tape or an old or different recording or they might run into the beginning or end of tape In each case status code STAT ALIGNFAIL will appear with an appropriate error code see Page 4 73 Blank tape encountered while aligning will result in an End of Data EOD indication and playback will stop EOD is defined as approximately 30 seconds or more of blank tape encountered during positioning or alignment slewing in the forward direction The affected transports will be left positioned a few seconds before the actual end of data The align command should not be used to implement delay and delay rate corrections at a VLBI correlator as this may interfe
226. ftware should not rely on the numeric status codes but use the status mnemonic instead To interpret a status code user software should decode it using STATUS DETAIL or STATUS DECODE and then take action based on the mnemonic a string of the form STAT The mnemonic appears at the start of the status message and can be ex S2 PT User s Manual APPENDIX A tracted by reading all characters up to but not including the first colon The message which follows can be written to the screen or recorded in a log file To avoid having to issue extra RCL commands whenever testing status code mnemonics user software should build a translation table in advance using repeated calls to STATUS DECODE Status Response Codes E indicates error F indicates fatal error indicates clear on read 1 STAT DIAGIP Diagnostic test is in progress 2 STAT_DIAGDONE Diagnostic test completed successfully 3 STAT DIAGFAIL EFC Diagnostic test failed diag error code xxx xxx STAT VMEPOWFAIL EF VME xxx power supply voltage out of range 5 STAT NOFORM EF Formatter board marked not present 6 STAT NODRD EF DRD xxx marked not present 7 STAT NOUIC EF UI board marked not present 8 STAT_FORMFAIL EF Formatter board failure reason follows 9 STAT_DRDFAIL EF DRDxxx failure reason f
227. g of these cables is as follows Brown or Black AC Line Blue or White AC Neutral Green Chassis Ground 2 7 External Transformer A schematic for a 240 120 VAC transformer circuit is shown in Figure 2 6 It consists of a 500 VA 2 1 transformer The 240 volt supply current is limited by a 3 A slow blow fuse The 120 volt output current is limited by a4 A fuse 240VAC PLUG TO 240V WALL OUTLET HAMMOND 1700 TRANSFORMER RED MM LY WV rH iod 2501 PANEL RECEPTACLE SLOW BLON BLACK 1201 439 4A 250V YELLOW 9v AC NEUTRAL Warning Transformer circuit is designed to power one S2 i e two TAM racks only Both TAM racks together require a supply of about 400 VA peak Figure 2 6 240V to 120V Transformer Circuit 52 User s Manual INSTALLATION 52 Recorder User Parms playback 24 1998 217 19 18 56 peratingl Sustem Tape ID Recorder mode 16x8 1 br Soe ae Station delay no 1 Hz inl Transports Diag dec in channel play Ox 11 Diag dec time XXX XX XX XX XX 1 1 Diag dec sync OX uncalib 2 11 3 EJ User data valid Est err rate gt 1 0 2 8 ch 4 CI Tape speed data valid 0 00 128 Mb s 5 CI Tape position 0 00 01 01 s Decoder Xbar 01234567 G 1 cuj
228. ge 46 ERR_ALCRSBOUND Tape alignment crossed recording boundary 47 ERR_ILFNAME Illegal file name max length 6 dot 3 alphanum only 48 ERR DELNONZER Station delay is non zero must be zero for this operation 49 Operation preempted due to rpmon state change 50 ERR BADGROUP Transport is not part of current group 51 ERR_OPINPROG Requested operation is already in progress 52 ERR_TRANLKFAIL Transport servo failed to lock 53 ERR_TRANNOSEL No transports selected 54 ERR_TRANBADSEL Transport selection incorrect for current mode amp group 55 ERR_ILAUTORP Operation not allowed during automatic record play 56 ERR_INSTATE Recorder state is inconsistent or illegal 57 ERR_SCPLLBADMODE System clock PLL is set to the wrong mode 58 ERR_NOTAUTORP Operation valid only during automatic record play 59 ERR_DRDBADRTPT Invalid address combination of DRD board s 60 ERR_WRITEPROT Software write protect is on cannot record edit defaults amp reboot 61 ERR_ALSLEWMANY Too many slewing iterations performed check transports 62 ERR_EOD Encountered end of data EOD 63 ERR_SELF1INPROG Operation not allowed while self test1 in progress 90 ERR_TCPUNEX Unexpected response code from transport s 91 ERR_TCPBADLEN Wrong returned packet length from transport s 92 ERR_TCPTIMEOUT Transport read attempt timed out 93 ERR_TCPDEAD One or more transports are dead 94 ERR TCPOFF One or more transports are off 101 ERR TCPOPFAIL Transport com
229. group STAT BADGROUP 65 Mnemonic STAT NOPBAUX Type Error Console Msg Can t decode aux data time from tran Interpretation During playback auxiliary data or time could not be decoded from the indicated transport after trying for 15 seconds Although time is part of the auxiliary data it is easier to decode since it is treated specially and has its own CRC Only one transport is listed but the condition may apply to others as well The tape could be blank or there may be a problem with the transport or the DRD This message appears only during automatic playback 52 User s Manual OPERATION 66 Mnemonic STAT BADPBTRANSEL Type Fatal error Console Msg set mode xxx wrong tran Interpretation During automatic playback the S2 is unable to switch to the mode that the tapes were recorded in because the wrong number of transports is currently active This means that the current mode has a total data rate that is different from the mode used for recording You must always select a mode with the same total data rate as used at record time before starting playback Stop the S2 select an appropriate mode and restart playback The simplest way to choose a mode is to use 16xN 1 where N is the same number of transports as used at record time The S2 will automatically switch to the correct mode after playback starts 67 Mnemonic STAT INTAPEID Type Error Console Msg Tran N amp N have different tape IDs
230. h a positive numeric diagnostic code or negative error code 2 8 3 Record Playback Performance Test This test allows users to verify that the S2 is functioning as specified i e that data is recorded and reproduced at a specified bit error rate of less than 1 x 107 speed LP or 1 x 10 speed SLP average on interchange 52 User s Manual INSTALLATION For speed SLP which must be used on systems with AG2550 transports users should check that the record play back performance test gives a bit error rate of less than 1 x 10 averaged across eight transports or 3 x 10 individually Success of this test verifies that the record and playback signal systems are operating according to specification and that the mechanical alignment of the transports has not been disturbed during shipping The time required to complete the test is about 90 minutes Before starting the record playback test insert writable tapes into all eight transports For information on what kind of tape can be used in the S2 please refer to Chapter 5 You should ensure that the tape type setting is correct and matches the type of tape you are using for the test by entering the command tapetype N default where N is one of the tape type codes given in Chapter 5 Then run the batch file berlp tst for speed LP or berslp tst for speed SLP by typing one of the following commands batch berlp tst batch berslp tst The batch file sets up the system as follows e 52 mode set to 16
231. h files and configuration changes you may have made It is sometimes possible to avoid this problem by reloading only specific parts of the SRAM Before pressing f5 to start the transfer press f3 to select a particular partition root bin exo dr config tcpbin vxworks etc or all for the entire SRAM For some software upgrades only a few of the partitions may need to be updated which ones will be indicated in the release notes supplied with the upgrade and for certain SRAM failures only a single partition may need to be reloaded Important batch or configuration files can also be saved and reloaded individually over the network to a suitably configured remote host use the full remote pathname syntax in the editor s w or e commands e g w boot host s2dir file bat or in the VxWorks shell s copy command SRAM reloads are possible and indeed much faster using the network instead of the serial port but this requires a properly configured host computer and a different version of the SRAM data file For more information see Stp ftp sgl crestech ca pub s2 doc appnotes HostSetup Transport Programming Following a ROS software upgrade it may be necessary to perform an extra step to upgrade the software which runs on the custom 8051 processor inside the transports This software is stored in electrically erasable memory EEPROM and can only be changed with the S2 booted and running normally Reboot the S2 after completing the SRAM reloa
232. hange the group number during regular auto matic playback or record stop the S2 between group changes This command is typically used following a mode command For information on how to play back the remaining tapes when one or more tapes in a group are damaged or lost see Page 4 9 Command help Syntax help STR lt cmd gt Description Lists all available console commands or provides a brief one line description of a specific command Command log Syntax log clear stop start lecho STR lt txt gt display STR lt types gt NUM lt line gt tail fullscreen tofile STR lt filename gt typecodes auto dv tim ing enable disable entry verifier Description Controls the ROS internal log facility The log is a time stamped list of status changes and other events accumulated during all modes of operation It is a circular list so that when the log is full the oldest entries are gradually overwritten When using the console the log is useful to keep a concrete record of unusual events without the need for continuous operator vigilance It is a diagnostic facility only and does not replace the normal VLBI observation log Logging would typically be used as follows First before starting a new sequence of S2 operations the log may optionally be cleared using log clear If you don t clear the log you may have to look through a lot of old log entries later At any time during or after a sequence of operations use log display
233. haracter does not exist ti does not reverse te number of labels on screen start at 1 odd parity tum off automatic margins send next input character for ptys move cursor right n positions turn off xoff xon handshaking turn on automatic margins scroll forward n lines scroll backward n lines turn on xoff xon handshaking upper case only move cursor up n lines x off character default DC3 x on character default DC1 graphic character set pairs aAbBcC def VT100 end alternate character set add new blank line terminal has automatic margins start alternate character set backspace if not H audible signal bell terminal can backspace with H back tab le backspace wraps from column 0 to last col clear to beginning of line inclusive clear to end of display clear to end of line set cursor column horizontal position clear screen and home cursor screen relative cursor motion to row m col n number of columns in a line RETURN change scrolling region to lines m thru n clear all tab stops set cursor row vertical position milliseconds of bs delay needed default 0 milliseconds of cr delay needed default 0 milliseconds of ff delay needed default 0 milliseconds of nl delay needed default 0 ms of horizontal tab delay needed default 0 ms of vertical tab delay needed default 0 display may be retained above the screen display may be retained below the screen 52 User s Manual dc dl dm do ds eA ec ed ei eo es
234. her interpretations Table B 5 shows which user channels are active in each 52 mode Some 52 modes exist specifically to support certain VLBI equipment combinations including the VSOP and RadioAstron Space VLBI missions Additional documen tation on modes for specific applications is available upon request from CRESTech SGL and from our FTP site ftp fip sgl crestech ca In addition to the numerous regular operational modes there are 3 types of test modes each available at various data rates The cltest modes are used in record applications to verify proper connection of the C1 cable The user s external equipment must be capable of generating the prescribed UI test vector sequence The presence of STAT UICVERFAIL status errors while in C1 test mode indicates a cable fault The c2test modes are used in playback applications to verify proper connection of the C2 cable The user s external equipment must be capable of verifying the UI test vector sequence generated by the S2 Finally the diag 52 User s Manual OPERATION modes inject the UI test vector at the UI data inputs for S2 internal testing purposes replacing any user data This is similar to the form diag on command but uses a different test sequence Use the uic berc command to verify the UI test vector Unlike regular modes the test modes do not have a firm notion of total bandwidth so the defaults file parameter diagnumtran is used to control the associated bandw
235. ic Parms rec24 1998 217 21 09 46 Operating System Form time 8 194 200243 000 Recorder mode 8 8 1 br Form aux bbbbbbbbbbbb0052 Station delay no 1 Hz inl Transports Form cc Diag dec 3 in channel 3 play 20 02 43 001 Diag dec time 194 20 02 43 00 1 20 02 43 00 Form output play 0 7 Diag dec sync 1005 2 20 02 43 00 Frame rate 400 Hz 3 20 02 43 00 Bad CRCs 68 Est err rate 7 8e 4 4 ch 4 11 Test chan 0 X data valid 99 84 64 Mb s 5 11 Sync detect 100 00 0 Decoder 01234567 6 11 A E 7 11 lt lt E gt 11 1 1 1 gt mk3 form enable formatter is enabled gt play gt mk3 gt E Chelp 1 time 1 Cmode 1 Ctapeid 1 user 1 record 1 play l C ETC 1 Figure 4 8 Sample ROS Screen Mark III 12 user digits are taken from the first 12 characters of user info field 1 Only digits from 0 to 9 are allowed any other character is mapped to hex b It is advisable to avoid too many zeroes in a row in the auxiliary data The hardware ID code at the end of the auxiliary data string is set at record time using the mk3 hwid command The default value can be set in the defaults file using the mk3hwid parameter initially set to 52 for 5527 The Mark III auxiliary data will be all 0 s if the S2 diagnostic decoder cannot properly
236. idth i e how many transports to test diagnumtran should be set to the number of transports being used with a particular S2 system nor mally 8 The mode command is not allowed during regular automatic playback and can only be used to change to modes with the same total data rate during automatic record For any other mode changes the S2 must be stopped first The dfltmode defaults file parameter determines the initial recorder mode to use at bootup Command pause Syntax pause Description Puts the S2 recorder into play pause or record pause state For normal operation this provides no appreciable benefits and should not be used use stop instead The S2 must currently be recording or playing and must not be aligning or po sitioning Unlike stop time spent in pause counts against head lifetime To pre vent excessive head and tape wear the transports automatically stop after pausing for more than about 3 minutes Command play Syntax play manual Description Starts playback The recorder must be stopped rewinding or fast forwarding oth erwise the play command is not allowed Tape alignment self alignment is per formed automatically to align the individual transports to each other and to obtain a single coherent tape time After this the user may issue align commands to further align the recorder to a desired epoch or delay commands or RCL ERRMES commands to perform VLBI delay tracking During playback the soft w
237. ikely that in fact only a single bit is in error We also assume a uniform distribution of random errors These assumptions break down for very low and very high error rates and for extended burst errors In practice however the estimate has been found to be quite close to the true bit error rate in most cases Because sync words represent only a small proportion of the data a relatively long integration period is needed to obtain a useful estimate The integration period used 6 seconds gives a minimum measurement resolution of around 1 0 x 107 There is also an artificial upper limit of 1 0 x 10 imposed to avoid the inaccurate upper estimation range System performance may be acceptable even with relatively high error rates e g up to 3 0 x 107 since much of the bad data would likely be flagged as invalid This could for example be caused by a longitudinal tape scratch that destroys a particular sync word in each frame Nonetheless inves tigative action should probably be taken see Section 6 4 Transport Re placement and Servicing data valid This shows the percentage of valid decoded data over the previous one second period obtained by integrating the data validity DV signal of the currently active internal data channels During playback the measurement includes all decoded data i e up to 8 internal data channels 128 Mbits s total The exact amount of data included is the same as for estimated error rate above
238. illustrate the timing of the test vectors relative to the other signals on the C1 and C2 cables B 3 S2 Control Interface B 3 1 RCL Serial Link C6 Cable The RCL serial interface 18 standard RS 232C The link between the 52 and the external control computer may be either RS 232C or multi drop RS 485 with the addition of an RS 232C to RS 485 conversion box supplied by the user external to the S2 Use of RS 232C requires a dedicated serial port on the external control computer for each S2 controlled while multi drop RS 485 operation allows many S2 s to be controlled from a single external control computer serial port Alternatively Internet socket connections can be used instead of serial cables if the 52 is connected to an Ethernet network The S2 RCL port is a male DB 25 connector configured for DTE Data Terminal Equipment operation The baud rate is selectable at standard values between 2400 and 57600 baud default 19200 baud The maximum distance between the S2 and the external control computer should not exceed 15 meters Table B 6 shows the pin assignments for the DB 25 connector Note that the RTS signal is asserted high TRUE just before each response message transmitted by the S2 and asserted low following the transmission Thus the RTS signal can be used in multi drop RS 485 interfacing to switch on and off the RS 485 tri state line drivers The CTS DCD and DTR signals are not used B 32 RCC Console Cable C7 Cable C7 is a stan
239. ion pe CM el Delete character to the left of cursor kb f1 f8 Enter softkey k8 f9 or Cntl X Delete previous word k9 f10 or Cnt G Scroll long softkeys to the left Esc 1 9 0 Simulate pressing 1 0 10 Tab or Space Complete command Cntl P Cursor up Previous history ku Cntl N Cursor down Next history kd Cntl B Cursor left Backward kl Cntl F Cursor right Forward kr Delete or Cnt D Delete character under cursor kD Esc Esc Clear entire line Cntl A Move to beginning of line Cntl E Move to end of line Cntl W Delete to beginning of line Cntl T Toggle insert mode Cntl L Re draw entire screen Cntl C Interrupt current operation Cntl Re boot the system Table 4 1 Console Special Function Keys 52 User s Manual OPERATION 4 2 3 2 Command Editing and History The S2 command line editing and history features are similar to the Unix tesh and MSDOS 4DOS programs Commands can be edited as you type them or you can recall any of the last 100 commands and edit or re enter them Use the left right cursor keys to move around within a command and the up down cursor keys to move around within the command history Characters typed are inserted at the current cursor position and the backspace key removes the character to the left of the cursor The f9 key or Cntl X deletes the previous word and pressing escape twice in a row clears the entire line You can search for specific commands by typing the
240. ions link used for computerized control of the S2 recorder and other devices such as the S2 Data Acquisition System Here and in the rest of this section the word recorder refers to both S2 Record Terminals RTs and Playback Terminals PTs These specifications are subject to change at any time numbers are decimal unless preceded by Ox which indicates hexadecimal The S2 RCL port is a male DB25 connector wired as an RS 232C DTE Data Terminal Equipment device It should be connected to a DCE Data Communication Equipment device this is the opposite of the console port Some computers such as IBM PCs have only DTE serial ports and will require a null modem cable which exchanges the receive and transmit data lines pins 2 amp 3 The normal RCL communications parameters are 19200 baud no parity 8 data bits 1 stop bit On S2 systems that have an Ethernet connection equivalent RCL access can be performed over the network using Internet TCP sockets port number 1025 The RCL uses a binary request response packet protocol In this scheme the external control computer issues requests using a specific command format and waits for a response from the S2 Only one request may be active at any time and for each request there is exactly one response Responses are immediate or almost immediate Those operations for which there would be a significant delay return an immediate acknowledgement and then indicate their progress in the S2 system
241. is a special tape it will auto stop at the end of the first section about 9 minutes If you need more time you should rewind the tape and then repeat steps 2 and 3 Should you find the alignment tape is in the wrong section it will need to be manually advanced between sections in either direction Mark the spine label to indicate the number of uses Replace the tape after 25 uses or if it suffers edge damage as could be caused by a severely misaligned transport If no Matsushita Panasonic alignment tape is available and it would take too long to obtain one you may use the 52 alignment tape from part A 2 Putthe transport into manual play transport N play manual 3 Turn off gain controls and tracking calibration by running the agcoff batch file supplied with ROS software version 3 1 and later If you do not have this batch file refer to the listings of batch files at the end of this section and type it in batch agcoff 4 Adjust the P3 post Turn the post slowly clockwise until the end of frame portion of the displayed waveform is visibly distorted see Figures 6 5 and 6 6 Note the position of the P3 post Then tum the post counter clockwise until the waveform first improves and then shows distortion to a similar degree Note the position ofthe post and turn the post clockwise again to the midpoint of the previous two adjustment positions Always turn the post slowly and try not to press down with the tool while observing
242. is one of the quantities available at playback time via the tapeinfo command In System Clock PLL 1hz mode used for playback the delay measurement will only be approximately the same as the delay setting within a few hundred bits The display will be highlighted whenever the delay error is greater than about 60 microseconds 1000 bits at a data rate of 16 Mbits s and status message STAT SCPLLUNLOCK will appear indicating that the System Clock Phase Lock Loop is not locked If no user 1 Hz reference tick is present 1 Hz in will be displayed In System Clock PLL errmes mode used for playback the user 1 Hz ref erence is not used so there will normally be no delay measurement However should a 1 Hz tick be supplied the delay measurement will still appear even though it is used for nothing except display Diag dec N in Identifies which decoder DRD is currently acting as the diagnostic decoder and the source of the data it is decoding There are 5 possible input sources corre sponding to 5 of the 6 diagnostic data paths Figure 4 5 play transport playback rec transport record byp transport bypass ahook analog direct hookup and dhook digital direct hookup For each path it is possible to select a channel num 4 19 52 User s Manual OPERATION ber 0 to 7 and a transport number 0 to 7 The channel number identifies which 52 internal data channel is being decoded and sent on to the UI for output The cha
243. is range If no oscilloscope is available the adjustment may be carried out using 52 console screen dis plays instead C Re evaluate the performance using the S2 alignment tape as in part A Hopefully the ad justment results in improved performance Users with access to the appropriate Matsushita Panasonic service manual may wish to read over the section on tape guide post adjustment for reference only AG2510 Service Manual section 3 4 2 AG2520 Service Manual section 3 4 2 4 AG2530 Service Manual section 2 2 4 or K Mechanism Service Manual sections 3 1 and 3 2 for AG2550 Part A Measure Baseline Performance 1 Insert an 52 alignment tape This is a tape recorded by an S2 transport known to be in good calibration A good way to obtain an 52 alignment tape is to use the tape from the post installation checkout record playback test Section 2 8 which had the best overall performance lowest combined interchange and non interchange bit error rates You should use a tape recorded by the same type of transport as the one being adjusted For AG2510 transports only ST 126 SE 180 or shorter tapes may be used and the record speed should not be SLP 2 The transport under test should be the only transport selected type transport N Here N is the number of the transport to be adjusted 3 Put the transport into manual play rewinding first if necessary rewind play manual align selfalign S2 PT User s Manual MAINTENA
244. is similar to console operation except that there is no console display to look at Instead desired display quantities must be requested using specific RCL commands The only request that needs to be made regularly about every 1 to 5 seconds is the STATUS command which is the RCL equivalent of the console status window Other quantities can be requested whenever desired to verify current operation e g STATE READ to read the recorder state or TIME READ to verify the system time TIME READ PB for playback tape time The RCL is not meant to be used when performing system configuration or debugging since it deliberately has a somewhat simplified interface It tries to present the view of a single recorder with little mention of the fact that there are actually 8 individual transports In rare instances this may be too restrictive so there is a special RCL facility to execute single console command strings thus allowing low level access Refer to the RCL protocol specification given in Appendix A for more information The S2 RCL port is wired as an RS 232C DTE device and should be connected to a DCE device this is the opposite of the console port Some computers such as IBM PCs have only DTE serial ports and will require a null modem cable Multi drop RS 485 connection is possible with the use of an external conversion box On S2 systems that have an Ethernet board an equivalent RCL connection can be made over the network using internet sock
245. isplayed by typing powermon See also STAT TRANBADVOLT 5 Mnemonic STAT NOFORM Type Fatal error Console Msg Formatter board marked not present Interpretation The Formatter board cannot be accessed by the Recorder Control Computer VME read attempt gives bus error It is either not present or has failed 6 Mnemonic STAT NODRD Type Fatal error Console Msg DRD nnn marked not present Interpretation One or more required Data Recovery Deformatter boards cannot be accessed by the Recorder Control Computer VME read attempt gives bus error They are either not present or have failed The diagnumtran parameter in the system defaults file determines how many DRD boards are required to be present usually 8 except in scaled down S2 systems 7 Mnemonic STAT NOUIC Type Fatal error Console Msg UI board marked not present Interpretation The User Interface board cannot be accessed by the Recorder Control Computer VME read attempt gives bus error It is either not present or has failed 8 Mnemonic STAT FORMFAIL Type Fatal error Console Msg Formatter failure reason follows Interpretation The Formatter board is operating incorrectly probably due to a hardware failure This is a general OK FAIL indicator for the Formatter board and is a summary of other status conditions which appear later in the display 9 Mnemonic STAT DRDFAIL Type Fatal error Console Msg DRD nnn failure reason follows Interpr
246. isted tape types are six digits long of the form NNNMMM where NNN is the write current for LP and MMM is the write current for SLP total data bytes length of string 1 max 7 Indicates the current tape type setting RESP MK3 FORM 52 User s Manual Msg Code Data Description 155 Description 160 Response Msg Code Data Description 171 Response Msg Code Data Description 180 Response Msg Code Response Msg Code Data APPENDIX A 151 bytel Boolean value 0x00 Mark III formatter disabled 0 01 Mark formatter enabled total data bytes 1 Indicates whether the 5275 internal Mark III format generator is turned on or off See also MK3 FORM SET MK3 FORM READ RESP TRANSPORT TIMES 155 bytel number of transports included in list always 8 byte2 Table of transport times corresponding to transports 0 through 7 re spectively The set of times for each transport consists of 18 bytes and in cludes one 16 bit unsigned integer and four 32 bit unsigned integers as follows bytel byte2 16 bit unsigned transport serial number A value of zero indicates the transport is dead or off or the serial number is unknown byte3 byte6 32 bit unsigned total on time since manufacture in minutes A value of zero indicates unknown byte7 bytel0 32 bit unsigned total head use time in minutes since manufacture value of zero indicates unknown bytell
247. ive terms For example to increment the seconds by 2 time 5 2 This form of time setting will probably be common since as already mentioned the default time at boot up should be correct to within a few seconds If the default time happens to be perfectly correct or you are not particularly interested in setting the exact time the time can be approved without changing it by typing time validate If the S2 system is connected to a network the time can be obtained from one of the other hosts on the network using time setremote This can also be set to occur automatically every time the system is turned on see the description of the time command on Page 4 50 for more details The time command also has a useful facility for converting between day numbers as used by the S2 and the more usual month day representation Enter time convert to display the current time and date in month day format or specify a date in one format and it will be converted to the other format Mode and Group Setting The S2 recorder mode is set using the mode command The correct mode to use depends on the number of user data channels and data rate required for your particular application The S2 is capable of individual channel data rates of 4 8 16 or 32 Mbits s at 1 or 2 bit quantization with either 1 2 4 8 or 16 active data channels subject to the restriction that the total data rate must be from 16 to 128 Mbits s in multiples of 16 Under the S2 mode naming schem
248. k the README file in this directory for downloading instructions Also read the release notes supplied with each new software version For information S2 PT User s Manual MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING and files necessary to run ROSCO on PCFS Linux computers using dosemu see Stp ftp sgl crestech ca pub s2 pcfs dosemu To reload the S2 software follow these basic steps e Connect a serial cable between the S2 console port C7 and COM port 1 of your PC Note COM 2 can be used if necessary by changing the port selection in ROSCO press shift f5 then f1 While running ROSCO reboot the S2 one way is to turn the power off and on Immediately enter the boot monitor by hitting the space bar during the initial boot countdown In the boot monitor type restore e Select the ROSCO file menu by pressing shift f9 If desired press f3 to specify a partition name then press f5 to transfer data to the Static RAM You will be prompted for the file name of the SRAM image to transfer enter the name of the bxo file for the appropriate software version e g b970207 bxo The transfer should start immediately and will show its progress by displaying the number of bytes transmitted so far Reloading the entire 3 Megabyte Static RAM takes about one hour at the default console baud rate of 9600 baud Reloading using PCFS and dosemu takes longer up to 3 hours due to the slow speed of the emulator Note that a full SRAM reload will delete any batc
249. l SIHZ REC input on the C1 cable At power up the initial system time is taken from a battery backed up clock on the RCC and will usually be correct to within a few seconds However the time is not considered validated until it has been set or approved by the user As long as the time is not validated two highlighted question marks appear beside the time on the console display and a warning is issued when the S2 52 User s Manual OPERATION is commanded to record When setting the time the station delay measurement displayed in the upper right of the console screen should be 0 otherwise the time setting may be inaccurate If some value other than 0 is shown type delay 0 to zero the station delay The console time command can be used to enter an absolute time as in the following example time 093 23 18 00 Here 093 is the day number from 001 to 365 366 for leap years and the following fields are hours minutes and seconds The day number can be omitted in which case the current day is assumed Absolute time commands such as this one should always be issued immediately after the 1 Hz tick they represent i e above you would press return just after the reference clock s seconds digits flipped to 00 Setting the year requires a separate command as follows time y 1996 This will almost never be necessary since the year should already be correct It is possible to individually set any time field not just the year in both absolute and relat
250. l positions estimated error rate AGC signal level tape channel ID transport temperature and head use time For a complete list see the description of the transport window on Page 4 24 Another function of the transport command is to select sets of transports that are different from the automatic selections normally made by the mode and group commands This may be useful in unusual situations such as when one of the tapes in a tape set has been lost but you still wish to play back the remaining ones For example transport 3 6 7 selects only transports 3 6 and 7 and transport 11 7 selects all transports that are not dead or off except number 7 After such a com mand type transport autoselect to return to the set of transports that were automatically selected The status option shows internal information about the transports For example transport status volt shows measurements of the 5 V supplies from the C4 cable plus the current temperature and AGC signal level transport status version shows the current software version running on the 8051 custom processor inside the transports Most other status information is a duplicate of information available in the Transport window via transport display The assignaddr option is used to set or change a transport s address which must be done every time a transport or TCP board is replaced The address is what distinguishes control messages to different transports and must match the
251. l result in an End of Data EOD indication and the actual position will be left a few seconds before the end of data around 1 00 00 for this example EOD 18 defined as approximately 30 seconds or more of blank tape encountered during positioning or alignment slewing in the forward direction During positioning the State window shows POSITIONING Although there may be up to 8 tapes and therefore 8 different positions we try to work with a single position value whenever possible since the group of currently active trans ports will usually be in almost the same location If it becomes necessary to specify different positions for individual transports more than one position value can be given on the command line Each successive position applies to the next selected transport and if not enough positions are given the first value is re used e g In mode 16x4 1 group 1 transports 4 through 7 selected if three position values are given they apply to transports 4 5 and 6 respectively and transport 7 re uses the first value There are two ways to perform positioning absolute and relative In addition there are two special positioning functions reestablish and preset Absolute po sitioning moves the tapes to a specific position regardless of their current location If the current position is not known the tapes are first automatically rewound to the beginning Relative positioning moves the tapes a given amount relative to their current position
252. l result in an error Relative positioning moves the tapes a given amount relative to their cur rent position The current position does not need to be known for relative positioning to work Positive position values move forward and negative val The position preset feature will also make the position known 52 User s Manual 36 Command Msg Code Data Expected Resp Timer Duration Eq Console Cmd Description 37 Command Msg Code Data Expected Resp Timer Duration Eq Console Cmd APPENDIX A ues move backward The position re establish feature allows an unknown position to be deter mined without moving the tapes to a specific absolute location The tapes are rewound and then automatically returned to their original position as com puted from the distance covered during rewind and the position is again con sidered known This may be useful following a power failure when the S2 has lost track of the current tape position or when non rewound tapes are in serted It can also be used to accurately re determine the current position if cumulative errors have built up in the position measurement after a long pe riod of repetitive tape activity The position preset feature allows users to set the current position without actually moving the tapes This should only be used when the cur rent position is considered unknown by the S2 and the user has detailed knowledge of what the position should
253. lation checkout record playback test Section 2 8 Required Batch Files The following three batch files are used for tape guide adjustment agcoff agcon agc noscope These come standard with ROS software version 3 1 and later but users with older software can easily type them 6 16 52 User s Manual MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING in This can be done using the batch edit command Alternatively they may simply be typed line for line wherever the batch file is called agcoff Set conditions for tape guide post adjustment scope method transport tracking manual phase2 transport tracking auto phasel dr cal all hold transport tracking recalibrate transport off dr all disable all gainset 25 agcon Undo settings made by agoff or agc_noscope transport all tracking auto transport all on dr all enable dr cal all continue def syncerrlocate disable agc_noscope Set conditions for tape guide post adjustment dr agc all enable dr cal all continue transport agc on transport tracking transport tracking recalibrate def syncerrlocate enable Wait while tracking recalibrates wait drcal de cal LL he d no scope method auto S2 PT User s Manual S2 SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY 8 S2 SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY Operation Physical Format User data rates LP Bit error rate SLP Bit error ratet Tape
254. lidity signals Extractions are synchronous to the 1 Hz tick frame 0 with an optional positive offset of up to 255 bits The data extractor can be used to check proper connection to a data acquisition system before re cording For example the data acquisition hardware could be configured to generate a sine wave of appropriate frequency at the sampler inputs which should appear as a square wave in the S2 data extractor display UI feed through described next should be turned on The feedthru option selects the UI feed through diagnostic path which results in all Cl cable input data being duplicated on the C2 cable In feed through mode the DC bias UI BERC and data extract facilities examine feed through data instead of data from the decoders DRDs This ensures that all user data channels are accessible and provides the most direct way to examine data from the C1 cable 52 User s Manual OPERATION Command uncue Syntax uncue Description Returns to regular playback from cue or review Currently selected transports must be cueing or reviewing Should not be used for regular operation Command unpause Syntax unpause Description Returns to regular playback or record from pause Currently selected transports must be in play pause or record pause Should not be used for regular operation Command unreview Syntax unreview Description Returns to regular playback from cue or review Currently selected transports must be cu
255. lkoutrate 4 27 4 56 config 4 31 Configuration 4 2 See also ROS configuration Console 4 4 command entry 4 5 command history 4 7 commands 4 29 display 4 4 4 18 re drawing the screen 4 7 soft keys 4 5 consolelock 4 60 Crossbar 4 21 4 32 4 35 4 81 cue 4 32 Data Acquisition System 4 54 4 56 A 31 Data extract 4 40 4 54 Data Recovery and Deformatter See DRD Data Signal and Control Module See DSCM Day numbers 4 11 DC bias 4 35 4 39 4 54 def 4 32 default 4 32 Defaults file 4 17 4 32 C 1 delay 4 33 See also Station delay Delay tracking 4 30 4 33 dfltmode 4 41 Dhook 4 19 diag 4 34 Diagnostics 4 3 diagnumtran 4 15 4 41 4 80 Index 1 Disable C1 C2 data 4 56 Displays 4 4 dnld 4 35 dr 4 35 DRD Data 4 15 DRD Data Recovery and Deformatter 1 2 6 3 number of 4 63 4 80 replacement 6 4 DSCM Data Signal and Control Module 1 2 echo 4 7 4 35 prompt 4 36 edit 4 36 eject 4 36 Eject all feature 4 14 ejectalldisable 4 14 4 36 Electrical Characteristics B 2 Cl and C2 B 2 encrypt 4 36 Environment temperature and humidity 3 1 EOD 4 30 4 42 4 71 4 73 EOT 4 14 4 71 4 73 errmes 4 27 4 41 4 44 4 68 A 22 Error 4 3 4 36 codes 4 36 A 32 Error rate See Bit error rate Error induce 4 40 4 56 ervice info See Transport Ethernet port 2 3 4 1 4 4 4 58 6 3 expert 4 37 ff 4 37 Files See ROS configuration form 4 37 F
256. ll typically be in almost the same position The overall position is defined as the mid point of the individual transport positions and includes a linear variance value that indicates the maximum absolute deviation of any individual position from the mid point e g 12 s means that the latest transport is 12 seconds ahead and the earliest transport is 12 seconds behind the overall position If the variance exceeds 60 seconds it is shown in hours and minutes e g 1h29 means one hour and twenty nine minutes To show each transport s individual position use transport display position Po sitions are normally positive but can take on small negative values due to anomalies around BOT If any individual position is unknown the overall position is also considered unknown See the position command on Page 4 42 for more in formation 4 2 8 4 State Window middle Figure 4 1 Body of window Bottom boundary line Contains highlighted symbols to represent the overall S2 tape motion state based on the states of the individual transports Only the states of currently selected transports those marked with are used in determining the overall state The symbol meanings are as follows rewind play fast forward stop pause REC record Sometimes the symbols will light in combination to indicate states such as cue and review An M after the record or play symbol indicates manual r
257. lock to an external high rate clock refclk and or 1 Hz tick 1hz but no 1 Hz tick is being supplied over the cable 51 7 REC or C2 cable C1HZ STAT_BADSTNDELAY Error Stn delay measurement setting The station delay measurement does not match the setting from the last delay command System Clock PLL refclk mode only This is most likely to be caused by a glitch in the user s high rate reference clock For example if the clock rate is 32 MHz a glitch might cause more than or fewer than 32 000 000 clock cycles to be registered over a one second period resulting in a shift of the S2 s internal 1 Hz tick with respect to the external 1 Hz reference station delay mismatch can also be caused by an actual shift in the external or internal 1 Hz timing or by instability of the System Clock Phase Lock Loop Delay mismatches may persist once they have arisen because the S2 internal 1 Hz tick is not automatically re synchronized unless scpllrefclkfix is set to 1 in the defaults file see below Delay corrections can be made manually by resetting the appropriate delay value usually 0 with the delay command If the condition persists check the input clock fre quency selection userio clkin Ensure that the external clock and 1 Hz sync signals conform to S2 interface specifications given in Appendix B If after this the delay still cannot be set there is probably a hardware fault in the UI timing circuitry The S2 can be instru
258. look like during playback The tape time of each transport if known is shown in the Transport window on the left side of the screen The Tape ID and User Info fields entered at record time are shown in the User Parms window as well as the tape speed and overall position Tape position 52 User s Manual OPERATION is expressed as the number of hours minutes seconds of recorded data since the beginning of tape e g 4 58 57 058 means 4 hours and 58 minutes into the tape The position may optionally be shown as an integer number of seconds by changing the posdisformat parameter in the defaults file in which case the previous position would be displayed as 17937 4 5 The overall position display includes a linear variance value that indicates the maximum absolute deviation of any individual transport position from the value shown Usually all tapes in a group will remain close enough together so that a single position value can be used but if necessary it is possible to enter individual positions for each tape in the position command and to display them with transport display position The tape counters on the transport front panel displays should not be used since they do not show the correct tape position they have a 64 60 multiplicative error as well as other uncertainties Tape Alignment The S2 automatically aligns the tapes to each other shortly after playback starts Playback data is not valid until tape alignment completes The user c
259. mand failed non specific error 104 ERR TCPILCMD Command not recognized by transport s 105 ERR TCPNOTIMP Command not yet implemented by transport s 106 ERR TCPILSTATE Transport s in illegal state for this operation continued on next page 52 User s Manual APPENDIX A ROS Error Return Codes continued 110 ERR_TCPPGCHKSUM Transport reported checksum error in program mode 111 ERR_TCPPGFORMAT Transport reported format error in program mode 108 Description 110 Description 113 Description 116 Description Response Msg Code Data Response Msg Code Data Response Msg Code Data Response Msg Code Data RESP_STATE 108 bytel recorder state code one of 0x01 5 PLAY 0x02 RSTATE RECORD 0x03 RSTATE REWIND 0x04 5 FF 0x05 RSTATE STOP 0x06 5 PPAUSE play pause 0x07 RSTATE_RPAUSE record pause 0x08 5 0x09 RSTATE REVIEW 0x0A RSTATE NOTAPE 0x0B RSTATE POSITION total data bytes 1 Indicates the current recorder state which describes the S2 s status with respect to tape motion Not to be confused with the STATUS response RESP SPEED 110 bytel Speed code one of 0x00 SP 0x01 LP 0x02 SLP OxFF unknown total data bytes 1 Indicates transport record or playback tape speed RESP TIME 113 bytel byte2 Absolute year number bytel MSB byte3 b
260. may be included on lines beginning with D 2 Types of Capabilities Terminal capabilities each have a two letter code and are of three types boolean These indicate particular features of the termi nal For instance an entry for a terminal that has automatic margins an automatic RETURN and LINEFEED when the end of a line is reached would contain a field with the boolean capabil ity am numeric These give the size of the display of some other attribute Numeric capabilities are followed by the character and a number An entry for a terminal with an 80 column display would have a field containing co 80 string These indicate the character sequences used to perform particular terminal operations String valued capabilities such as ce clear to end of line sequence are given by the two letter code followed by the character and a string which ends at the following field delimiter 2 A delay factor in milliseconds may appear after the Padding characters are supplied by tputs after the remainder of the string is sent The delay can be either a number or a number followed by the character which indicates that the proportional padding is required in which case the number given is the amount of padding for each line affected by an operation using that capability In the case of an insert character operation the factor is still the number of lines affected this is always 1 unless the
261. may change or discard them Programs using termcap must set terminal modes so that TAB characters are not expanded making t safe to send This turns out to be essential for the Ann Arbor 4080 A final example is the Lear Siegler ADM 3a which offsets row and column by a blank character thus it requires 0 9047 Row or column absolute cursor addressing can be given as single parameter capabilities ch horizontal position abso lute and cv vertical position absolute Sometimes these are shorter than the more general two parameter sequence as with the Hewlett Packard 2645 and can be used in preference to cm If there are parameterized local motions for exam ple move n positions to the right these can be given as DO LE RI and UP with a single parameter indicating how many positions to move These are primarily useful if the terminal does not have cm such as the Tektronix 4025 D 2 4 Delays Certain capabilities control padding in the terminal driver These are primarily needed by hardcopy terminals and are used by the tset 1 program to set terminal driver modes appropriately Delays embedded in the capabilities cr sf le ff and ta will set the appropriate delay bits in the terminal driver If pb padding baud rate is given these values can be ignored at baud rates below the value of pb For 42BSD tset the delays are given as numeric capabili ties dC dN dB dF and dT instead 52 User s Manual AP
262. me or all transports are in a state that 52 User s Manual OPERATION is not legal for system operation such as off or dead This status message is usually accompanied by other messages which clarify the problem 58 Mnemonic STAT BADTRANSEL Type Fatal error Console Msg tran selection for mode group Interpretation The set of selected transports marked with is not correct for the current mode and group settings Normally the mode and group commands automatically select the active transports as required This status message appears if a different selection is in effect during automatic record or playback Stop the S2 and select the correct transports by re setting the correct mode or group or by typing transport autoselect 59 Mnemonic STAT CHIDDUP Type Fatal error Console Msg Tran N amp N tapes have same chan ID Interpretation During playback at least two different tapes have the same channel ID which means they were recorded on transports with the same address The tapes probably come from different tape sets Stop the S2 insert the correct tapes and restart playback 60 Mnemonic STAT ALIGNFAIL Type Fatal error Console Msg Unable to align tapes error nnn Interpretation A playback tape alignment operation has failed under circumstances for which alignment will not be automatically retried This includes any user initiated align ment operation as well as automatically
263. mmand Msg Code Data Expected Resp Timer Duration Eq Console Cmd Description 16 Command Msg Code Data Expected Resp Timer Duration Eq Console Cmd APPENDIX A MODE_SET 15 bytel Mode designator in the form of an ASCII string terminated by a NULL 0 character See the description for a list of possible modes total data bytes length of string 1 RESP_ERR ERR_NONE 3 0 sec mode Sets the recorder mode which controls data channelization and bit rate sam ple rate The S2 supports up to 16 channels of data at 4 8 16 and 32 Mbits s with a maximum total data rate of 128 Mbits s There are 51 modes in total 12 of which are for diagnostics The complete list is as follows S2 modes 4 4 1 4 8 1 4x16 1 4 4 2 4 8 2 4 16 2 8 2 1 8 4 1 8 8 1 8 16 1 8 2 2 8 4 2 8 8 2 8x16 2 16 1 1 16x2 1 16x4 1 16x8 1 16x2 2 16x4 2 16x8 2 32 1 1 32x2 1 32 4 1 32 2 2 32 4 2 418 1 814 1 818 1 1614 1 1618 1 4p8 2 8p8 2 16p8 2 8d16 2 8n16 2 16v8 2 32a4 2 32b4 2 Test modes cltest4 cltest8 cltestl6 cltest32 c2test4 c2test8 c2testl6 c2test32 diag4 diag8 diagl6 diag32 Note that mode names always use lower case letters the S2 will map any up per case letters to lower case if necessary The mode should be set prior to recording or playback For playback any mode can be chosen as long as it has the same total data rate as the mode used
264. n sent by find key sent by beg inning key sent by cancel key sent by close key sent by cmd command key sent by copy key sent by create key sent by end key sent by enter send key unreliable sent by exit key add n new blank lines terminal settable command char in prototype memory relative cursor motion to row m col n delete n characters delete n lines move cursor down n lines even parity sent by function keys 11 19 sent by function keys 20 45 sent by function keys 46 63 cursor is hard to see half duplex insert n blank characters sent by keypad upper left sent by keypad center 52 User s Manual K3 K4 K5 str str str bool str str str str str str bool bool bool num bool str str str str str str str str bool str str str str str str bool str str str bool str bool str str str str str str num str str str str num num num num num bool bool 0 NP P P P P P 0 0 P NP P P NP NP P 0 NP P P P NP NP NP P NP o o o o 0 0 APPENDIX D sent by keypad upper right sent by keypad lower left sent by keypad lower right lower case only move cursor left n positions turn off soft labels turn on soft labels clear left and right soft margins set soft left margin set soft right margin is NEWLINE not LINEFEED pad c
265. n Workstation cmdtool suni Rc E RUNY Workstation sun Sun Workstation tek4105 Tektronix 4105 tek4115 Tektronix 4115 tek4404 Tektronix 4404 1 1924 Televideo Model 924 tvi925 TeleVideo Model 925 v3220 vc404 Volker Craig 404 vc6220 Volker Craig 6220 vis200 Visual 200 vision1000 Vision 1000 dim reg standout vt100 DEC vt100 ROSCO vt102 DEC vt102 vt125 DEC vt125 vt132 DEC vt132 vt200 DEC vt200 vt220 DEC vt220 vt52 DEC vt52 wyse50 Wyse 50 in Wyse mode wyse75 Wyse 75 Wyse85 Wyse 85 wyse925 Wyse 50 emulating tvi925 xterm X windows terminal emulator yterm10 yterm 1 0 UCB ascii kbd yterm11 yterm 1 1 UCB ascii kbd z50 Zephyr 50 Table 4 2 Terminal Types Supported by ROS After the self test completes successfully or not the system automatically begins executing the batch file called autoexec if such a file exists This can be used to perform any actions that are required every time the S2 is turned on For example you might put a command in the autoexec file to change to the User I O screen automatically at bootup or to set other conditions or switches as desired However please don t set switches in the autoexec file for which there is a provision in the system defaults file otherwise the ROS boot procedure may not work properly When the autoexec batch file is finished the ROS console prompt appears gt and the system is ready for you to start typing commands or to start issuing control requests
266. n nnn Interpretation Shows the number of transports which have been declared dead and or sub sequently come back to life since the last status read RCL reset console A transport is declared dead after 3 unsuccessful communication attempts 2 retries A dead transport is indicated by in the console Transport window This mes sage will appear when transports are swapped while the S2 is powered on or 52 User s Manual OPERATION when transports are programmed When you are finished programming or have connected the new transport and assigned its address type status reset to clear the status message 98 Mnemonic STAT TRANPKTRETRY Type Informational clear on read Console Msg Transport packet retries nnn Interpretation Shows the number of Transport Control Link communications retries since the last status read RCL reset console This is a measure of the rate of communication errors over the TCL link A non zero retry rate is not normally a problem unless it leads to consecutive retries and transports being declared dead Excessive re tries could indicate a problem with the TCL cable or a partial failure of the RS 485 balanced line driver receiver on the Formatter or one of the transports This message requires verbose level 3 to appear on both the console and the RCL To see a debugging message on each retry showing which transport was being addressed set the verbose level to 1 and type
267. n the editor transport N service edithist An example service history file is shown below Service history for AG2550 transport s n K7KD00164 Currently installed TCP is tcp4102 TotHead Work Description Date Jul 15 1 Name 998 ROS Jan 21 1999 P Newby 0019 0627 Service history started 50500 Cleaned tape path Actual total head time hours Include service code S INNNN where NNNN nominal service hours as per AG25X0 service chart plus additional notes S2 PT User s Manual MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING Transport Replacement Replacement or servicing of a transport requires the removal of the transport from the TAM rack as follows a Transport Removal 1 Power down the system This is a precautionary step only If operational requirements make it necessary to do so the transports can be removed while the power is on 2 Unscrew and remove the slider block from the rack infill brackets on the front of the rack Remove the TAM back panel Unplug the ribbon 50 ohm cable serial and power cables from the back of the transport to be removed 3 Slide the transport forward until the slider catch is encountered Remove the transport by depressing the catches on both sides of the extended sliders while pulling forward on the transport The transport will slide free of the rack AG2550 transports have no sliders and are removed by pulling them forward from the front In some cases it may first be nec
268. n the set from 0 to 7 More information on the Canadian tape labeling and user info conventions can be found in the document DRAO RPCS3001 available at Attp www drao nrc ca web vlbi docs doc3001 ps gz User info consists of 4 arbitrary text fields of varying lengths each with a 16 character user assignable label The field label should describe the contents of the user info field For example the label might be Source Name and the contents of the field might be 3 273 The console commands to set info field 2 as just described would be as follows user info 2 label Source Name user info 2 3C273 After setting the field label for the first time it does not need to be set again for the rest of the session User info can be changed at any time but should not be changed more often than every few seconds The Canadian convention is to put the name of the recording station in info field 1 and the source name in field 2 fields 3 and 4 are not specified The maximum lengths of the four fields are 16 16 32 and 48 characters respectively The tape ID and the first three user info fields are displayed in the User Parms window located in the upper middle of the console screen To display the value of the fourth and longest user info field type user info 4 On a PT the stop setup will usually be set to play so the screen display will continue to show the absent playback parameters even when the S2 is stopped To display the record parame
269. nd a warning is printed if it is more than 1 day The day number can be omitted so just sleep 23 00 00 will wait until 11 00 pm today or tomorrow if the current time is between 11 00 and midnight See also the wait command n Tape LP SLP ST 126 SE 180 258m 4h 01 mi6 h 02m ST 182 SE 260 371m 5h47 m Bh 41 m R Command speed Syntax speed lp slp Description Selects the tape speed to use for recording playback tape speed is determined automatically S2 systems with AG2530 and earlier model transports support two speeds Ip and slp corresponding to the standard VHS tape speeds of the same name but sped up by a factor of 64 60 Systems with AG2550 and later model transports can record in slp only but will play back tapes recorded in either speed If Ip is selected on a system with one or more AG2550 transports it is automatically mapped to slp Note that although AG2510 transports can record at either speed using AG2510s to play back slp tapes is not recommended due to poor performance The total recording time per tape is given above for both speeds and two different available tape lengths Refer to Chapter 5 for additional information Command station Syntax station NUM STR8 lt nickname gt blank Description Sets the station number and nickname of this S2 system The station number is an integer from 0 to 255 which serves to identify different S2 systems in ap plications where more than
270. nditions are ranked by importance so that the most relevant information is usually at the top If necessary you can page through the status information with the status pagedn and status pageup commands or use the entire screen for the status display with status display fullscreen The window at the upper middle of the screen is the User Parms window It shows user specified operational parameters such as the tape speed the tape ID the current tape position and other tape information of these parameters except tape position change depending on whether the S2 is in record or playback During playback or when the S2 is stopped the User Parms window shows information as extracted from tape During record the information shown describes what is being recorded on tape The area of the screen normally occupied by the User Parms window can be switched to show several other displays mostly containing diagnostic information The alternate display of most interest to regular users is the User 1 window selected by typing userio It gives details about the current input output interface configuration including exactly which user data channels are active and what system clocking options are currently in effect Below the User Parms window in the middle of the screen is a small window which indicates the current overall tape motion state of the S2 Highlighted symbols are used to indicate whether the S2 is stopped playing rewinding etc This state
271. nel data rate followdata in which case the display shows 14 and the output clock rate tracks the user data rate on mode changes If the Mark formatter is active the output clock rate increases by a factor of 9 8 due to parity insertion and always follows the user data rate regardless of the output rate setting The clkoutrate defaults file parameter determines the default output clock frequency to use at bootup 4 2 8 7 Mark III Window upper middle Figure 4 8 This window summarizes Mark related activity and switch settings It replaces the User Parms window when you type mk3 Note that entries in this window are only active when the Mark III formatter is enabled mk3 form enable Top line Gives the name of this window Diagnostic Parms Mk3 Form time Shows the Mark III time being encoded similar to a Mark III decoder s front panel display The Mark III time is based on the time decoded by the current S2 di agnostic DRD when in playback or set up for play or the current system time otherwise All 078 will be used if the S2 diagnostic decoder cannot extract time from the playback auxiliary data Form aux Shows the Mark III auxiliary data being encoded similar to a Mark III decoder s front panel display The auxiliary data consists of 12 user specified BCD digits followed by two BCD zeroes followed by a two digit hex hardware ID code The 52 User s Manual OPERATION S2 Recorder Diagnost
272. nel used for extraction depends on the current data path configuration as set by other RCL commands such as PLAY STOP FORM SET and console commands such as setup uic feedthru mk3 form and others The DATA_EXTRACT_READ command is intended for diagnostic and test purposes It can be used for exampled to help verify the correct connection of the data acquisition system or sampler supplying data to the S2 recorder 97 Command IDENT generic Msg Code 97 Data none Expected Resp RESP_IDENT Timer Duration 0 5 sec Eq Console Cmd none Description Returns the RCL device type as a string which determines what command set it responds to All RCL devices should implement this command Device types defined so far are S2 RT S2 PT and S2 DAS for the 52 Data Acquisition System To obtain additional information from S2 RTs and S2 PTs use the STATION_INFO_READ and TRANSPORT_TIMES commands 98 Command PING generic Msg Code 98 Data none Expected Resp RESP_ERR ERR_NONE Timer Duration 0 5 sec Eq Console Cmd none Description Performs no action just returns an NONE response All RCL de vices should implement this command PING is useful for polling a device to test if it is alive or to tell when it comes up Unlike most other com mands PING is not subject to automatic communications retries within the RCL interface library rcl_ping so response will be quick even if the de vice is currently d
273. nemonic STAT DRTAPRAIL Type Informational Console Msg DR nnn taps at near rail nnn Interpretation One or more data recovery FIR filter taps on one or more DRD boards are at or near their maximum limits This could indicate poor or degenerate DR cali bration possibly caused by marginal components on the DRD board but can usually be ignored If this condition is also accompanied by poor signal channel perform ance you might try dr reset flat to reset the filter taps You should first do setup transport N where N is the address of the DRD board given in the message so that the right board gets reset 95 Mnemonic STAT_DREQSETRAIL Type Informational Console Msg DR nnn EqSet value at near rail Interpretation The data recovery equalization value on one or more DRD boards is at or near its maximum limits This could indicate poor or degenerate DR calibration but can usually be ignored Requires verbose level 2 or higher to appear on both the console and the RCL 96 Mnemonic STAT DRFSETRAIL Type Informational Console Msg DR nnn FSet value at near rail Interpretation The DR clock recovery PLL center frequency FSet on one or more DRD boards is at or near its maximum limits This could indicate poor or degenerate DR cali bration Requires verbose level 2 or higher to appear on both the console and the RCL 97 Mnemonic STAT TRANDIEDBORN Type Error clear on read Console Msg Transports died born nn
274. nerator Test Vector Receiver User Interface User Interface Card Co ordinated Universal Time Voltage Controlled Oscillator Very Long Baseline Interferometry VLBI Space Observatory Programme APPENDIX E Bibliography 1 Brent Carlson 52 VLBI Tape ID and User Info Field Format Requirements for Canadian S2 Correlator Operational Compatibility DRAO RPCS3001 Rev 1 1 Dominion Radio Astrophysical Observatory July 30 1996 http Awww drao nrc ca web vlbi docs doc3001 ps gz 2 Georg Feil Timing and Synchronization in 52 Record and Playback Terminals ISTS SGL TR94 030 Institute for Space and Terrestrial Science Space Geodynamics Laboratory June 1994 Stp ftp sgl crestech ca pub s2 dochtiming timing ps Z 3 ISTS SGL VLBI System Interface Adapter VIA User s Manual ver 1 3 Institute for Space and Terrestrial Science Space Geodynamics Laboratory October 1996 Stp ftp sgl crestech ca pub s2 doc svlbi via_1 3 ps Z 4 Rick Wietfeldt Compatibility of S2 and VSOPT Recordings at 52 and VSOP Correlators ver 1 1 Institute for Space and Terrestrial Science Space Geodynamics Laboratory June 18 1996 Stp ftp sgl crestech ca pub s2 svlbi s2vsop_compat_memo_v1 1 ps Z 5 NASA GSFC IV Field System volume 1 amp 2 plus supplements ver 9 3 Space Geodesy Program NAS A Goddard Space Flight Center January 1997 ftp gemini gsfc nasa gov pub fs 6 Motorola Inc 133 VM
275. nfo Description During playback tapeinfo displays information extracted from tape auxiliary data describing various conditions in effect at record time The information applies to the tape in the current diagnostic transport as shown in the Diag dec in display Most of the tape info applies equally to all tapes assuming that they were all recorded together and are currently aligned The following items are displayed 1 The Tape ID also shown in the User Parms window 2 The channel ID which is the address of the transport the tape was recorded on 3 The recorder mode at record time 4 The S2 system serial number station number and transport serial number where the tape was recorded Useful for tracing tapes back to the systems they were recorded on 5 The current tape time and an indicator showing if time was not validated during record 6 The tape type setting in effect at the time of recording type codes 1 9 and A Z only no extended digit strings 7 The elapsed time since the start of recording 8 The record start time 9 The record stop time if known not implemented 10 The measured station delay at that point in the recording shown as unknown if there was no 1 Hz input at record time 11 The barrel roll setting on off 12 The Formatter randomizer and precoder settings both normally always on 13 The Formatter diagnostic mode setting on off On only for test tapes indicates tape contains
276. ng as used at record time must be used for playback This status message can also appear with non playback data e g suppose the situation is as above but the S2 is stopped and bypass path is selected If we enter setup 3 transport 7 we will get the message Tran 7 data not part of curr group since bypass data from transport 7 is part of group 1 not 0 During automatic record or playback this message usually appears along with other status conditions such as bad transport selection STAT BADTRANSEL or missing tapes STAT_CHIDMISS 64 Mnemonic STAT_CHIDMISMATCH Type Error Console Msg Tape Decoded chan ID does not match setup Interpretation The decoded channel ID does not match the diagnostic channel selected in the current setup In other words decoded data is being mapped onto the wrong internal 52 channel Although each decoder DRD is capable of outputting data onto any internal data channel leading to the UI the right channel is the one which matches the channel used at record time For example if transport 4 bypass data is being mapped to channel 5 setup 5 transport 4 this status message will appear However if we are in playback and transport 4 contains the tape with channel 5 data then mapping it onto internal channel 5 is correct During automatic record or playback this status message usually appears along with other status conditions such as bad transport selection STAT BADTRANSEL or tape not part of current
277. ng properly you can disable the tape motion fail behaviour using the command transport N options takeupsense disable This command may be put in the autoexec batch file to remain effective even after rebooting 52 User s Manual OPERATION 22 Mnemonic STAT TRANBADTEMP Type Fatal error Console Msg Tran nnn temp out of range Interpretation One or more transport internal temperature sensors show an unsafe operating tem perature greater than 60 or less than 5 degrees C The transport automatically tums itself off and cannot be tumed on until the temperature retums to a safe level Check the TAM rack fans and air filters for proper operation To display the temperature measurements type transport display temportransport status volt If a transport s temperature reads out of range but it is known not to actually exceed the temperature limits the temperature sensor may need to be recalibrated see the caltemp option of the transport command on Page 4 53 23 Mnemonic STAT TRANWARNTEMP Type Error Console Msg nnn temp almost out of range Interpretation One or more transport internal temperature sensors show a temperature greater than 55 or less than 8 degrees C which is close to the unsafe operating limits The transport will continue to operate normally unless the temperature rises or falls past the limits defined for safe operation in STAT above Check the TAM rack fans and air filters
278. nitor what is happening when the S2 is under automatic control via the RCL The console allows high level manual control of the S2 for regular operation plus low level access for testing and other unusual operating conditions Any cursor addressable terminal or terminal emulator such as DEC VT100 can be used as a console a VT100 emulator program for IBM PCs and compatibles called ROSCO is supplied with the S2 The console display is divided into multiple windows which are continuously updated Command entry is aided by a soft key system which uses function keys and command completion to make commands faster to type and easier to remember There are approximately 50 console commands of which only about 10 are needed for everyday operation All of Section 4 2 is written from the point of view of console operation the bulk of this chapter but most of the principles described can be applied to RCL operation as well The Radioastronomy Control Link RCL is intended for automatic control of devices by an external computer It can be used to control S2 recorders according to a correlation schedule running on the external computer The RCL uses a reliable binary packet protocol to communicate requests from the external computer to the S2 and return responses Source code for the packet assembly and disassembly routines needed to run on the external computer is provided with the S2 system so the application programmer deals only with a simple function call
279. nless the condition they represent has occurred again Non clear on read status entries will persist until the condition they represent has gone away Note that RCL status is not necessarily the same as the console status window and is not affected by console commands such as status reset Similarly reading the RCL status will not affect the console status window Use STATUS_DETAIL to obtain detailed information messages for status conditions returned here See RESP_STATUS for more information 81 Command STATUS_DETAIL generic Msg Code 81 Data bytel status code to return detailed information for 0 all active status codes byte2 Boolean re read flag 0x00 Don t re read status use conditions from last STATUS request 0 01 Re read status implicitly performs STATUS first byte3 Boolean short option 0x00 Use regular long form messages one or more lines up to 399 characters but often less than 80 chars 0x01 Use shortened messages like console 34 chars total data bytes 3 Expected Resp RESP STATUS DETAIL Timer Duration 0 5 sec Eq Console Cmd status display Description Reads S2 recorder detailed status report for 1 or all active status conditions If the re read flag data byte 2 is not set this lists only conditions in ef fect at the time of the last STATUS command Thus you can obtain detailed information after detecting an unusual status condition in the brief status re spons
280. nment request e g align selfalign See also the general description of how to play back tapes in Section 4 2 4 1 52 User s Manual OPERATION Command position Syntax position INUM hours NN mins NN secs reestablish Description This command is used before playback or record to position the tapes to a specific location Tape position is measured as the number of seconds of recorded data since the beginning of tape and is normally specified as hours minutes seconds e g position 3 18 57 This format is similar to a tape time except that the hours portion normally includes only a single digit Alternately the position may be entered as an integer number of seconds regardless of the setting of the posdisformat defaults file parameter e g position 11937 The current position is considered unknown after a tape is inserted or after the transports are first turned on The position becomes known when a transport en counters beginning of tape BOT where the position is defined to be 0 i e 0 00 00 Positions are normally positive for purposes of the position com mand but the current position reading can take on small negative values due to anomalies around BOT It is important to realize that sections of blank tape do not count in position determination For example on a tape which has only one hour of data recorded on it the position 2 00 00 2 hours does not exist An attempt to reach that position wil
281. nnel number is normally the same as the transport number except when a trans port other than the one corresponding directly to that channel is being used e g during playback when the tapes are inserted in the transports out of sequence or any time a group number higher than 0 is selected The transport number 18 always the same as the diagnostic decoder number because each transport is directly connected to its corresponding decoder Note that the transport number is only shown when it is different from the channel number The decoder input source is synonymous with the current recorder setup as controlled by the console setup command see page 4 45 Most of the time the setup is automatically changed as required e g record selects the record path and play selects the play path The stop rewind and ff commands select the stop setup which is normally bypass on an RT and play on a PT The stop setup can be changed by using the setup command while the S2 is stopped The stopsetup defaults file parameter determines the default stop setup to use at bootup Diag dec time This shows the time extracted from the auxiliary data being decoded by the current diagnostic decoder During playback this will be the tape time from the transport feeding the diagnostic decoder i e the one with the same address During record the decoders are fed with diagnostic loopback data so the time shown should be the same as the current system time If time could not
282. nsport 1 the tape recorded in transport 1 is inserted into transport 2 and so on the tape recorded in transport 7 is inserted into transport 0 Then run the batch file intertst by typing the command batch inter tst This batch file rewinds the tapes and repeats the playback phase of the berlp tst berslp tst batch file As above verify that the error rate displayed for each channel and or average is less than the specified value Failure to achieve specified performance may call for particular transports or other system components to be serviced see Chapter 6 for maintenance information In particular poor performance in this test may indicate a misalignment of the transport tape guide posts Section 6 4 6 S2 PT User s Manual OPERATING ENVIRONMENT 3 OPERATING ENVIRONMENT Temperature and Humidity Temperature Range For transport operation in TAM rack For specified performance Rate of Temperature Variation Relative Humidity Particulate Contamination 10 degrees to 30 degrees Celsius 15 degrees to 25 degrees Celsius Not more than 1 degree Celsius per minute and not more than 10 degrees Celsius per 30 minutes 3596 to 8096 non condensing Particle size um Particle count m 10 4 x 107 1 0 to 1 5 4 x 108 1 5 to 5 0 4 x 10 5 0 to 10 4 x 10 10 4 x 10 1 This refers to the ambient temperature around the TAM rack If the TAMs are mounted in a 19 rack or o
283. nsports For example group 1 would be transports 4 7 In this case there are just two groups 0 and 1 but in modes with lower total data rates there may be 4 or even 8 groups see Figure 4 4 Page 4 12 Together the mode and group number deter mine which transports are selected for use State This refers to the tape motion state of the S2 There are 11 states the first 7 of which will be commonly encountered in everyday use Record Play Position Rewind Fast Forward Stop No Tape tapes ejected Play Pause Record Pause Cue Review The 5278 overall tape motion state is derived from the individual states of the currently selected transports Under unusual circumstances it is possible that the individual transport states cannot be clearly summarized in which case the overall state is considered inconsistent Setup This describes the current internal diagnostic signal path configuration of the S2 Recorder The setup is normally selected automatically by the S2 software but can be manually specified using the console setup command when the S2 is in manual playback or record The setup determines which of several internal di agnostic loopback paths is currently active play record bypass ahook or dhook see Figure 4 5 on Page 4 19 and which of the 8 transports decoders is selected for diagnostic monitoring In an S2 RT only one decoder Data Recovery Defor matter is available so this must be switched among the active tr
284. nt encountered an error but is being re attempted 84 Mnemonic STAT ALIGNIP Type Informational Console Msg Tape alignment in progress Interpretation A playback tape alignment operation is in progress initiated either automatically or by request from the user Upon completion either STAT ALIGNDONE or STAT ALIGNFAIL will appear and STAT ALIGNIP will disappear During align ment STAT ERRALIGN may appear but in this case attempts to align will con tinue 85 Mnemonic STAT ALIGNDONE Type Informational clear on read Console Msg Tape alignment completed Interpretation Playback tape alignment has completed successfully and the overall tape time is now coherent and valid Requires verbose level 3 to appear on the console verbose level 1 or greater on the RCL 89 Mnemonic STAT TAPESYNCERR Type Error clear on read Console Msg Tape time sync errors Interpretation The time decoded from tape was not as expected In each successive frame the time should advance by exactly one unit This message indicates an unexpected timing shift of one or more frames by the transport such as might be caused by a tape jam Tape time sync errors can also occur during transitions between tape motion states and during pause so normally they are counted only if the tapes are currently aligned Another possible cause is a transition between two different recordings Any significant tape time sync error is alway
285. nt commands are marked with below Those that are important only for record applications are marked R and for playback applications lt P Command align Syntax align NNN lt day gt NN lt hour gt NN lt min gt NN lt sec gt NUM lt fracsec gt re align selfalign Description This is used during playback to align tapes to an absolute time or shift by some relative amount Tape alignment works by slewing the transports and if necessary adjusting the station delay setting Unlike positioning tape alignment is a precise operation accurate down to the data bit Alignment is performed relative to a mov ing reference frame playback whereas positioning is performed relative to a sta tionary reference frame stop A fractional seconds portion can be specified as part of the alignment time and will be rounded to the nearest bit sample When playback first begins a form of alignment called self alignment is performed auto matically In self alignment all transports are aligned to each other by choosing either the earliest latest or middle tape time as a reference which method to use is determined by the selfaligntarg defaults file parameter All transports must be within a limited distance of the target time chosen where the maximum allowed time difference is given by the selfaligntime defaults file parameter nor mally 30 minutes otherwise the alignment operation is aborted and status code STAT ALI
286. nt position the beginning of frame portion should have relatively few errors with no significant bumps or peaks something like Figure 6 8 In cases of extreme initial misadjustment it may be beneficial to repeat the adjustment of the P3 post 7 Type q to quit the error histogram display then eject the tape and restore software switch settings stop eject batch agcon Instead of running the agcon batch file you may simply wish to reboot Part C Re evaluate Performance 1 Rebootthe S2 to clear any previous diagnostic switch settings shutdown reboot 2 Re insert the S2 alignment tape from part A and initiate manual playback rewinding first if necessary 52 User s Manual MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING 52 Recorder Operating User Parms playback RT 407 1997 127 21 15 42 1 System Tape ID undefined Recorder mode 16x8 1 br 1 Station delay no 1 Hz inl Transports Info field 1 undefined Decoder input channel 1 play 0 no tape Info field 2 undefined Decoded time 100 14 30 01 30 1 14 30 01 301 Info field 3 undefined Decoder sync 100 cal hold 2 no tape 1 1 3 no tape User data valid yes Est err rate 4 4e 5 4 no tape Tape speed lp X data valid 100 00 5 no tape Tape position 0 12 34 4 00 s Decoder Xbar 5 no tape 1 1 7 no tape 1 1 Errors in Blocks 249 12 Scale 6 Flatness 0 002855 52 Recorder Operating User Parm
287. ock PLL 1hz lock mode but should be within a few hundred sample times To show the latest delay setting use the delay command without any parameters Non zero station delays can be used during record operation to implement clock offsets and corrections The System Clock PLL mode must be refclk lock to external high rate clock Delay offsets should be entered prior to starting re cording since changing the station delay while recording has a de stabilizing effect on the entire system timing and may result in several seconds of lost data During playback the delay command or its RCL equivalent DELAY SET can be used to implement delay and delay rate tracking if the System Clock PLL is set to 1hz mode lock to external 1 Hz Small delay changes will result in a smooth gradual movement to the new value with all system timing and data remaining continuously valid A typical application would be to have several S2 PTs at a correlation center fed by a common fixed 1 Hz reference with DELAY SET commands sent over the RCL to each PT for delay tracking System timing and data remains valid provided that the following limits are met Max delay rate 1 x 10 s s Max delay acceleration 1 x 10 5 52 Max delay step at delay rate 1 x 10 s You should use the align command instead of delay for large delay changes that would exceed these limits Exceeding the limits may cause STAT SCPLLSLIP 52 User s Manual OPERATION and or STAT SCPL
288. of the factors contributing to the final playback data validity decision This feature can be used whenever it is known that bad data is being recorded e g the telescope is slewing or off source To use the so called bad data anyway the user DV flag can be ignored during playback by typing user dv playback disable This may be useful if data was er roneously marked invalid at record time The playback enable disable function has no effect during record Command userio Syntax userio clkin c1 c2 32 16 8 4 followdata clkout 32 16 8 4 fol lowdata syncerrinduce onloff c1in c2out on off Description Without any parameters this command switches to the User I O window which replaces the User Parms window in the upper middle of the screen It gives useful information about the current User Interface input output configuration including exactly which user data channels are active and what clocking options are currently in effect See Section 4 2 8 6 for a description of the User 1 window 52 User s Manual OPERATION The parameters of the userio command set display various input output op tions clkin selects the source of the high rate and 1 Hz input reference clocks C1 or C2 cable and sets the expected frequency of the high rate input reference This can be fixed at 4 8 16 or 32 MHz or set to followdata which means track the user channel data rate These input clocking parameters are normally set as desired in the syst
289. off prec onjoff jinsw 1 2 4 8 outdis NUM chan all enable disable stuck ddpsel NUM lt chan gt frdsel NUM chan rclk onloff fdbksel transpt form fsync rec pb Description Controls the Formatter Test Vector Generator and Test Vector Receiver and sets other low level Formatter control options and switches The form command by itself switches to the Formatter display window replaces User Parms window re peat the command to switch back The diag option selects Formatter diag mode which causes user data to be replaced by a pseudo random noise sequence produced by a Test Vector Gen erator on the Formatter board The test vector sequence can be verified with the form berc command which uses the Formatter Test Vector Receiver to perform a true bit error rate measurement on one 16 Mbit s internal S2 data channel During playback when up to 8 channels contain active data the rotate option can be used to measure the average bit error rate across all active channels by rapidly switching between them time between switches is l of a second This is the next best thing to actually testing all 128 Mbits s of data simultaneously which is not supported in hardware The Formatter test vector is a 127 bit maximal length pseudo random sequence that gets reset synchronous to the system 1 Hz tick and like all data it is randomized before being written to tape It can be used directly to check S2 internal data loopback paths
290. ollowing a successful alignment operation and will re appear if any unusual condition causes the tapes to go out of alignment Note that absolute ALIGN commands but not any other type are not subject to automatic communications retries within the RCL interface library otherwise the wrong alignment time might be sent The rcl align abs func tion call should be re issued with an updated time if a communications timeout occurs See also the DELAY SET command 35 Command POSITION SET Msg Code 35 Data bytel positioning type code 0x00 absolute tape positioning byte2 number of positions being specified 1 or 8 Use 1 when commanding all currently selected transports to the same position 8 when commanding transports to different positions byte3 List of positions Each entry is a signed 32 bit integer representing the absolute position in seconds since BOT MSB first Values should be restricted to the range 0 43199 or Ox7FFFFFFF if byte2 8 and transport not selected up to 32 bytes total 0x01 relative tape positioning byte2 number of positions being specified 1 or 8 byte3 List of positions Each entry is a signed 32 bit integer representing the relative number of seconds to move MSB first Values should be restricted to the range 43199 43199 or Ox7FFFFFFF if byte2 8 and transport 52 User s Manual Expected Resp Timer Duration Eq Console Cmd Description APPENDIX A not selected up to 32 byte
291. ollows 11 STAT_UICFAIL EF UI board failure reason follows 12 STAT_TRANFAIL EF Transport xxx failure reason follows 13 STAT_ROSSWFAIL EF ROS software failure reason follows 15 STAT SRAMCHKSUM EF SRAM board bad checksum for partition xxx 16 STAT NOSRSYR EF System internal 64 Hz frame sync SRSYR is absent 17 STAT NOFG1 EF System internal 1 Hz tick FG1 is absent 18 STAT TASKFAIL EF Following required software tasks are not running xxx 19 STAT TRANSWFAIL EF Transport xxx software failure xxx 20 STAT TRANTPMOTFAIL EFC Transport xxx tape motion sanity check failed a STAT THANGADTEM Ere end O HG b Warning Transport xxx internal temperature is almost too high or too low 23 STAT TRANWARNTEMP for safe operation will shut down above 60 below 5 deg C check TAM fans and filters 24 STAT TRANDEAD EF Required transports xxx are off or dead 25 STAT TRANBADVOLT EF Transport xxx 5V 5V supply is bad check C4 cable 26 STAT TRANBADRECSIG EF Transport xxx record clk data is bad check C3 cable 27 STAT_ILMODE EF Recorder mode is illegal probably due to error during last mode change 28 STAT_NOREFCLK EF User reference high rate clock xxx is absent 29 STAT NOREF1HZ EF User reference xxx sync is absent 32 STAT BADSTNDELAY Station delay measurement does not match setting 33 STAT UICVERFAIL PEE E failure condition In citest mode this indicates C1 cable
292. ond to code 255 A command or response code as described in Section A 4 below Codes in the range 0 to 99 decimal are for commands sent from the external control computer master to the S2 slave and codes 100 to 199 decimal are for responses sent from the S2 to the external computer 255 is an expansion code to allow the number of commands to exceed the 8 bit limit if necessary The remaining codes are reserved Generic RCL commands and responses should use the same code numbers in all types of RCL devices but commands which are specific to a particular device type may use any legal code numbers An 8 bit sequence number that is incremented for every new command sent by the external computer to the S2 recorder If the external computer re transmits a command because no response was detected then the re transmitted packet has the same seq as the previous iden tical packet Whenever the S2 receives a command with the same sequence number as the previous command it repeats the last response without re executing the command Responses use the same sequence number as the command which the response is for Example 1 External computer S2 stop command seq 101 92 executes stop 2 S2 9 External computer ERR NONE response seq 101 3 External computer gt S2 rewind command seq 102 52 executes rewind 4 52 gt External computer ERR NONE response seq 102 response gets garbled or lost in transmis
293. one S2 is used Non zero station numbers are displayed on the console screen just above the Transport window and below the activity indicator and on the transport front panels beside the transport address values 1 to 6 only The station number is encoded on tape so that it can be recovered during playback see the tapeinfo command The number is remembered across power downs since it is stored in the system defaults file this command auto matically updates the defaults file Select the value 0 if you do not wish to assign a station number no number will be displayed In addition to the station number each system can also be assigned a nick name of up to 8 characters It appears in the console window to the left of the system time Like the station number the nickname is automatically updated in the system defaults file and thus persists across power downs but it is not encoded onto tape Enter the word blank to clear the nickname Both the station number and nickname can also be set by editing the station and nickname entries in the defaults file see Section 4 2 7 52 User s Manual OPERATION Command status Syntax status reset pagedn pageup decode NUM lt statcode gt short display fullscreen tofile STR lt filename gt short Description Provides several options for controlling the console status display status reset is the form of this command you will probably use most often It clears transient
294. or playback after pause 07 EJECT Eject tapes 08 STATE READ Read current tape motion state stop record play rewind ff no tape etc 09 SPEED SET Set record tape speed Ip or slp lp not supported on AG2550 transports 10 SPEED READ Read record tape speed 11 SPEED READ PB Read playback tape speed 12 TIME SET Set system time must be sent right after S 1 C 1 Hz input tick STHZ REC on C1 cable or C1HZ on C2a cable if SC PLL locked to refclk 13 TIME READ Read current system time reply returned right after next S 1 C 1 Hz input tick Read playback tape time reply returned right after next S 1 Hz output tick 14 TIME READ PB 81 2 PB on C2a cable Tapes must be aligned This command can be used to test if tapes are aligned or use STATUS 15 MODE SET Set recorder mode S2 mode string or 5 16 for C1 cable test mode test zx sequence check c2test16 for C2 cable test mode test sequence generate 16 MODE READ Read current recorder mode 17 TAPEID SET Set Tape ID record ASCII string up to 20 chars 18 TAPEID READ Read Tape ID record 19 TAPEID READ PB Read playback Tape ID Value must be consistent across all tapes Set user defined auxiliary data fields amp labels record Field 1 ASCII or binary string up to 16 chars EO X EEG Field 4 ASCII or binary string up to 48 chars All 4 fields 16 character ASCII user defined label 21 USER INFO READ Read user defined auxiliary data fields amp labels record 22 USER INFO REA
295. or to record and verify test tapes Note that form berc will automatically tum on Formatter diag mode for the duration of the measurement unless the S2 is in record or playback so the form diag command is really only needed in preparation for recording test tapes The For matter test vector tests only internal S2 data paths from the Formatter to the DRD outputs in particular it does not test UI functionality second type of test sequence is available on the UI board which can perform bit error rate measurements of either user supplied or internally generated UI test vector data see the uic berc command The rclk option activates a crystal oscillator on the Formatter thus allowing the system to run without a UI board This should never be used for regular op eration 52 User s Manual OPERATION Command group Syntax group NUM Description Selects which group of transports should be used in modes that don t require all 8 transports For example in mode 16x2 1 which requires only 2 transports there are 4 groups Transports 0 1 are group 0 transports 2 3 are group 1 and so on Figure 4 4 Together the mode and group settings determine which trans ports will be used for subsequent operations Group switching allows the unattended recording time to be increased at lower bandwidths e g with ST 182 tape in mode 16x2 1 32 Mbits s at speed LP the unattended recording time is 22 8 hours The group command is not allowed to c
296. ormally divided into 8 different regions or windows see Figure 4 1 The large area at the bottom of the display is the interaction window which shows user commands as they are being typed The window contents scroll up and off the top in the usual manner The line at the very bottom of the screen contains eight sofi keys These correspond to function keys f1 through f8 on terminals which have function keys and show the current command and parameter alternatives at any time when typing a command The remaining console windows contain information in various categories and are continuously updated at a rate of once per second These windows are described in general here for detailed information refer to Section 4 2 8 At the upper right hand corner of the display is the Crucial Parms window It contains important parameters such as the system time and channelization mode and various results from the diagnostic decoder DRD Below the Crucial Parms window to the right of the middle of the screen is the Status window It contains one line messages describing overall system health The word FAIL appears highlighted on the bottom window boundary if any fatal error conditions exist providing a single OK FAIL indication for the entire system the green front panel LED 52 User s Manual OPERATION also acts as an overall OK FAIL indicator when set to OK mode i e when not blinking Although there is room for only 3 messages in the window status co
297. ormatter FORM 1 2 6 3 replacement 6 4 Function keys console 4 7 Glossary E 1 Group 4 2 4 11 4 38 4 74 Head use time 4 25 4 53 6 5 help 4 38 In service time 4 25 4 53 6 5 Installation 2 1 2 9 basic steps 2 1 cables 2 5 checkout tests 2 8 inter tst batch file 2 9 4 81 ledmode 4 16 4 22 log 4 38 Log facility 4 38 4 76 login 4 60 loginpasswd 4 36 4 60 loginuserid 4 36 4 60 logout 4 39 Lost Tapes 4 9 Maintenance 6 1 Manual playback 4 41 recording 4 43 Mark III IV 4 39 CRC 4 28 4 40 sync word 4 40 See also Window Mark III mk3 4 39 mk3hwid 4 28 Mode 4 2 4 11 4 18 4 40 Network Configuration 4 58 Nickname 4 47 password 4 36 4 60 pause 4 41 play 4 41 Playback 4 8 4 41 lost 4 9 manual 4 41 tape alignment 4 9 4 29 tape positioning 4 8 4 42 Index 2 playmodemap 4 41 A 11 Ports DSCM RCL Port 2 3 TCL Port 2 3 Port 2 4 C2a Port 2 4 C2b Port 2 4 C2c Port 2 4 C3 Port 2 4 C4 Port 2 4 Ethernet Port 2 3 RCC Serial Port 2 3 Ports TAM C3 Port 2 4 C4 Port 2 5 C5 Port 2 5 Power in out 2 5 posdisformat 4 9 4 24 4 25 position 4 42 Positioning See Tape positioning Power Requirements DSCM 2 6 TAM 2 6 powermon 4 43 Programming See Transport Prompt See echo RCC Recorder Control Computer 1 2 RCL 4 1 command formats A 5 command response summary A 3 interface library 4 1 4 58 A 1
298. orrupted You might be able to reload it using the eject button emergency procedure outlined at the end of Section 6 2 5 Q During bootup the S2 reports Error Checksum incorrect SRAM corrupted A Something has caused the contents of the 3 MB Static RAM board to be corrupted You will need to reload the affected partitions or the entire SRAM See Section 6 2 for details 6 I can t log on using rlogin telnet or connect an RCL socket from outside the local network A You must specify a gateway inet address in the S2 boot parameters Also the subnet mask must be correct in the inet on ethernet field of the boot parameters for gateways to work See Section 4 4 1 for more information 6 2 Software Reloads Upgrades The S2 Recorder Operating System software resides on the battery backed up Static RAM board and can be reloaded via the console serial port in order to upgrade software or recover from an SRAM failure To do so you must operate the S2 from the ROSCO terminal emulator program ROSCO runs on IBM PC and compatible com puters and also on PCFS Linux computers using the dosemu DOS emulator The data file for reloading the 52 SRAM as well as the ROSCO program and other utilities are supplied with the 52 on floppy diskettes These files are also available from the following FTP directory ftp ftp sgl crestech ca pub s2 swload This is the distribution directory for the latest S2 ROS software versions Chec
299. ou prefer Give the internet name or address assigned to the target S2 system e g telnet 132 251 42 94 If console password protection is enabled you will have to enter a user ID and password see below for more information Otherwise you will be connected immediately While the network console connection is active the 52 will no longer output information to or accept commands from the console serial port Only one simultaneous network console connection is allowed additional rlogin or telnet requests will be rejected Type logout to close the rlogin telnet connection and return control to the serial port You can also force control to revert to the serial port by typing cntl C cntl C cntl in quick succession on the serial console s keyboard do not use this control sequence at any other time After connecting using rlogin or telnet you may need to change the terminal type if it is not correct To do so use the term console command e g term xterm To change the default terminal type used by the S2 at bootup include the word default or edit the defaults file and set the term parameter as appropriate Console rlogin telnet access may be protected by a user ID and password prompt although these are not enabled when the S2 is shipped To enable password protection set the desired user ID and password using the loginuserid and loginpasswd parameters in the defaults file You must first encrypt the password using the encrypt console command then use
300. ou tum off per transport write current offsets effectively making the per transport offset zero The defaults file wrlevoffoption parameter controls the state of the wrlevoffset option switches at bootup The service option has a number of sub options to be used by service per sonnel for various tasks related to maintaining and repairing transports They will be described briefly here for more information see Section 6 4 1 transport N service lastserv transport N service lasthead These two commands zero the time since last service in service time and time since last head replacement head use time respectively which are stored in the EEPROM inside each transport A service is defined as any time the transport case is opened for inspection or maintenance such as cleaning greasing and should be indicated by typing transport N service lastserv as soon as the trans port is back in operation A head replacement is defined as any time the upper head cylinder is replaced and by definition also implies a service It should be indicated by typing transport N service lasthead after the transport is back in operation Both the in service and head use times are measured in hours and minutes of active head use and can be displayed by typing transport N status time In addition to the in service and head use times this also shows the total cumulative head use and total on time since manufacture transport N service edithist This command allows you
301. play shows disabled See the userio command on Page 4 55 for more informa tion C2 DV out Indicates which of the 16 user data validity outputs on the C2b and C2c cables are active in the current mode and setup The numbers shown correspond to the output signal names DV OUT 0 to DV OUT 15 listed in Table B 3 Note that even channel numbers 0 2 4 etc appear on C2b and odd channel numbers 1 3 5 etc appear on C2c The C2c cable is needed only for 1 bit quantized modes with names of the form bxu 1 since all other modes use only even validity chan nels To avoid the need for the C2c cable substitute equivalent interleaved 1 bit modes for regular S2 modes e g use 1618 1 instead of 16x8 1 Unless the S2 PT is in play or set up to play only a subset of the potential C2 DV outputs is 52 User s Manual OPERATION active since there is only one diagnostic signal path When the UI is set to feed through mode all C2 DV outputs are forced high SC PLL lock mode This shows the current System Clock PLL lock mode one of refclk 1hz errmes xtal or manual indicating the SC PLL lock reference source This is normally refclk for a Record Terminal and 1 7 or errmes for a Playback Terminal The scpllmode defaults file parameter determines the default SC PLL mode to use at bootup See the description of the 5 11 mode command on Page 4 44 for further details Ref clk 1 Hz in Shows the source of the high rate and 1 Hz input refer
302. pped The tofile option can be used to transfer log files or parts thereof over the network to a remote host by specifying an appropriate destination file name if your S2 system is equipped with an Ethernet board The remote host must be configured to accept RSH requests or FTP logins from the S2 system and the host name address and RSH userid or FTP userid amp passwd must be entered in the S2 boot parameters see Sec tion 4 4 1 A command to transfer the log file might look something like this log display tofile host name local s2 logs 10g941214 The host name with a colon is VxWorks syntax for remote files Command logout Syntax logout Description Closes the connection when accessing the console via the optional ethernet board using rlogin or telnet S2 operation is not disturbed in any way and display output reverts to the console serial port A typical use of this is to monitor one or more 52 systems from a networked workstation calling up their console displays only when needed using rlogin or telnet You can force an rlogin or telnet connection to be closed from the serial console by typing cntl C cntl C cntl in quick suc cession do not use this control sequence at any other time Command mk3 P Syntax mk3 form enable disable errinduce sync crc NUM lt errs gt NUM frm showframe NUM frm clkinv posmidcell negmidcell hwid SS dataextract synctrig 1hztrig NUM lt offset gt NUM lt uchan gt dcbia
303. puter The S2 RCL port is configured for DTE operation so the C6 cable needs to be a null cable exchange pins 2 and 3 if the external computer is also acting as DTE This is the case for IBM PCs and compatibles The external computer should be configured for 19200 baud 8 data bits one stop bit no parity The RCL baud rate can be set up to 57 600 by editing the system defaults file see Section 4 2 7 This cable is a serial cable connecting the S2 to a console terminal The S2 console port is configured for DCE operation The terminal should be configured for 9600 baud 8 data bits one stop bit no parity The console baud rate can be changed by editing the system defaults file but the maximum allowed rate is 9600 baud 2 3 2 S2 System Cables C3 C4 C4p C5 C3 is a 50 ohm ribbon cable transporting clock and formatted data from the DSCM to the TAMs The cable is terminated via a single connector at the DSCM FORM board and is split in the middle to allow the cable to service two TAMs C4 is a 50 ohm ribbon cable transporting retum signal from the TAMs to the DSCM The cable is terminated via a single connector at the DSCM rear panel and is split in the middle to allow the signals to come from two TAMs C4p is a continuation of the C4 cable required to split the signals to and from the TAMs into separate channels for the eight DRDp boards in the playback terminal The eight split ends are labeled according to channel number and
304. r cmd resp seq data chksum EOT APPENDIX A them as a single byte with value 1 If a single SOT is detected in the middle of an incoming packet then a new packet has started and previously received bytes are discarded The total number of bytes in the packet including everything except the SOT and EOT char acters offset by adding 505 Each packet is at least 7 bytes long so the minimum length code value is 512 Doubled SOT data bytes within the message body are counted as byte not 2 Length is a 16 bit 2 byte quantity with the most significant byte MSB transmitted first The offset of 505 is added to ensure that the MSB of the length cannot be an SOT Lengths between 0 and 511 0 and 0 01 are illegal and will cause the receiver to discard the packet The maximum packet length is artificially set at 2054 bytes before offsetting to limit transmission times and buffer sizes The address of the device for which the packet is intended When using RS 485 multi drop operation with more than one RCL device controlled by a single master each device must be assigned a unique address from 0 to 253 If there is only one RCL device regular RS 232C can be used and the address assigned to the device should be 0 Address 254 RCL_ADDR_MASTER indicates the controlling computer or master Address 255 RCL ADDR BROADCAST is a special broadcast code intended for diagnostic and con figuration use only All RCL slave devices will resp
305. r Soe e e ec e o 5 gt or C 4 c c 0doc d pm pum v o sa ee x os uo osr m ec E e ec ez KH e s 52 2 PM 9 5a 2 M eocoooooccooocooocooooc 4m N Shia SoH SoH N o ce 1 mde Geeoodeceeececcessoe 25 m mi 5 io ess o P KE won CN TATE CA eee E Ed Td row Poa 3 OUTI14 00 13 00 12 00 11 00 19 OUTS OUTES 00 7 ouTe ours ouT4 00 3 ouT2 OUTIL OUTDO 00 15 415 4UA 405 3LS 3UA 3US 21 215 2UA 2us 1LA 1LS 1UA 1US 4LA 2 41315 4121 41312 41912 quii 2412 SET SET SET SET SET SET SET SET SET SET SET 10 PRESET TVGS5 CLOCK TVG4 SYNCH
306. r anywhere in the command the soft key display will show ERR When a command is potentially finished DONE will be shown in one of the soft keys Unless DONE appears it is not possible to press return to execute the command Because of the command completion feature provided by the soft key system it has not been necessary to shorten or abbreviate commands to make them easier to type In fact commands are often longer than necessary to make them more descriptive The soft key labels are limited to 7 characters so occasionally a keyword will be truncated to fit on the display To see the hidden part press function key 10 or Cntl G repeatedly and all over length soft keys will scroll to the left On some terminals there may be too few function keys or the function keys may not work In this case a simple work around is provided press escape followed by a number from 0 to 9 to simulate pressing the corresponding function key 0 is function key f10 If desired almost all commands can be entered using function keys and numbers alone When expert mode is off expert off non essential and diagnostic commands not needed for regular S2 operation do not appear in the softkey display and cannot be entered This is useful to reduce confusion when first learning about the S2 or to prevent inappropriate commands from being used during regular operation Key Operat
307. r equivalent Signal pin assignments are shown in Table B 2 The conductors in C2 not used for signal are to be grounded near the signal source The length of the cable should not exceed 10 meters B 2 1 4 Input Output Cable Connection Test Modes In C1 and C2 test modes cables C1 and C2 carry test data generated by the test vector generator circuit illustrated in Figure B 1 The C1 test data is to be sourced by hardware resident in the user s system and should be substituted for normal record data during test The user should select S2 mode cl1test16 16 Mbit s data over all 16 input signal 52 User s Manual APPENDIX B lines and examine system status to ensure that message STAT UICVERFAIL is not present The test modes are available at various data rates 4 8 16 32 Mbits s The identical C2 test data is substituted by the S2 for normal playback data when the S2 mode is set to c2test16 16 Mbit s data over all 16 output signal lines The C2 test modes are available at various data rates 4 8 16 32 Mbits s The test vector generator is driven by the data rate clock and initialized internally by a data rate width 1Hz signal Table B 7 shows the first 20 words of test vector data following a synchronous 1Hz preset at sample clock period t 0 Although the S2 supports and C2 test modes at data rates of 4 8 16 and 32 Mb s per data line normally only the 16 Mb s data rate test modes will be used Figures B 2 and B 4
308. r mode setting see the mode com mand The product gives the total system data rate 52 User s Manual OPERATION 52 Recorder User 1 0 rec24 1998 217 20 58 44 Operating System Data rate 32 Mb s x 4 Recorder mode 32x4 2 br C1 data in 0 3 Station delay Eno 1 Hz inl Transports C2 data out 0 3 Diag dec O in channel O play 1 C2 DV out 0 2 Diag dec time XXX XX XX XX XX 1 Cl Diag dec sync OX uncalib 2 11 SC PLL lock mode errmes 3 1 Ref clk 1 Hz in unused Est err rate 21 0 2 8 ch 4 11 Ref clk in rate unused data valid 0 00 128 Mb s 1 Ref clk out rate 32 MHz Decoder 01234567 bd z 5 7 1 lt lt E REC L RRTU gt userio u Chelp 1 time 1 mode 1 Ctapeid 1 user 1 record 1 play 1 ETC 1 Figure 4 7 Sample ROS Screen User I O data in Indicates which of the 16 user data input channels on the cable are active in the current mode User data channels are numbered from 0 to 15 corresponding to the input signal names IN 0 to IN 15 listed in Table B 1 Certain sequences of channels are abbreviated to fit on the screen e g 0 2 14 means 0 2
309. rameters are stored in a small 2K battery backed up Static RAM located on the RCC MK48T02 SRAM clock chip not the 3 MB SRAM board and are retained while the power is off You must obtain an internet address and name for each 52 system connected to the network To do this contact your local network administrator Then set the S2 boot parameters as follows Enter the boot monitor by resetting the 52 and hitting the space bar before the countdown completes to reset turn the power off and on or press the small red reset button on the RCC board Then type lt return gt and a series of prompts will appear boot device Enter the type of Ethernet interface being used You must always enter here processor number Always enter 0 for this field host name Enter the internet name of your remote host computer system e g sgl crestech ca The remote host may be used for transferring files to and 52 User s Manual OPERATION from the S2 software upgrades or for VxWorks network boots This field is not required if you will only be using the Ethernet for console rlogin telnet or RCL socket connections but must not be lefi blank Enter x if you do not wish to supply an actual host name For more information on configuring a remote host for special operations like software upgrades and file transfers see Stp ftp sgl crestech ca pub s2 doc appnotes HostSetup file name This is only required if you plan to perform
310. rate of 128 Mbits s The mode setting in conjunction with the group setting determines which transports will be active The mode should be set prior to recording or playback For playback any mode can be chosen as long as it has the same total data rate as the mode used for recording so that the correct number of transports is selected The precise mode will be set automatically after playback starts There are 51 modes in total 12 of which are test modes The complete list is as follows S2 modes 4 4 1 4 8 1 4x16 1 4 4 2 4 8 2 4 16 2 8 2 1 8 4 1 8 8 1 8 16 1 8 2 2 8x4 2 8 8 2 8x16 2 16 1 1 16x2 1 16x4 1 16x8 1 16x2 2 16x4 2 16x8 2 32 1 1 32x2 1 32 4 1 32 2 2 32 4 2 418 1 814 1 818 1 16i4 1 1618 1 4p8 2 8p8 2 16p8 2 8d16 2 8n16 2 16v8 2 32a4 2 32b4 2 Test modes cltest4 cltest8 cltestl6 cltest32 c2test4 c2test8 c2test16 c2test32 diag4 diag8 diagl6 diag32 S2 mode designators are a string of the form btu q where b is the user channel bit rate in Mbits s u is the number of user data channels and q is the quantization 1 or 2 bit The designator t is a letter such as x i p a or others x indicates a regular S2 mode with user channels assigned consecutively starting at 0 i stands for interleaved every second channel used and p stands for partitioned channels divided into 2 groups 0 7 and 8 15 Other letters have ot
311. rature While the system is off measure the ambient temperature near the TAMs in degrees Celsius If the TAMs are not exposed to localized temperature or air flow conditions the temperature of the room should be adequate for calibration MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING S2 PT User s Manual MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING 3 4 Disconnect the C3 and C4 cables between the TAMs and DSCM and tum on the power of the DSCM only so as not to disturb the temperature of the transports Following the power on self test which has failed owing to the disconnected cables command the system to display transport temperatures on the console transport display temp The temperatures will not be shown yet since the TAMs are still off Reconnect the C3 and C4 cables and then turn on the power to the TAMs As soon as all the transports are responding as observed in the console transport window calibrate the temperature as follows transport all caltemp REF where REF is the temperature in degrees Celsius measured in step 2 above If any transports are off due to erroneous under or over temperature conditions you should use 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 instead of a11 in the command above If any transports are off due to previous under or over temperature conditions type transport 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 power on to turn them back on For additional information see the description of the caltemp option of the transport command on Page 4 53 S2 P
312. re not allowed they will return ERR SELFIINPROG Users should poll S2 status to determine when the diagnostic test completes STAT DIAGIP indicates that the test is in progress STAT DIAGDONE indicates that the test completed successfully and STAT DIAGFAIL indicates that the test has found a system fault or aborted due to an error BERDCB 91 52 User s Manual APPENDIX A Data bytel Desired operation type 0x01 Perform Formatter bit error rate measurement 0x02 Perform UI bit error rate measurement 0x03 Perform UI DC bias measurement byte2 Channel number to use internal data channel 0 through 7 for FORM BER or user data channel 0 through 15 for UI BER and UI DC bias byte3 Measurement time in seconds 1 255 This directly affects the length of time for this command to execute and thus determines the required timer duration value see below Recommended typical value 1 sec recommended maximum value 10 sec total data bytes 3 Expected Resp RESP BERDCB Timer Duration Measurement time 1 sec Eq Console Cmd form berc uic berc uic dcbias Description Performs one of 3 types of statistical measurements on a given data channel For matter bit error rate UI bit error rate or UI DC bias All of these measurements can only be done on one channel at a time The FORM BER measurement performs a true bit error rate measurement on one 16 Mbit s internal S2 data channel 0 7 by comparing against the Formatter test ve
313. re with the ROS automatic playback monitoring use the delay command instead delay should be used for any regular delay adjustments that fall within the delay rate and acceleration limits given on Page 4 33 Command barrelroll Syntax barrelroll on off Description This command is used to turn barrel roll on and off When on barrel roll rotates user data over all available transports and un rotates on playback so that the pos sible effect of a marginal transport is averaged over all channels Barrel roll has no effect and is considered inactive in any modes which require only one transport e g 16x1 1 8x2 2 Barrel roll must be turned off for both record and playback to obtain correct output data when playing back tapes on an RT since an RT has only one decoder and therefore cannot reconstruct barrel rolled data During auto playback barrel roll is automatically set to the same condition as at record but during manual playback it must be set manually use tapeinfo to show the required barrel roll setting The barrelroll defaults file parameter gives the default barrel roll setting to use at bootup Command tapetype Syntax tapetype STR type default typecodes Description This command is used to set which type of tape is being used Several different types of tapes are approved for use in the S2 and the 52 needs to be informed which tape is being used due to differences in magnetic properties Tape type codes are numbers
314. refclk mode div gives low level access to the high rate reference clock divisor active only in refclk mode This should normally be controlled using userio clkin instead See also the delay command and the RCL ERRMES command 52 User s Manual OPERATION Command serial Syntax serial Description Displays the serial number assigned to this S2 system This number can be used to keep track of S2 systems in the field and to match tapes to the system they were recorded on Each S2 encodes its system serial number onto tape when re cording to see the serial number extracted from tape during playback use the tapeinfo command If you need to check a specific tape e g you suspect not all tapes have the same system serial number make sure you are in manual play back play manual select the desired transport using setup transport N and then type tapeinfo Note that each transport has its own serial number which is also encoded on tape You can display transport serial numbers using transport display serial to show the serial numbers for your S2 system or transport display serialpb to show the serial numbers of the transports used to record the currently playing tapes Thus you can trace tapes not only to specific S2 systems but also to individual transports The S2 system serial number is stored in the system defaults file serialnum parameter and on rare occasions may become incorrect For example if the Static RAM board is replaced
315. resent should be positioned in slot 2 If no Ethernet board is being used the IACK interrupt acknowledge backplane jumper for slot 2 must be in place If an Ethernet board is present the IACK jumper must be removed The 3MB SRAM board should occupy slot 3 Slot 4 should be empty with the IACK jumper in place The Formatter FORM must be positioned in slot 5 The DRDp boards should be positioned sequentially from left to right starting with DRDp 0 in slot 6 The UI may occupy any of the slots to the right of the DRDp s SRAM and RCC Battery Replacement The SRAM board uses two lithium batteries type LTC 7PN 3 5 V 750 mAH to retain memory contents while the power is off These have a rated lifetime of 10 years and should be replaced when the red FAIL LEDs on the SRAM board come on The MVMEI33XT RCC uses an SGS Thomson 48 02 2K SRAM clock chip with built in battery lifetime 3 to 6 years It should be replaced when the RCC no longer retains the system time or network boot parameters while the power is off Note that the S2 may be operated normally after the SRAM clock chip battery dies except that the system time will not be retained while the power is off and users requiring the network facilities will have to re enter the boot parameters each time they turn on the system see Section 4 4 1 S2 PT User s Manual MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING RCC ETHERNET SRAM FORM 8 x Data Recovery DRDp Ul SLOT
316. rface 32 MHz clk Figure B 3 C1 Input Timing Interface clk data rate iv 1 2 2d 2 2 2 3 2 4 2 5 2 7 2 8 4 4 4 8 4 10 4 12 4 19 4 22 4 26 4 28 6 4 6 8 6 13 6 14 6 14 6 14 6 14 6 16 6 16 6 16 6 16 7 1 7 1 10 11 11 52 User s Manual Figure B 4 C2 Output Timing Interface 32 MHz clk Figure B 5 C2 Output Timing Interface clk data rate Figure B 6 C2 Output Timing Interface MkIII format Figure B 7 C1 amp C2 Electrical Specifications B 12 B 12 B 13 B 13 52 User s Manual Table 4 1 Table 4 2 Table 5 1 Table 6 1 Table B 1 Table B 2 Table B 3 Table B 4 Table B 5 Table B 6 Table B 5 Table B 7 Table B 8 List of Tables Console Special Function Keys Terminal Types Supported by ROS S2 Approved Tape Types Maintenance Chart for AG2520 Transports C1 Input Cable Signal Assignments S2 C2a Output Cable Signal Assignments S2 C2b c Output Cable Signal Assignments C2a Output Cable Signal Assignments S2 Modes with active C1 C2 signal channels C6 RCL Cable Signal Assignments S2 Modes with active C1 C2 signal channels C2a Cable Test Vector Sequence C2b C2c Cable Test Vector Sequence Vi 4 6 4 16 5 2 6 6 B 4 B 5 B 6 B 7 B 8 B 9 B 9 B 10 B 10 52 User s Manual INTRODUCTION 1 INTRODUCTION 1 1 S2 PT User Documentation The S2 PT User s Manual contains information required by users of the S2 Playback Termin
317. rossbar switch to ensure that each DRD board can output on all 8 internal data channels Failure at any of the above steps causes the self test to terminate and print a descriptive message to the console interaction window The status window will indicate Diagnostic test failed with a positive numeric diagnostic code In addition to self test 1 some batch files are supplied with the S2 to test record and playback operation berlp tst records 30 minutes of FORM test vector data at speed LP and plays it back measuring the bit error rates obtained berslp tst records 30 minutes of FORM test vector data at speed SLP and plays it back measuring the bit error rates obtained inter tst repeats the playback portion of either of the above tests after the tapes have been interchanged These batch files are intended to verify correct S2 operation following shipment See Section 2 8 for further details S2 PT User s Manual TAPE 5 TAPE 5 1 Choice of Tape and Tape Speed The following types of tape are approved for use in the 52 and S2 PT Other types of tape should be avoided Type 1 Scotch ST 120 SE 180 20 micron SVHS tape manufactured by 3M now no longer in production This was available in North America as ST 120 and in Europe Australia as SE 180 about 5 longer than ST 120 2 Maxell ST 182 SE 260 13 micron SVHS tape Also available as the very slightly shorter Maxell ST 180 May be designated XR S
318. rr gt Description Used to translate numeric error codes which may occasionally appear in the status window to their corresponding text message For a complete list of error codes see Page A 32 All ROS error codes are negative numbers Positive numbers are not error codes but may be status codes or diagnostic codes see also status decode and diag decode 52 User s Manual OPERATION Command expert Syntax expert on off Description Sets expert mode which controls whether or not non essential and diagnostic con sole commands are suppressed When expert mode is off expert off com mands and options not needed for regular S2 operation do not appear in the console softkey display and may not be entered This is useful when first learning to operate the S2 or to prevent inappropriate commands from being entered during regular use When expert mode is on all 52 console commands and options are available Expert mode does not affect batch files or the RCL The expert defaults file pa rameter determines the default expert mode setting to use at bootup Command ff Syntax ff Description Fast forward winds the tapes Stops playback first if necessary The S2 must be in stop play play pause or rewind state otherwise fast forward is not allowed Also must not currently be aligning or positioning Command form Syntax form diag onloff berc NUM lt chan gt rotate NUM lt time gt frms s m h undetected log rand onj
319. rt recommend abort current operation 0 no fatal error conditions in report bit2 1 one or more clear on read conditions in report 0 no clear on read conditions in report bit3 7 reserved byte2 Number of status entries max 32 byte3 List of status entries For each entry there are 2 bytes as follows Ist byte Status code number from 1 to 127 RCL_STAT CODE as defined in table below 2nd byte Status type 010 1 error condition in table O non error condition always set if bit 1 is set 1 fatal error condition F in table 0 non fatal condition bit2 1 clear on read condition in table 0 non clear on read 013 7 reserved total data bytes of status entries 2 2 max 130 Brief status report from the STATUS command This lists the currently active S2 status conditions by their numeric codes To obtain additional information such as text messages you should send a STATUS DETAIL RCL command There are 3 types of status codes informational error and fatal error Each of these may additionally be designated clear on read which means they are automatically cleared immediately following the status request Conditions of any type which appear and disappear between status requests are not lost they are latched until the next status request Status should be read regularly every 1 to 5 seconds to ensure that information is up to date The status summary byte
320. rted or following application of power to the transports The position becomes known when a transport encounters beginning of tape BOT where the posi tion is defined to be 0 16 0 00 00 Although positions are normally posi tive for purposes of POSITION_SET the current position reading can take on small negative values due to anomalies around BOT There are two ways to perform positioning absolute and relative In addi tion there are two special positioning functions preset and re establish Abso lute positioning moves the tapes to a specific position regardless of their current location If the current position is not known the tapes are first auto matically rewound to the beginning to determine the position Either 1 or 8 individual position values may be specified If only 1 is specified number of positions 1 all transports are moved to the same position When 8 values are specified each corresponds to a transport in order from 0 through 7 Transports which are not selected under the current recorder mode and group settings will ignore the position command When 8 position values are given the entries for unselected transports should be filled in as Ox7FFFFFFF the maximum 32 bit signed integer value To determine which transports are currently unselected use POSITION READ and check for position entries with the value OX7FFFFFFFE Note that using Ox7FFFFFFF for transports which are currently selected is not allowed and wil
321. rts will be made to avoid changing existing error code numbers but such changes cannot be ruled out The mnemonics are unlikely to change If possible user software should not rely on the numeric error codes but use the error mnemonic instead To interpret an error code user software should decode it using ERROR DECODE and then take action based on the error mnemonic a string of the form ERR The mnemonic appears at the start of the error message and can be extracted by reading all characters up to but not including the first colon The message which follows can be written to the screen or recorded in a log file ROS Error Return Codes 0 ERR NONE No error has occurred 1 ERR_OPFAIL Operation failed non specific error 2 ERR_ILCMD Unrecognized command 3 ERR_NUNIQ Non unique items 4 ERR_BADPARM Incorrect parameter format 5 ERR_BADLEN Incorrect or illegal length 6 ERR_BADVAL Value is illegal or out of range 7 ERR_TIMEOUT Operation timed out 8 ERR_CHKSUM Checksum was bad 9 ERR_DPTOOSOON Xilinx D P pin went high too soon 10 ERR_DPNOTHI Xilinx D P pin did not go high 11 ERR_BADFORM Bad format encountered in operation 12 ERR_VXIO VxWorks I O error 13 ERR_VXSYS VxWorks system error 14 ERR_DEVNP Required device not present 15 ERR_ILMODE Recorder mode is illegal for requested operation 16 ERR_ILCONFIG Recorder configuration is illegal for requested operation 17 ERR_TOLEXCD Measurement error tolerance exceeded
322. s NUM uchan NUM lt time gt s m h NUM frms level edge testchan NUM nrzm onloff Description Sets displays Mark III control options and switches The 52 UI board includes a Mark III IV formatter which provides the capability to output S2 data in Mark III format allowing direct playback of 52 tapes at Mark compatible correlators Note that this only reformats data as it is output i e the recorded data does not contain Mark III format The command mk3 form enable turns on the Mark III formatter and switches the C2a cable output to Mark compatible mode Depending on the current S2 mode the channel data rate will either be 4 5 9 or 18 Mbits s with corresponding Mark frame rates of 200 400 and 800 Hz The output data is NRZM encoded just like a real Mark playback terminal The mk3 command by itself switches to the Mark III formatter display window replaces the User Parms window repeat the command to switch back The form clkinv option can be used to switch the phase of the output clock to have either the positive clock edge or the negative clock edge appear at data mid cell depending on the requirements of the destination equipment de fault is positive edge at mid cell The hwid option is used to set the two hex digit Mark III hardware ID code encoded on tape and to display its value on playback The hardware ID facility is provided for compatibility with Mark III VLBI operations and should be used
323. s playback RT 407 1997 127 21 36 02 1 1 System Tape ID undefined Recorder mode 16x8 1 br 1 Station delay no 1 Hz inl Transports Info field 1 undefined Decoder input channel 1 play 0 no tape Info field 2 undefined Decoded time 100 14 31 28 28 1 14 31 28 28l1 Info field 3 undefined Decoder sync 100 cal hold 2 no tape 1 1 3 no tape User data valid yes Est err rate 1 1e 4 4 no tape Tape speed lp data valid 99 99 5 no tape Tape position 0 14 00 4 00 s Decoder Xbar 01234567 5 no tape 1 7 no tape lt lt gt t1 Vl REC Errors in Blocks 0 249 31 Scale 17 Flatness 0 006398 Figure 6 8 Proper tape guide adjustment no scope Figure 6 9 End of frame distortion example1 no scope 52 Recorder Operating User Parms playback RT 407 1997 127 21 41 27 1 System Tape ID undefined Recorder mode 16 8 1 br mU LT 1 Station delay Eno 1 Hz inl Transports Info field 1 undefined Decoder input channel 1 play 0 no tape Info field 2 undefined Decoded time 100 14 29 27 44 1 14 29 27 441 Info field 3 undefined Decoder sync 100 cal hold 2 no tape 1 1 3 no tape User data valid yes Est err rate 3 8e 4 4 no tape Tape speed lp X data valid 99 854 5 no tape Tape position 0 12 00 4 00 s Decoder 01234567 5 no tape 1 1 7 no tape 1 Errors in
324. s accompanied by other status conditions such as STAT NOALIGN so STAT TAPESYNCERR is not shown on the console or the RCL unless the verbose level is 2 or higher 1 1s the level for normal operation The display shows the number of errors in one of two formats if there have been fewer than 10 sync errors in all 8 transports a string of 8 digits is shown where each gives the number of errors in the cor responding transport 0 7 If any transport has had 10 or more errors only the one with the most errors is shown 52 User s Manual OPERATION 92 Mnemonic STAT SCPLLDACRAIL Type Informational Console Msg System clk PLL DAC at near rail Interpretation The System Clock PLL software controlled DAC value is within 596 of its maxi mum limits This can occur only in SC PLL modes 1hz and errmes i e playback and is normal during initial lock acquisition At any time afterwards it means that the S2 is operating at or near the bounds of its playback speed delay rate control range 93 Mnemonic STAT SCPLLACCRAIL Type Informational Console Msg System clk PLL accum at near Interpretation The System Clock PLL software accumulator value is within 5 of its maximum limits This can occur only in SC PLL modes 1hz errmes i e playback and is normal during initial lock acquisition At any time afterwards it means that the S2 is operating at or near the bounds of its playback acceleration control range 94 M
325. s file is described in Section 4 2 7 No console commands can be typed while the self test executes about 45 seconds but you may choose to interrupt the test by typing Cntl C once Most RCL commands which affect tape motion or system switch settings are also not allowed during the self test Any faults detected are reported in the interaction window as well as an overall diagnostic failure indication in the status window For more information on the self test see Section 4 6 S2 PT User s Manual OPERATION Code Terminal Description Code Terminal Description adm31a LSI adm31a adm3 LSI adm3 adm3a LSI adm3a amiga Amiga ANSI ampex210 210 ansi25 IBM PC NANSI SYS ansi Ansi apollo Apollo d800 Direct 800 A dialogue80 Ampex dialogue 80 dm1520 Datamedia 1520 dm2500 Datamedia 2500 dm3025 Datamedia 3025a dm3045 Datamedia 3045a go140 Graphon go 140 h19a Heathkit h19 ansi mode hp150a HP 150a hp2621a HP 2621a hp2640a HP 2640a hp2645 HP 2645 hp2648a HP 2648a graphics terminal ibm3101 IBM 3101 10 ibmpc IBM PC ibmpcx IBM PC xenix console display ISC8001 ISC 8001 kaypro2 Kaypro 1 macintosh Macintosh with MacTerminal masscomp Masscomp regenti00 Adds Regent 100 regent20 Adds Regent 20 125 Adds Regent 25 regent40 Adds Regent 40 40 Adds Regent 40 regent60 Adds Regent 60 st Atari ST sun cmd Su
326. s maintained by a battery backed up clock chip 48 02 on the RCC board so it should usually remain correct within a few seconds Following system bootup and remote time setting and certain severe system timing glitches two question marks 22 are shown beside the system time indicating that it may not be accurate Use the time command to set it or type time validate if it is actually correct The convert option is useful to convert between day numbers and the more familiar month day representation The set remote option can be used to set the time from a remote network host using the internet RDATE protocol IP port number 37 Your 52 system must be equipped with an Ethernet board and connected to a network from which the host to obtain the time from is accessible The name or internet address of the time host can be specified in the command or if no name is given the value entered for the timehost parameter in the system defaults file will be used If the timehost defaults parameter is missing or blank the host name and address from the boot parameters will be used instead When specifying the time host it will usually be necessary to use the internet address and not the host name since the required name translation information will not be present un less you have taken steps to add it See the general description of time setting on Page 4 10 for more information 52 User s Manual OPERATION Command transport Syntax transport
327. s tape frames It must first be enabled then error location histograms can be displayed Note You should use manual playback and be setup to the transport in question when using the syncerrlocate facility The histogram has various options such as display range lim its running time limit cumulative display exponential averaging and logarithmic display Cumulative values are reset each time the histogram is displayed except when cumulative is used alone without exponential averaging or a time limit allowing data accumulation in the background See Section 6 4 6 for an example use of the syncerrlocate histogram drand and dprec control the de randomizer and de precoder xbar sets the DRD crossbar which determines the mapping of transports DRDs onto internal S2 data channels 0 7 The dhook option can be used to select digital direct hookup but use setup dhook instead usrdv controls the low level switch used to im plement user data valid see user dv Command default Syntax default STR lt parameter gt STRA lt value gt blank fromfile STR lt file name tofile STR lt filename gt Description This command can be used in place of the edit defaults command to directly view or modify parameters in the system defaults file This may be desirable if you don t feel comfortable using the editor which is similar to Unix vi The defaults file contains many system startup options and parameters which allow users to customize S2 beha
328. s total 0x02 position preset byte2 number of positions being specified 1 or 8 byte3 List of positions Each entry is a signed 32 bit integer representing the absolute position in seconds since BOT MSB first Values should be restricted to the range 0 43199 or 0x80000000 to mark a position as unknown or Ox7FFFFFFF if byte2 8 and transport not selected up to 32 bytes total 0x03 re establish for all currently selected transports rewinds the tape to the beginning and then returns to the original position which is then known no additional data bytes total data bytes 2 34 max RESP ERR ERR NONE 1 5 sec position The position command is used before playback or record to position the tapes to a specific location Position is measured as the number of seconds of recorded data since the beginning of tape and is normally displayed as hours minutes seconds e g 3 18 57 This format is similar to a tape time ex cept that the hours portion is normally shown with only a single digit Sec tions of blank tape do not count in position determination During positioning the recorder state changes to RSTATE POSITION use STATE READ to test Although there may be up to 8 tapes and therefore 8 different posi tions we try to work with a single position value whenever possible since the group of currently active transports will usually be in almost the same lo cation The current position is considered unknown after a tape is inse
329. sequent console commands to the file until you type batch log end Then the same sequence of commands can be re executed any time later using batch common The delete option is used to erase batch files Batch files can be chained but not nested simply by executing one from within another To make an endless loop have a batch file call itself To interrupt a batch file press Cntl C once Command beep Syntax beep NUM on off Description Causes the console terminal to beep or turns beeping on and off May be useful in batch files Command boxmode Syntax boxmode s2 c16 bita NUM STR lt filename gt Description For diagnostic use only Downloads a Xilinx device connected to the UI board external download port Command clear Syntax clear Description Clears the console interaction window Command config Syntax config save restore verify delete STR lt names ls long Description Saves or restores the current S2 configuration which includes most system switch settings except the transport tape motion state This is useful to take a snapshot of the system so that it can be restored later Configurations can be named or if no name is given the name default is used The verify option can be used to test the integrity of a saved configuration Software updates in particular may render existing configurations invalid Use the 1s option to list existing configu 52 User s Manual OPERATION
330. serial number and nickname All three of these values come from the system defaults file station nickname and serialnum options See RESP STATION INFO for more information CONSOLECMD generic 70 bytel ASCII console command string terminated by a NULL 0 character maximum 255 characters not incl NULL total data bytes length of string 1 max 256 RESP ERR ERR NONE 3 0 sec Executes an arbitrary console command There are some severe limitations First no command output is returned except the error return code so com mands which just display information are of no use Second it is up to the caller to ensure that the chosen command is guaranteed to complete in less than 3 seconds For example during playback setup 0 transport 5 is fine but setup transport 5 is bad because it can take more than 3 seconds to decode channel information from transport 5 Commands such as form berc are way out you will permanently hang the RCL and probably eventually crash the S2 software Any command already supported by the RCL should not be executed with CONSOLECMD even apparently in nocuous commands such as record or stop Remember use this feature at your own risk POSTIME READ 71 bytel Transport number 0 7 total data bytes 1 RESP POSTIME 0 5 sec none This command is for SGL internal use when running tests to check and cali brate the internal transport positioning software The response RESP POS
331. sion external computer times out 5 External computer S2 rewind command seq 102 6 52 gt External computer ERR NONE response seq 102 Some number of data bytes The theoretical maximum number of data bytes that may be transmitted is 65535 512 65023 however in practice packets are never that long because transmission time would be excessive over 30 sec at 19200 baud and too much memory would be required for buffering In practice we limit the data portion to 2047 bytes and the entire packet to 2054 bytes not including SOT and EOT A 16 bit unsigned binary checksum MSB first Calculated by taking the 16 least significant bits of the sum of all bytes except SOT EOT and the checksum itself Doubled SOT bytes in the message body are counted only once not twice Received packets whose checksum does not match the calculated checksum are discarded End of Transmission 04 decimal Defines the end of the packet The receiver only checks to see if it is there since the length field determines how many bytes are in the packet If EOT is not found at the end of the packet then the entire packet is discarded 2 S2 PT User s Manual APPENDIX A The external control computer must use timeouts when waiting for replies from the S2 Incorrect packets received by either end are always discarded causing the external computer master to time out and re send the command The repeated packet must use the same sequ
332. so function as cursor keys To start inserting text press i Then press the escape key when you are done to return to command mode Use x to delete characters while in command mode When you are finished editing hit the upper case Z twice to save the file and exit the editor Type 4 and press return to quit without making any changes If the terminal type is not set correctly it may be difficult or impossible to edit In this case use the console term command to set the correct terminal type If the terminal you are using is not supported by the S2 you will need to add a definition for it to the termcap file without using the editor This can be done via the S2 install procedure which is invoked from the VxWorks shell by typing install You can use the console she11 command or press the space bar at the appropriate part of the bootup to enter the shell 52 User s Manual OPERATION 4 2 8 Console Screen Descriptions This section describes each console display parameter organized by window Some low level and diagnostic display parameters are not fully documented More important display parameters are marked with Those that are important only for record applications are marked and for playback applications 4 2 8 1 Crucial Parms Window upper right Figure 4 1 Top line left system nickname This is the conventional name assigned to this S2 system up to 8 characters long
333. software upgrades over the Ethernet If not enter x here since this field also must not be left blank Users planning to perform network software upgrades should enter the absolute pathname of the VxWorks boot file on their host computer system e g local s2 vxWorks Even if this file does not actually exist entering its name establishes a root directory for S2 related files and data For the above example the files used for network software upgrades would be placed in the directory local s2 ros data inet on ethernet e Enter the internet address assigned to this S2 system e g 132 251 42 94 This field is required It is also possible to include a subnet mask which you may need to do if the default mask 0000 doesn t work Specify the subnet mask after the address separated by colon e g 132 251 42 94 ffffff00 Note that the internet address and name are a property of the ethernet board not the RCC or the S2 system itself so if you swap ethernet boards you must enter a new address here inet on backplane b Always enter blank to clear this field It is not used and should always be host inet h If you have entered the name of a remote host computer at the host name prompt above enter its internet address here e g 132 251 42 1 Otherwise enter to clear this field gateway inet g Normally the S2 system is accessible only on the local subnet where it is connected To allow network access from distan
334. ss to the VxWorks boot file specified at the name prompt above and that user s account should allow access to the S2 system by placing appropriate entries in the rhosts or etc hosts equiv files 52 User s Manual OPERATION ftp password pw Enter to clear this field It should normally be blank Advanced network users who wish to use FTP instead of RSH for remote file copy operations e g log and batch files may enter the password corresponding to the userid chosen above flags f Always enter O for this field target name tn Enter the internet name assigned to the S2 system This field is optional If you do not wish to set it enter to clear this field startup script s Enter network to clear this field It is only relevant when booting VxWorks over the other o This field is not used Enter to clear it To exit the boot monitor and continue the boot type go or simply reset the S2 of the above information can also be entered from the VxWorks shell by typing bootChange This is especially useful if you are already logged on using rlogin or telnet and therefore cannot access the boot monitor After changing any parameters type reboot to reboot the system your connection will be broken and you will have to log in again 4 4 2 Console access via rlogin telnet To access the console display over the network use either rlogin or telnet depending on which is available or which one y
335. ssed If the 1 Hz input tick is not present then the error ERR NOUI1HZ will be returned This protocol is necessary because it is not possible to communicate exact times using the RCL alone Note that if the S2 station delay is non zero it will not be reflected in the returned time even though it affects the time encoded on tape This is done on purpose to make time reading symmetrical with time setting The external control com puter should obtain the station delay using DELAYM READ and add it to the time retumed by TIME READ to obtain the correct S2 system time with respect to the input S 1 C 1 Hz In System Clock PLL modes other than refclk and 117 the RESP_TIME response is sent immediately following the next S 1 Hz output tick 51 7 on C2a cable since the 1 Hz input is not used The sponse gives the time of the tick that just passed and should not be adjusted by adding the station delay The TIME READ response includes a time validated flag This flag is always FALSE following system bootup and certain severe system timing glitches and is set to TRUE following a TIME SET command Thus it gives an indication of whether the time is likely to be correct Note Unlike most other commands TIME_READ is not subject to auto matic communications retries within the RCL interface library otherwise the time returned would be uncertain The rcl_time_read function call should be re issued if a communications timeout occurs TIME
336. status information STATUS command Each S2 or other RCL device is assigned an address for communication and each RCL packet contains a destination address allowing multiple devices to be connected together and controlled simultaneously When there is more than one non networked RCL device RS 485 multi drop serial connections may be used In this case the S2 requires an external RS 232C to RS 485 conversion box This box should switch on its RS 485 tri state line drivers only when the RTS Request To Send signal from the S2 is high TRUE The S2 sets the RTS signal high just before each RCL message is transmitted and then sets RTS low FALSE following the transmission Please note that CRESTech SGL will provide the source code required to implement packet assembly disassembly for all RCL commands and responses described here to all S2 users This comes in the form of an interface library written in ANSI C Therefore it is not necessary for users to understand or implement the detailed packet protocol only how to use the individual RCL commands A 2 General Packet Format cmd resp code EOT 1 LSB MSB L LSB 8 8 SOT Start of Transmission 01 decimal Defines the start of the packet When a byte with the same code as the SOT character appears elsewhere in the message body it is repeated to distinguish it from a true SOT When the receiver detects two consecutive SOTS it interprets bits 52 User s Manual pkt len add
337. sues a transport temperature warning transport internal temperature over 55 degrees Celsius 6 4 1 Transport Replacement And Servicing The mechanics of the TAM transports are to be serviced according to the recommendations of the manufacturer as defined in the AG2510 AG2520 AG2530 AG2550 service manual and summarized in Table 6 1 The service manual is available from CRESTech SGL as part of the optional Transport Servicing Kit Service intervals can be identified using the service and head use time counters built into the transport software and available for readout using S2 console commands Two measured time intervals are available the time since last service also known as in service time and the time since last head replacement also known as head use time A service is defined as any time the transport shell is opened for inspection or maintenance such as cleaning greasing and should be indicated by typing the following console command after the transport is back in operation transport N service lastserv A head replacement is defined as any time the upper head cylinder is replaced and by definition also implies a service It should be indicated by typing the following console command after the transport is back in operation transport N service lasthead These two commands clear the time since last service and the time since last head replacement respectively which are stored in EEPROM inside each transport Both of these times are measured in
338. t 0 value 1 means that RESP IDENT generic 197 bytel RCL device type identifier string terminated by a NULL 0 char acter maximum 10 characters not incl NULL total data bytes length of string 1 max 11 Gives the RCL device type which determines what set of commands it responds to see the IDENT command 52 User s Manual 199 Response Msg Code Data Description APPENDIX A RESP VERSION generic 199 bytel ROS software version information string terminated by a NULL 0 character maximum 60 characters not incl NULL total data bytes length of string 1 max 61 Gives ROS software version information Includes CPU type in square brackets Example string 3 0d 162 compiled Fri May 16 12 51 58 EDT 1997 See the description of the VERSION command for more information 52 User s Manual APPENDIX B APPENDIX B 52 SIGNAL AND CONTROL INTERFACE SPECIFICATIONS B 1 Overview This appendix describes the physical electrical and timing characteristics of the signal and control cables connecting the S2 record and playback system to the user s hardware B 1 1 S2Signal Interface The 52 record and playback signal interface consists of up to four cables connecting to ports on the UI board 1 Cl Input user data on 16 signal lines input clock and 1Hz 2 C2a Output user data on 16 signal lines output clock and 1Hz and optional input clock and 1Hz for playback timing con
339. t EEPROMs Tape type is 3 Ampex 289 ST 126 SE 180 70 70 Is this the correct tape type for the tapes now in use y n q y Here are the old and new optimum per transport write current offsets Old 0 12 l1 4 22 99 325 4 222 54 1027 1054 qeu we 0ie 2l 12 3 22 12 3 5 6 6 72 56 Enter y or yes to write the new per transport write current offsets into the transport EEPROMs no to skip y Transport 0 7 write current offsets updated to new optimum values AII displayed information is also written to the S2 internal log and can be reviewed later by typing log display E fullscreen Offset values should not normally be larger than about 40 or 50 although almost any value can be fine if the transport performs well If you suspect a problem with the resulting write current offsets you should not write them into the transport EEPROMs answer Try repeating the optimization or contact s2support for advice include a copy of the log output 6 4 5 Transport Temperature Calibration Calibration of the transport temperature sensors should be performed if there is reason to suspect that one or more of the sensors are out of calibration It may be convenient to do this whenever the TAM fan filters are replaced The calibration procedure is as follows l 23 Power down the system for eight hours in a temperature stable environment so that the transports can cool to room tempe
340. t System Clock PLL mode 44 TAPETYPE SET Set the tape type 45 TAPETYPE READ Read the current tape type setting 50 MK3 FORM SET Enable disable Mark formatter and Mark Ill output on C2a cable 51 MK3 FORM READ Read current Mark III formatter enable disable state 55 TRANSPORT_TIMES For all 8 transports read head use time total power on time etc 60 STATION_INFO_READ Read station related information assigned to S2 system including station number 70 CONSOLECMD Execute an arbitrary console command caution required This is a generic cmd 71 POSTIME READ dere el tape time and tape position for a particular transport Return brief status report suitable for polling Contains overall error summary bit and overall fatal error summary bit Also contains count of active status 80 STATUS conditions and list of status code numbers in approximate order of priority Each status code includes error fatal and clear on read type indicator bits Clear on read status entries are automatically cleared by the STATUS command This is a generic command Return detailed text descriptions for one or all active status conditions suitable ede e AUR STATUS This is a generic command ee 83 ERROR DECODE Translate negative numeric error code to text message This is a generic cmd Initiate internal diagnostic self test 1 use STATUS to check completion Note 90 DIAG that most other RCL commands which affect tape motion or sys
341. t appear in the VxWorks hosts table so it may be easier to use the inet address timehost The following parameters are for diagnostics only Boot with the formatter RCLK enabled 1 or disabled 0 normally 0 formrclk 0 Enable automatic data recovery defaults saves 1 or disable 0 normally 1 drsetdefaultauto 1 Flag used by install procedure done indicates install done install not done 52 User s Manual APPENDIX D APPENDIX D UNIX TERMCAP FILE FORMAT D 1 Overview Termcap is a data base describing the capabilities of termi nals Terminals are described in termcap source descrip tions by giving a set of capabilities which they have by describing how operations are performed by describing pad ding requirements and specifying initialization sequences This database is used by applications programs such as vi 1 and libraries such as curses 3X so they can work with a variety of terminals without changes to the pro grams Each termcap entry consist of number of colon separated fields The first field for each terminal lists the various names by which it is known separated by bar 1 characters The first name is always two characters long and is used by older version 6 systems which store the terminal type in a 16 bit word in a system wide database The second name given is the most common abbreviation for the terminal this is the one to which the environment v
342. t network sites separated by one or more gate ways enter the internet address of the local gateway connecting your network to the outside world Only one gateway can be chosen and this becomes the default route for the S2 e g 130 155 192 2 The correct netmask must be specified at the inet on ethernet prompt for this to work To allow access only from the local network enter to clear this field If you wish to use more than one gateway or you do not wish to establish a default route for security reasons but still want to enable outside access from certain places you must leave this parameter blank 7 7 and manually add entries to the routing tables by typing routeAdd DESTINATION GATEWAY in the VxWorks shell where DESTINATION is the internet address of the destination host or network and GATEWAY is the internet address of the gateway Note Exe cution of the routeAdd commands can be automated to occur each time the system boots up by adding them to the startup cmd file using the edit startup cmd console command see Page 4 36 user This is only required if you plan to perform software upgrades over the network or to transfer log files across the network via RSH or FTP using 1og display tofile or to boot VxWorks over the network Otherwise enter to clear this field Users who wish to do so should enter the user name with which the S2 will access the remote host computer The named user should have read acce
343. t status information to the S2 internal log file for later examination Alternatively with the tofile option you can write status information over the network directly to a file on a remote computer if your S2 system is equipped with an Ethernet board and the remote host has been configured appropriately see the description of the tofile option under the log command for more information The decode option is used to translate numeric status codes to their cor responding text message either long or short format This may occasionally be useful if a status code appears in numeric form due to space limitations but status display is normally preferred as long as the status condition is still active since status decode does not show occurrence specific information such as channel or transport numbers which may be inserted into the message Places where such information gets inserted are marked by xxx For a complete listing and explanation of all status codes see Section 4 5 Command stop Syntax Stop Description Stops the S2 if it is currently in record playback rewind fast forward or any other tape motion state including alignment and positioning Automatically switches to the stop setup which is normally bypass on an RT and play on a PT The stop setup can be changed simply by selecting a new diagnostic signal path with the setup command while the S2 is stopped The stopsetup defaults file parameter can be used to define the stop s
344. t to during record The user DV flag can be ignored at playback by entering user dv playback disable indicated by the word ignored on the display Then data marked invalid by the user at record time will be treated as valid Tape speed Indicates the record or playback tape speed Legal speeds for recording are Ip and slp on AG2530 or earlier model transports and slp only on AG2550 and later transports All transport types can play back at either speed but playing slp tapes on AG2510 transports is not recommended due to poor performance During playback the unused speed sp may sometimes appear for blank spots on the tape this is normal All active transports must report the same speed during playback or this display will be blank Tape position Indicates the current overall tape position Position is measured as the number of seconds of recorded data since the beginning of tape and is normally displayed as hours minutes seconds e g 3 18 57 This format is similar to a tape time except that the hours portion is shown with only a single digit Alternately the The SLP speed is sometimes also called EP 52 User s Manual OPERATION position may be shown as an integer number of seconds by changing the pos disformat defaults file parameter Although there may be up to 8 tapes and therefore 8 different positions it is usually sufficient to deal with a single position value since the group of currently active transports wi
345. tage measurements type transport N status volt 26 Mnemonic STAT TRANBADRECSIG Type Fatal error Console Msg Tran nnn record clk data bad C3 Interpretation One or more transports are not receiving proper clock and data signals from the C3 cable Check the C3 cable connections and the interface circuits on either side 52 User s Manual 27 Interpretation 28 Interpretation 29 Interpretation 32 Interpretation Mnemonic Type Console Msg Mnemonic Type Console Msg Mnemonic Type Console Msg Mnemonic Type Console Msg OPERATION transport Formatter board To determine which of the clock data signals are miss ing type transport status recsig STAT ILMODE Fatal error Recorder mode is illegal The recorder mode is not properly set Caused by a failure in setting the mode and indicates a probable hardware fault on the UI board DDDV Xilinx chip down load chain STAT NOREFCLK Fatal error User reference S Clk C Clk X tal is absent The System Clock PLL is currently set to lock to an external high rate clock refclk mode but no clock is being supplied over the cable SCLK_REC or C2 cable CCLK If the System Clock PLL mode is set to xtal this message indicates a failure of the UI board on board 32 MHz crystal oscillator X tal STAT_NOREF1HZ Fatal error User ref S 1 C 1 Hz sync is absent The System Clock PLL is currently set to
346. tages should ever exceed 5 of nominal status code STAT VMEPOWTFAIL will appear xxx power supply bad R Command record Syntax record manual Description Starts recording The S2 must currently be stopped otherwise the record command is not allowed The physical write protect tabs on the VHS cassettes must be intact for recording to be possible If any tabs are broken the write protected tapes will be automatically ejected by the transports model AG2510 or the transports will beep 7 times and refuse to go into record models AG2520 and AG2530 or the transport tape display will flash and they will refuse to go into record model AG2550 In all cases the S2 status will indicate STAT RPMONILSTATE expected transport state change during play record Since breaking the record tabs will not normally be part of VLBI operational procedures an alternate way to prevent accidental erasure of tapes is provided by setting the writeprotect option in the system defaults file to While recording the S2 monitors the active transports and scans for abnormal conditions Anything unusual is reported in the system Status window Some of the diagnostic checks include Transport servos locked Transport record signal levels within allowed range Record loopback data contains valid sync and auxiliary data incl time The manual option suppresses most of the automatic monitoring and scanning allowing manual
347. tal error Similar summaries are provided for the RCL Overall system status can be considered perfect if there are no errors of either kind Non fatal errors should be noted by the user and probably investigated but usually pose no threat to system operation If any fatal errors appear there is a good chance that the system is not operating correctly and immediate corrective action should be taken Informational messages non highlighted are of course always benign The green front panel LED on the VME card cage remains lit as long as no fatal status conditions exist must be set to OK mode i e not blinking Note that the S2 will not automatically abort any operation even in the presence of fatal errors unless there is no possible way to continue or there is imminent danger of hardware damage The S2 status codes are listed on the following pages each with an explanation of what it means and what corrective action might be necessary They are ranked by code number in rough order of severity as they would appear in the console status window To help locate a status code quickly use the status display command to determine its code number the numbers are not shown in the status window due to space limitations 0 Mnemonic STAT OK Type Informational Console Msg none Interpretation Indicates system status OK no other status conditions exist 1 Mnemonic STAT DIAGIP Type Informational Console Msg Diagnostic test xxx in progress
348. te termination is shown in Figures B 4 B 5 and B 6 for fixed 32 MHz clock data rate clock and output mode cases respectively Note that in the MkIII IV output case the phase of the generated clock S CLK PB can be selected using the mk3 form clkinv console command depending on the requirements of the destination equipment B 2 1 2 Electrical Characteristics All signals are to be sourced by terminated ECL drivers i e all signals listed in Tables B 1 through B 4 are to be transmitted through C1 and C2 in both true and inverted polarity along twisted pairs In the receiver each twisted pair is terminated differentially in 100 ohms as shown in Figure B 7 B 2 1 3 Physical Characteristics The cable is to be Belden type 9V28050 50 conductor twisted pair cable or equivalent and connector P1 is to be 50 pin Scotch header part number 3433 5302 socket part number 3425 6600 with strain relief clips part number 3448 3050 or equivalent The C2a cable is to be Belden type 9V28050 50 conductor twisted pair cable or equivalent and connector P2a is to be 50 pin Scotch header part number 3433 5302 socket part number 3425 6600 with strain relief clips part number 3448 3050 or equivalent The C2b and C2c cables are to be Belden type 9V28020 20 conductor twisted pair cable or equivalent and connectors P2b and P2c are to be 20 pin Scotch header part number 3428 5302 socket part number 3421 6600 with strain relief clips part number 3448 3020 o
349. tem switch settings are not allowed during the self test This is a generic command 91 BERDCB Perform a bit error rate measurement using one of two test sequences FORM or Ul or perform a DC bias measurement on user data 92 DATA EXTRACT READ MU ES MENU dE data or validity from a particular user data 97 IDENT Return device type information string This is a generic command 98 PING Perform no action just return an ERR NONE response Useful for polling dead S2 to tell when it comes alive This is a generic command 99 VERSION Return ROS software version information string This is a generic command S2 PT User s Manual Responses are numbered from 100 to 199 decimal and are usually derived by adding 100 to the request command code Where more than one request returns the same response type the lowest numbered request has been used to derive the response code Responses are always sent from the S2 recorder slave to the external control computer Similar to generic commands certain responses are generic and should be implemented in the same way by all types of RCL devices APPENDIX A Code Resp Name Function General error condition OK response contains error code 0 pode message This is response 108 RESP STATE Tape motion state 110 RESP SPEED Transport record or playback tape speed 113
350. ters change the stop setup to bypass by typing setup bypass Tape Speed On S2 systems with AG2530 and earlier model transports either of two available tape speeds may be selected using the console speed command For LP long play enter speed 1p and for SLP super long play enter speed slp LP should be used when optimum bit error rate performance is desired SLP gives 50 longer recording times at somewhat higher bit error rates for more information see Chapter 5 SLP is sometimes also called EP With AG2550 and later model transports only the SLP speed is supported for record tapes recorded in LP can still be played back In many applications the tape speed will always be the same so a default value can be set in the system defaults file using the recordspeed parameter As shipped the default tape speed is SLP The defaults file is described in Section 4 2 7 Tape Type Several different types of tapes are approved for use in the S2 and the S2 needs to be informed which type is being used due to differences in magnetic properties Tape type codes are numbers from 1 to 9 or letters from A to 7 For a complete list see Chapter 5 or type tapetype typecodes In many applications the tape type will always be the same due to an established tape pool so a default value can be set in the system defaults file using the tapetype parameter Enabling Test Vector Data If you are not recording test tapes skip ahead to Starting the Recording
351. that performs large tracking jumps of 20 units or more Est error rate This gives an estimate of the raw bit error rate BER of the data being decoded averaged over the last 6 seconds During playback the estimate includes all decoded data i e up to 8 internal data channels 128 Mbits s total The exact number of channels included is shown in brackets beside the error rate and may vary de pending on the current mode or other factors The error rate estimate is computed not only during playback but also during record where the decoders are fed with diagnostic loopback data and thus the error rate will typically be negligible When There are two tracking algorithms phase 1 is performed by the transport green DIGITAL TRACKING light flashes if present and phase 2 is performed by ROS track cal message appears 52 User s Manual OPERATION recording there is only one active diagnostic signal path so the estimated error rate represents only one internal data channel of 16 Mbits s however the automatic record monitor continuously scans active transports for complete diagnostic cov erage To see individual channel error estimates type transport display esterr The estimated error rate is obtained by counting the number of incorrect 16 bit sync words found when decoding the data and extrapolating to encompass all data bits using an empirically derived formula We assume that the error rate is low so if a sync word is incorrect it is l
352. the data FIFOs Spurious Mark III data FIFO errors can be caused by changes in system timing such as when the setup is changed between play and bypass record or when the recorder mode is changed They can also appear when switching the Mark III formatter on or off Continuous Mark data FIFO errors probably mean a hardware fault on the UI board 45 Mnemonic STAT TRANSYNCERR32 Type Error clear on read Console Msg Tran nnn 32 Hz sync errs nnn Interpretation Indicates one or more transports have detected 32 Hz sync errors since the last status read RCL reset console A sync error is declared whenever the 32 Hz sync signal from the Formatter appears more then 5 microseconds from its expected location or is missing The 32 Hz sync is carried on the C3 cable multiplexed with the tape clock signal The number in brackets shows the highest number of sync errors of all the affected transports Isolated 32 Hz sync errors can be caused by glitches in system timing such as System Clock PLL sync errors STAT SCPLLSLIP and are usually not serious as long as no other status errors exist Continuous 32 Hz sync errors probably mean a C3 C4 cable connection fault or a hardware fault in the transport or the Formatter 52 User s Manual 46 Interpretation 47 Interpretation 48 Interpretation 49 Interpretation 51 Interpretation 52 Interpretation Mnemonic Type Console Msg Mnemonic Typ
353. the same way as the DELAY SET command However ALIGN should not be used to implement delay and delay rate tracking as this may interfere with the automatic play back monitoring use DELAY SET instead DELAY SET or ERRMES should be used in place of ALIGN for any regular delay adjustments that fall within the delay rate and acceleration limits given in the description of DELAY SET Two kinds of tape alignment are supported absolute and relative In ab solute alignment the external control computer specifies a time to which the S2 should align its tapes This time is referenced to the second it is received by the S2 i e it is the tape time that would appear if the procedure was in stantaneous but in fact alignment may take several seconds or minutes de pending on the distance to slew Because of the asynchronous nature of the Radioastronomy Control Link the external computer must issue the absolute align command immediately following an S 1 Hz output tick SIHZ PB on C2a cable and that tick is taken as the reference for the absolute time con tained in the command If it takes 20 seconds to align then the first valid data will be for the requested alignment time plus 20 seconds When it is not convenient to include the year and or day number in the absolute align ment time these can be automatically inferred based on the year and day number extracted from tape pass the year as 0 to infer both the year and day or 1 to infer just the
354. the waveform Atthe midpoint position the end of frame portion of the waveform should be relatively flat and look something like Figure 6 4 S2 PT User s Manual MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING 5 Adjust the P2 post using the same procedure as for P3 Figure 6 7 shows the beginning of frame distortion you might see at the extreme adjustment positions After adjusting to the midpoint position the beginning of frame portion should be relatively flat and look something like Figure 6 4 In cases of extreme initial misadjustment it may be beneficial to repeat the adjustment of the P3 post 6 Eject the alignment tape and restore software switch settings stop eject batch agcon Instead of running the agcon batch file you may simply wish to reboot Alternate No Scope Adjustment Method It is possible to align the tape guide posts without an oscilloscope using S2 console displays however this is slightly more difficult The Matsushita Panasonic alignment tape cannot be used you must use the S2 alignment tape as described in part A 1 Place the S2 alignment tape in the transport and rewind it If you need to rewind the tape again in the middle of the procedure do so and then repeat steps 2 and 3 2 Putthe transport into manual play transport N play manual 3 Set gain controls and tracking calibration as required by running noscope batch file supplied with ROS software version 3 1 and later If you do not have this batch file
355. ther enclosed space ventilation must be provided to ensure that this condition is met Temperature around each transport should be within 10 to 40 deg C Temperature inside each transport must be within 5 to 60 deg C or else thermal shutdown software will be triggered 52 User s Manual OPERATION 4 OPERATION 4 1 Overview This chapter describes how to operate the S2 Playback Terminal After some preliminary information and definitions a summary of basic operational procedures is given in Section 4 2 4 Detailed descriptions of screen displays and console commands follow in Sections 4 2 8 and 4 2 9 using more of a reference manual format Ethernet network information is in Section 4 4 and all S2 status codes are listed and described in detail in Section 4 5 The 52 Recorder can be operated using either one of two alternative interfaces the console terminal or the Ra dioastronomy Control Link RCL Both of these can use RS 232C serial links but the RCL can operate as an RS 485 multi drop link with the addition of an external conversion box allowing more than one device to be controlled from the same serial port On S2 systems equipped with an Ethernet board console and RCL connections can be made using network rlogin telnet and socket protocols eliminating the need for serial cables The console and the RCL may be used at the same time as long as operations don t interfere for example the console display can be used to mo
356. tion number and nickname are changed as side effects of other console commands and will automatically be updated in the file The termcap file is the terminal capabilities database in standard Berkeley Unix termcap format It may be necessary to edit this file to add new terminal types or fix the behaviour of existing terminals particularly with respect to function keys This requires knowledge of the Berkeley termcap format so an extract of the Unix reference manual on the subject of termcaps has been included in Appendix D To help define termcap entries for special keys such as function and cursor keys a useful utility is provided to decode ASCII character sequences Type shell to enter the VxWorks shell and then type showkey subsequent characters typed will be displayed in hex format Hit return twice to get back to the normal shell prompt To modify either of the above files use the console edit command and give the file s name This starts a full screen editor which is very similar to the Unix vi editor For those unfamiliar with vi online help can be obtained from within the editor by typing help and pressing return Briefly vi has two modes a command mode where letter and number keys have special functions and an insert mode where text is inserted into the file You are normally in command mode and can use the cursor keys to position the cursor to the point where you would like to make a change the 17 and I keys al
357. to as the diagnostic channel and diagnostic transport In a playback terminal the decoder DRD connected to the diagnostic transport is the diagnostic decoder The effect of changing the setup is to change the diagnostic loopback path and or the current diagnostic de coder The Decoder input display in the Crucial Parms window shows what the current setup is The setup also controls whether the system timing is set for playback or record Playback timing is used when playback data from the transports is being decoded and record timing is used at all other times There are four typical ways the setup command might be used First you can change the diagnostic loopback path e g setup ahook for analog direct hookup or setup bypass for transport bypass path Other options are dhook record and play If the S2 is stopped setting bypass record or play also selects the stop setup The stop setup is the setup used when the 52 is stopped or rewinding etc and 52 User s Manual OPERATION is treated specially in that it is variable The stop setup is normally bypass on an S2 RT and play on an S2 PT This ensures that the system timing does not get disturbed unnecessarily when going between play record and stop which may be desirable if external systems are locked to the output 1 Hz tick SIHZ PB on C2a cable Another way to use setup is to change the current diagnostic channel or transport For example during manual playback s
358. to edit a text file containing service history information 52 User s Manual OPERATION that is stored inside each transport in the EEPROM This file should be updated each time a transport is serviced cleaned repaired etc Follow the existing format and include the current total head time and nominal service hours as shown The maximum allowed file size is about 2 kilobytes transport N service dumpmem tofile transport N service loadmem NNNN These two commands should be used when replacing or swapping a transport s TCP board They allow all of the service and calibration information stored in the EEPROM to be transferred from the old TCP board to the new board the TCP board holds the EEPROM itself Otherwise important information such as head use time service history and pgshift and write current calibrations would be lost The transport N service dumpmem tofile command should be issued before replacing the TCP and the transport N service loadmem NNNN command should be issued after replacing the TCP and reassigning its ad dress where NNNN is the old TCP serial number swapping the TCP means that the serial number changes Note that if a TCP board has failed and it is not possible to carry out the initial dumpmem step you can still transfer recent values for the EEPROM parameters since the 52 performs a dumpmem for each transport on every system boot just in case transport N servic cleartimes This command can be used to zero
359. tput For ex ample in the crossbar string 51234760 decoder transport 5 is outputting data on internal channel 0 and decoder transport 7 is outputting on channel 5 The string 01234567 represents the identity mapping which means the tapes are in the right order The crossbar can be set manually using the def xbar command but this should not normally be necessary The display shows beside the crossbar setting if UI feed through mode is on to emphasize the fact that the outputs of the decoder s are not being used If the Mark III formatter is enabled Mk3 is shown to indicated that decoded output is being reformatted If both feed through and the Mark III formatter are on Mk3fthru is shown 52 User s Manual OPERATION 52 Recorder User Parms playback 24 1998 217 20 51 49 peratingzl System Tape ID Recorder mode 4x16 2 br ecu cT Station delay 1 Hz inl Transports Diag dec 4 in chan O tr 4 play 11 LI Diag dec time XXX XX XX XX XX 1 1 LI Diag dec sync OX uncalib 2 Ed li 3 11 LI User data valid Est err rate gt 1 0e 2 4 ch 4 1 LI Tape speed data valid 0 00 64 Mb s EJ LI Tape position 0 10 02 01 s Decoder Xbar 45670123 LI LI position 0 10 00 gt mode 4x16 2 Recorder mode set to 4x16 2 gt group 1 group 1 is selected Chelp 1 time 1 mode 1 Ctapeid 1 user 1 record 1 play
360. transport debug on 99 Mnemonic STAT DRFSETFADJ Type Informational clear on read Console Msg DR nnn Fine FSet adjustments nnn Interpretation Counts the number of incremental FSet adjustments following clock recovery lock acquisition If more than one DRD board is affected only the maximum count value is shown Excessive counts coupled with unstable data recovery calibration indicate a possible failure on the DRD board related to the VCO read back ADC Requires verbose level 3 to appear on both the console and the RCL 52 User s Manual OPERATION 4 6 Power on Self Test The power on self test procedure self test 1 is a comprehensive diagnostic designed to report a single fault or fault class with the limitation that it will not initiate tape motion and therefore does not perform a complete record playback test see Section 2 8 if you wish to test record and playback Multiple faults will correctly cause self test 1 to fail but may not be completely reported typically only one of the faults is shown The test makes no assumptions about user inputs on the C1 C2 cables except when the default System Clock PLL mode is refclk in which case the user reference clock and 1 Hz signals must be present Self test 1 runs automatically as part of the S2 startup procedure unless the skipselftest1 defaults file parameter is set to 1 If desired the self test may be executed manually from the console by typing diag self1 verbose While the t
361. trol 3 C2b 8 signals of output data validity representing the even user data channels 0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 in modes with 1 bit quantization or pairs of user channels in modes with 2 bit quantization In the case of 2 bit quantization each signal represents combined data validity for both sign and amplitude channels of the same and next higher channel number e g DV OUT 4 contains combined data validity for both user data channels 4 and 5 4 C2c 8 signals of output data validity representing the odd user channels 1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 in modes with 1 bit quantization Required only for 1 bit modes that use odd user data channels which includes only S2 modes of the form bxu 1 where u is greater than 1 Note that the C2c port is not located on the UI board s front panel instead it is a 20 pin header located on the PC board just behind the C2b port 1 2 S2 Control Interface The S2 control interface consists of two cables 1 C6 RS 232C RCL serial control cable connecting to a port on the Formatter board 2 C7 RS 232C console terminal cable connecting to a port on the RCC Equivalent control connections can be made over the Ethernet port using network rlogin telnet and socket protocols eliminating the need for serial cables see Section 4 4 2 52 Signal Interface B 2 Signal Assignments The input signal interface consists of a single multiconductor twisted pair cable C1 terminating in a connector P1 at the data source The
362. up to three modules one or two Transport Array Modules TAMs containing up to four tape transports each and one Data Signal and Control Module DSCM containing most of the system electronics 1 2 4 Transport Array Module TAM The TAM shown in Figure 1 1 consists of one to four 52 tape transports mounted in a custom rack which is de signed either for tabletop operation or which may be mounted in a 19 rack The transports are supported on sliders which are mounted to infill brackets within the rack The sliders allow easy removal of each transport and with the use of extension cables the operation of the transport in an easily accessible position outside the rack To lock the sliders in place for shipping and normal operation a nu dg IN Puce single removable slider block is used on the left hand 13 T9 pr eg side infill bracket Figure 1 1 Transport Array Module TAM 52 User s Manual INTRODUCTION The TAM racks have two user removable panels The front panel is held in place with four thumbscrews and is removed during normal operation The rear vented cover is also secured by hand removable thumbscrews but is normally in place when the unit is operating A fixed rear plate holds all power and signal connectors TAM Dimensions and Weight Each TAM is approximately 40 H x 44 W x 46 D cm and weighs about 36 kg with four transports 10 rack units are required for rack mounting 1 2 3 Data Signal
363. urate upper estimation range The strings returned in the two boundary cases are 1 0 6 and gt 1 0 2 al though the exact numbers may vary external software should check only for the initial lt or gt sign Estimated error rates are available in both record and playback states In record the error rate reflects the results of decoding data from the record diagnostic loopback path and will usually be below the minimum resolution threshold Because it has only one decoder an S2 RT may take between 1 and 3 minutes to build up a complete list of error rate estimates when first starting playback or record Until then error estimates are considered un known and appear as empty strings The same is true when recording on a PT because there is only one diagnostic path but not during playback This also means that at any time individual estimates might be several minutes old In addition certain status conditions can interfere with automatic play back record scanning and prevent estimates from being computed or cause them to stop being updated Also remember that the error rates are calculated for internal recorder channels and do not apply directly to user data channels unless the user data rate is 16 Mbits s e g mode 16x8 1 The estimated er ror rate values are for operator reference only and do not by themselves indi cate correct system functionality system status is used for that PDV READ 39 b
364. vant after they have been read Each status code has a short and a long version of the message The short message is limited to 34 characters and is typically used on the console The long message is limited to 399 characters but is usually shorter and is typically used on the RCL For a complete listing and explanation of all status codes see Section 4 5 Diagnostic The S2 software has certain diagnostic sequences such as the power on self test which evaluate system functionality and whose primary result is a single numeric code This code either indicates that the diagnostic test passed DIAG_OK or that it failed with the code number indicating the type of failure Diagnostic codes are positive numbers in the range 1 to 255 and each is associated with a mnemonic and a text description The console diag decode command can be used to trans late a code to its corresponding text message When a diagnostic code appears as part of a status message the diagnostic message is included in the long form status message from status decode 52 User s Manual OPERATION 52 Recorder User Parms playback 24 1998 217 19 18 56 Operating Sustem Tape ID Recorder mode 16x8 1 br Station delay 1 Hz inl Transports Diag dec in channel play Ox 1 Diag dec time XXX XX XX XX XX 1 CI Diag dec sync OX 115 2 11 3 11 User data valid Est err rate gt 1 0
365. viour for their environment Appendix C contains an example defaults file Each default parameter is documented right in the file and should be self explanatory Entering the name of a default parameter without any thing after it displays its current value e g default tapetype Specifying a new value for a parameter updates the defaults file accordingly e g default tapetype 3 52 User s Manual OPERATION To clear a parameter s value use the word blank Note that you cannot add new parameters or delete existing parameters in this way use edit defaults for that The fromfile and tofile options allow you to transfer the entire defaults file from or to a remote host over the network by specifying an appropriate remote file name The remote host must be configured to accept RSH requests or FTP logins from the S2 system and the host name address and RSH userid or FTP userid amp passwd must be entered in the S2 boot parameters see Section 4 4 1 Changes to the defaults file take effect only after the next system boot Command delay Syntax delay NUM s ms us ns bits relative Description Sets the station delay in absolute or relative terms In absolute terms this provides a positive or negative offset of up to 1 2 second between the external 1 Hz reference and the S2 internal 1 Hz timing Relative delay setting is indicated by adding the word relative and does not require the presence of an external 1 Hz ref erence
366. w just below the activity indicator set it with the station command 4 2 3 Console Command Entry 52 console commands follow the conventional format of a command word followed by parameters However several productivity enhancement features are provided to make commands quicker and easier to enter These features include soft keys command completion input line editing command history and batch files 4 2 3 1 Soft keys At any point while typing a command the current key word and parameter alternatives are shown in the 8 soft key labels at the bottom of the display Keywords are shown in lower case and can be entered in one step simply by pressing the function key 11 18 corresponding to the soft key position If you choose to type the keyword after each letter only those keywords which match what has been typed so far will remain on the display When only one remains pressing the space bar or tab key will complete it In addition to keywords numeric and string parameters appear in the soft key display as and STR or sometimes NNN and SSS Most such 52 User s Manual OPERATION parameters include a word in angle brackets that describes the quantity to be entered e g NUM lt year gt indicates a year number Whenever there are more than 8 possibilities soft key 8 will show indicating that further alternatives can be obtained by pressing function key f8 If there is a syntax erro
367. whereas absolute setting does During recording the station delay deter mines the offset between the user s 1 Hz reference SIHZ REC on cable or C1HZ on C2 cable and the time used to label the bits on tape During playback the station delay determines the offset between the user s 1 Hz reference and when the corresponding data bit is output on the C2 cable BNC jacks labeled 1Hz REC and 1Hz PB are provided on the S2 DSCM front panel for user measurement of the S2 internal 1 Hz tick the appropriate jack should be used whether in record or playback The 52 performs its own measurement of the station delay which is displayed in the Crucial Parms window The delay amount can be expressed in units of seconds milliseconds mi croseconds nanoseconds or bits samples at the current user data rate and can be entered as a floating point number The exact delay range limits are from 0 5 seconds to one bit short of 0 5 seconds for absolute delays and one bit short of 1 0 second to one bit short of 1 0 second for relative delays delay settings are rounded off to the nearest bit The value displayed by the delay command indicates the actual absolute delay implemented after rounding Since the station delay value shown in the Crucial Parms window is a measurement it may not match the latest delay setting in the event of a timing glitch or other similar event see Station delay Page 4 18 The two values also will not match in System Cl
368. x8 1 e System Clock PLL mode set to xtal e formatter diagnostic sequence on The batch file then records a pseudo random test data sequence for 30 minutes Following the recording the tapes are rewound and played back and bit error rate measurements are made on each of the eight tape channels These measurements along with any detected status errors are recorded in the S2 internal log file When playback is complete any status errors recorded in the log file during the record or playback phases are displayed You will be prompted to press return then the accumulated bit error rates for three minutes per channel of playback data are displayed There will be 8 lines of output of the form 0022 E 189 12 15 23 174 10 51 31 1 23e 5 0 0 11520 The fourth column from the right shows the bit error rate followed by the data channel number and transport number Verify that the error rate is less than 1 0e 4 for each transport if LP speed was used berlp tst batch file If SLP speed was used berslp tst batch file verify that the error rate is less than 3 0e 3 for each individual transport and that the average over all 8 transports is less than 1 0e 3 Not all 8 output lines fit on the screen at once so you will have to press return It is a good idea to write down these bit error rate numbers for future reference In order to test tape interchange eject the tapes and rotate them by one position i e the tape recorded in transport 0 18 inserted into tra
369. y be lost at playback USER INFO READ 21 bytel Info field number 1 to 4 byte2 Boolean 0x00 Read field value 0 01 Read field label total data bytes 2 RESP USER INFO 0 5 sec user info 1121314 also displayed on console screen Reads the current setting of one of the user information fields or labels as set using USER INFO SET This is the user info to be recorded not the playback user info USER INFO READ PB 22 52 User s Manual Data Expected Resp Timer Duration Eq Console Cmd Description 23 Command Msg Code Data Expected Resp Timer Duration Eq Console Cmd Description 24 Command Msg Code Data Expected Resp Timer Duration Eq Console Cmd APPENDIX A bytel Info field number 1 to 4 byte2 Boolean 0x00 Read field value 0 01 Read field label total data bytes 2 RESP_USER_INFO 0 5 sec user info 1121314 also displayed on console screen Reads one of the playback user info fields or labels The S2 must currently be playing back properly recorded tapes and all of them must indicate the same user info value this should automatically be true if the tapes are aligned and may or may not be true if they are not Since the user info can be changed at any time during record the value retumed by USER INFO READ PB reflects its instantaneous value around the current tape time If the tapes are playing but not sufficiently aligned so that user info is
370. y measurement greater than about 6 x 10 s Smooth delay tracking is still attempted although internal timing problems resulting in loss of play back data become more likely in this situation Smooth delay tracking is sus pended for delay errors or steps greater than about 3 x 10 s at which time phase offsetting is used to adjust the delay DELAY READ 30 none RESP DELAY 0 5 sec delay Returns the current station delay setting from the last DELAY SET com mand For various reasons including movement or glitching of the 1 Hz refer ence or finite system clock PLL VCO precision when not in refclk mode this may not be the same as the true measured delay value see next com mand The station delay is expressed in absolute terms even if the last DE LAY SET command was relative and will be in the range 0 5 sec to one bit time short of 40 5 sec See RESP DELAY for the exact reply format DELAYM READ 52 User s Manual Msg Code Data Expected Resp Timer Duration Eq Console Cmd Description 32 Expected Resp Timer Duration Eq Console Cmd Description 33 Timer Duration Eq Console Cmd Description 34 Command Msg Code Data Command Msg Code Data Expected Resp Command Msg Code Data APPENDIX A 31 none RESP DELAY 0 5 sec none delay measurement displayed on console screen Returns the latest station delay measurement This is the true clock offset between
371. y not proceeding successfully and cor rective action should be taken The green OK LED on the front of the VME card cage will go out when FAIL appears in the status window pro vided the ledmode defaults file parameter is set to ok Note that fatal clear on read status errors cause the FAIL condition to persist until status is manually reset using status reset even if the fatal condition is no longer true The LED reacts to clear on read errors slightly dif ferently It will go back on either when status reset is typed or when the RCL status is read implicitly clearing clear on read conditions while the console FAIL indicator is unaffected by the RCL 52 User s Manual OPERATION 4 2 8 3 User Parms Window upper middle Figure 4 1 Top line Gives the name of the window since this area of the display can also show other windows type user to switch to the User Parms window if it is not currently displayed If the word record appears on the top line in brackets the rest of the window shows information that is being or would be recorded on tape If the word playback appears in brackets the rest of the window shows information being extracted from tape specifically the tape in the transport feeding the current diagnostic decoder When the 52 is stopped or rewinding fast forward winding po sitioning the stop setup determines whether record or playback parameters are shown If the stop setup is play pl
372. ype Fatal error Console Msg Tran nnn rec data has bad aux Interpretation The diagnostic loopback data from one or more transports has excessive errors in the decoded auxiliary data during automatic record This may mean that data is not being recorded properly and should be investigated immediately Possible causes include Formatter failure transport failure DRD failure or marginal C3 C4 cable connections 52 User s Manual 71 Interpretation 72 Interpretation 73 Interpretation 74 Interpretation 75 Console Msg Interpretation 76 Interpretation 71 Interpretation Mnemonic Type Console Msg Mnemonic Type Console Msg Mnemonic Type Console Msg Mnemonic Type Console Msg Mnemonic Type Mnemonic Type Console Msg Mnemonic Type Console Msg OPERATION STAT RECBADCHID Fatal error nnn rec data has wrong chid The diagnostic loopback data from one or more transports contains the wrong chan nel ID during automatic record This indicates incorrect wiring of the C3 or C4 cables and should have been caught by the power on self test STAT BADAGCLEV Fatal error Tran nnn AGC levels out of range One or more transport AGC levels are outside the acceptable range during auto matic record or play the AGC level indicates record or playback signal strength During record this probably means that the data is
373. yte4 Day number 1 to 365 366 byte3 MSB byte5 Hours 0 to 23 byte6 Minutes 0 to 59 byte7 Seconds 0 to 59 byte8 Time validated flag 0x00 time not validated set 0 01 time set total data bytes 8 System or tape time and time validated flag see TIME READ TIME READ PB commands RESP_MODE 116 bytel Mode designator in the form of an ASCII string terminated by a NULL 0 character maximum 20 characters not incl NULL total data bytes length of string 1 max 21 Recorder mode designator see MODE_SET MODE_READ commands 52 User s Manual 118 Description 121 Description 124 Description 127 Description 128 Response Msg Code Data Response Msg Code Data Response Msg Code Data Response Msg Code Data Response Msg Code Data APPENDIX A RESP TAPEID 118 bytel ASCII Tape ID string terminated by a NULL 0 character maxi mum 20 characters not incl NULL total data bytes length of string 1 max 21 Tape ID value see TAPEID SET TAPEID READ TAPEID READ PB com mands RESP USER INFO 121 bytel ASCII info field or label string terminated by a NULL 0 charac ter maximum sizes not incl NULL as follows Field 1 16 chars Field 2 16 chars Field 3 32 chars Field 4 48 chars Label 1 4 16 chars total data bytes length of string 1 max 49 User info field or label see USER INFO SET US
374. ytel ordering of returned list 0x00 in order of transports 0 7 0 01 in order of internal recorder channels 0 7 total data bytes 1 RESP PDV 0 5 sec transport display dv Returns a list of percent data valid Each entry in the list corresponds to a transport and or S2 internal data channel number although this fact can be ig nored The number of entries in the list depends on how many channels trans ports are currently active as determined by the current mode The list can be further processed externally to compute an average or select the highest amp lowest entries The ordering of the list can be either by transport or by in ternal recorder channel If by transport the order corresponds to the physical transports and the tapes they contain If by channel the order is independent of playback tape ordering and corresponds to the ordering of transports and tapes at record time The default should usually be ordering by transport data bytel 0x00 Percent data valid is encoded as ASCII strings instead of as binary floating point quantities to avoid problems with incompatible floating point representations The DV value is obtained by integrating a channel s data validity sig nal over a one second period where 100 0096 indicates all data was valid and 0 00 indicates no data was valid DV is available in both record and playback states In record the value reflects the results of decoding data from the record di

PT - Australia Telescope National Facility

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents